FCC ID: NWS10801 Avionics Communication Management Unit

 

UNILINK UL-800/801 OPERATORS MANUAL

(FANS Disabled) SCN 30.X With Corporate Database The information contained herein is subject to the Export Administration Regulations (EAR), 15 C.F.R. Parts 730-774. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. This document is available at www.uasc.com 2011 UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual RECORD OF REVISIONS Rev No. Issue Date Insertion Date Initials Retain this record in front of the manual. Upon receipt of revision, insert and remove pages according to the List of Effective Pages. Then enter on this page the revision number, issue date, insertion date and your initials. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 ROR-1 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual RECORD OF TEMPORARY CHANGES Change Issue Date/

Insertion Date &

No. Page Initials Removal Date /

Initials / Reason 23-20-06.01 December 2011 ROTC-1 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES Original..XX October 2010 Date Page No. Page No. Date Cover .............................. xx/xx/11 21 .................................... xx/xx11 22 .................................... xx/xx11 ROR-1 ............................. xx/xx11 25 .................................... xx/xx11 26 .................................... xx/xx11 ROTC-1 ........................... xx/xx11 23 .................................... xx/xx11 24 .................................... xx/xx11 LOEP-1............................ xx/xx11 25 .................................... xx/xx11 LOEP-2............................ xx/xx11 26 .................................... xx/xx11 27 .................................... xx/xx11 TOC-1 ............................. xx/xx11 28 .................................... xx/xx11 TOC-2 ............................. xx/xx11 29 .................................... xx/xx11 30 .................................... xx/xx11 1 ...................................... xx/xx11 31 .................................... xx/xx11 2 ...................................... xx/xx11 32 .................................... xx/xx11 3 ..................................... xx/xx11 33 .................................... xx/xx11 4 ...................................... xx/xx11 34 .................................... xx/xx11 5 ...................................... xx/xx11 35 .................................... xx/xx11 6 ...................................... xx/xx11 36 .................................... xx/xx11 7 ...................................... xx/xx11 37 .................................... xx/xx11 8 ...................................... xx/xx11 38 .................................... xx/xx11 9 ...................................... xx/xx11 39 .................................... xx/xx11 10 .................................... xx/xx11 40 .................................... xx/xx11 11 .................................... xx/xx11 41 .................................... xx/xx11 12 .................................... xx/xx11 42 .................................... xx/xx11 13 .................................... xx/xx11 43 .................................... xx/xx11 14 .................................... xx/xx11 44 .................................... xx/xx11 15 .................................... xx/xx11 45 .................................... xx/xx11 16 .................................... xx/xx11 46 .................................... xx/xx11 17 .................................... xx/xx11 47 .................................... xx/xx11 18 .................................... xx/xx11 48 .................................... xx/xx11 19 .................................... xx/xx11 49 .................................... xx/xx11 20 .................................... xx/xx11 50 .................................... xx/xx11 23-20-06.01 December 2011 LOEP-1 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Date Page No. Page No. Date 51 .................................... xx/xx11 86 .................................... xx/xx11 52 .................................... xx/xx11 53 .................................... xx/xx11 54 .................................... xx/xx11 55 .................................... xx/xx11 56 ................................... xx/xx11 57 .................................... xx/xx11 58 .................................... xx/xx11 59 .................................... xx/xx11 60 .................................... xx/xx11 61 .................................... xx/xx11 62 ................................... xx/xx11 63 .................................... xx/xx11 64 .................................... xx/xx11 65 .................................... xx/xx11 66 .................................... xx/xx11 67 .................................... xx/xx11 68 .................................... xx/xx11 69 .................................... xx/xx11 70 .................................... xx/xx11 71 .................................... xx/xx11 72 .................................... xx/xx11 73 .................................... xx/xx11 74 .................................... xx/xx11 75 .................................... xx/xx11 76 .................................... xx/xx11 77 .................................... xx/xx11 78 .................................... xx/xx11 79 .................................... xx/xx11 80 .................................... xx/xx11 81 .................................... xx/xx11 82 .................................... xx/xx11 83 .................................... xx/xx11 84 .................................... xx/xx11 85 .................................... xx/xx11 LOEP-2 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION.................................................................................. 1 Components ..................................................................................... 1 Capabilities ....................................................................................... 1 Operations ........................................................................................ 2 FMS Input ..................................................................................... 2 Current Time ................................................................................. 2 SEND ............................................................................................ 3 Error Messages ............................................................................. 7 User Interface Menu Tree................................................................. 9 UniLink Menu 1/2 ........................................................................ 10 UniLink Menu 1/2 (continued) ..................................................... 11 UniLink Menu 2/2 ........................................................................ 12 Maintenance Menu ..................................................................... 12 Configuration Menu ..................................................................... 14 UNILINK MENU.................................................................................. 15 Flight Information ............................................................................ 16 ATIS Request .............................................................................. 17 TWIP Request ............................................................................ 18 Departure Clearance Request .................................................... 19 Oceanic Clearance Request ....................................................... 20 Verify Message Log .................................................................... 21 Pushback Clearance Request .................................................... 22 Expected Taxi Clearance Request ............................................. 23 Remarks Create and Include with Requests ........................... 24 FREE-TEXT Create and Send a Message .................................. 26 Create and Send a Message ...................................................... 26 Send a Message to another Aircraft ........................................... 27 Send an E-Mail............................................................................ 28 Send a Fax .................................................................................. 29 OOOI .............................................................................................. 30 OOOI Operation .......................................................................... 30 OOOI Current .............................................................................. 32 OOOI History .............................................................................. 33 COMM STATUS ............................................................................. 34 COMM CONTROL ...................................................................... 38 Text Weather Report Requests ...................................................... 45 Weather Map Requests .................................................................. 47 US Composite Radar .................................................................. 47 US Radar Tops and Movement .................................................. 48 IR Satellite ................................................................................... 50 Icing/Turbulence Potential .......................................................... 51 IFR/MVFR ................................................................................... 53 Significant Weather ..................................................................... 54 23-20-06.01 December 2011 TOC-1 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Winds Aloft .................................................................................. 55 Weather Map Log ............................................................................ 57 Message Logs (SCN 30.X) .............................................................. 59 Verified Messages (SCN 30.X) .................................................... 60 Operations Messages (SCN 30.X) .............................................. 62 Weather Map Logs ...................................................................... 63 View Message - Detailed Message Screen ................................. 64 Delete or Print a Message ........................................................... 65 DELAY ............................................................................................. 66 DIVERSION ..................................................................................... 67 ETA UPDATE .................................................................................. 69 SELCAL ........................................................................................... 70 SITUATION ..................................................................................... 71 POS REPORT ................................................................................. 72 Maintenance .................................................................................... 74 Tests ............................................................................................ 74 GLOSSARY ........................................................................................ 79 INDEX ................................................................................................. 85 TOC-2 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual INTRODUCTION UniLink is an air-to-ground digital data communication system that operates with Universal Avionics Systems Corporations (UASCs) Fight Management Systems (FMSs). It is capable of using a variety of media such as Satellite Communications (SatCom) and Very High Frequency (VHF) communications to exchange data with Datalink Service Providers (DSPs). When communicating over the Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting System (ACARS) network, UniLink is the functional equivalent of an ARINC 758 Communications Management Unit (CMU). The UL-801 contains an imbedded VHF data radio (VDR) whereas the UL-800 requires an external VDR. The VDR provides ACARS and various other types of network communications capability for UniLink. The UniLink UL-80X database-driven user interface and message set is easily customized to match airline operational requirements uploaded into the UL-80X without affecting product software or certification status. NOTE: The current UniLink 80X uses Software Control Number (SCN) 30.X. It is important to ensure that operating documentation reflects the SCN being used. NOTE: The colors shown on the screens in this operators manual are based on an FMS with SCN 1000.5/1100.5 installed and configured for STANDARD-2 color pallet. Components A VHF receiver transmitter or ARINC 741 SatCom is required for full ACARS communications. An airborne telephone system is required to obtain weather graphics and is capable of providing limited ACARS communication with some service providers. Capabilities The two-way data link allows the crew to request and receive clearances, weather reports, and messages. Weather graphics are available on UASCs FMS using flat panel displays and air phone equipment. UniLink advisories alert the crew to newly received messages. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 1 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Operations Crew interface is accomplished through the FMS CDU and/or MCDU, utilizing a UASC FMS with SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later. Data may be entered at any field highlighted by a cursor. The cursor is displayed in the first empty data field. Fields with plus signs (+) indicate information is required. Fields exhibiting minus signs (-) indicate input is optional. If there is no cursor displayed in a data field, selecting the ENTER key will place the cursor over the first enterable field on the page. Data is then entered into the field using the CDU/MCDU alphanumeric keys. In some situations, flight progress and related data from the FMS will be prefilled. Subsequent presses of the [ENTER] key will move the cursor to the next enterable field. Pressing a line select key (LSK) highlights the corresponding data entry field. Selecting [ENTER] when the cursor is in the last data field on the page results in the cursor parking off of the page. Pressing [ENTER] again positions the cursor on the initial enterable field on the page. FMS Input The FMS continuously provides current data to UniLink. Many messages and requests have fields that prefill with FMS flight progress data and computed information. In most cases the user accepts the data for inclusion into the message. It is possible however to change a value by overriding that value with a manual data entry. Manual entries are generally retained until power shutdown, although data that would normally change as a flight progresses will be cleared once the page has been exited (is no longer displayed). Source FMS The crew must ensure that the FMS that is navigating the aircraft

(Source FMS) is the same FMS that supplies data to UniLink. The Source FMS is shown on the SOURCE FMS page, accessed via MAINTENANCE (1/3) > SENSOR STATUS > SOURCE FMS. SOURCE FMS selection method selected fms manual {*}FMS1 FMS2 UNILINK RETURN z 23-20-06.01 December 2011 2 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual The Source FMS is indicated by an asterisk next to it. Any available FMS can be manually selected by pressing the adjacent LSK. If automatic (AUTO) selection is desired, the SELECTION METHOD LSK will toggle between MANUAL and AUTO. NOTE: It is important for the crew to ensure that the Source FMS is not changed prior to an expected flight plan modification uplink. If the Source FMS is changed prior to the uplink, the flight plan information will need to be transferred to the new Source FMS from the previously designated FMS. transition Communications Prior to entering Oceanic Airspace (and loss of VHF communications) the crew should suspend VHF and to satellite communication (See STATE under VHF DATA in the COMM CONTROL section). The crew must enable VHF communications once again when reentering a VHF-available region. Current Time On every UniLink screen above the RETURN option at LSK [5R], the current UTC time is displayed. SEND When the SEND LSK is pressed, the request is placed into queue for transmission. The delivery status of the message appears above the SEND option. If data required for the message has not been entered completely, the SEND option will display as inactive and if selected, a pop-up window DATA REQUIRED will display (indicating the data is insufficient).The SEND prompt will not display an arrow (indicating active) until all required data is entered. Clear the pop-up window by pressing any key or LSK. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 3 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual SEND status displays the current status of the message. When the SEND LSK is pressed, the status will briefly change to QUEUED, then SENDING. The selected media for transmission (VHF, SAT, or TEL) is indicated after SENDING. When acknowledgement is received from the DSP, SENT status will display. 4 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual UniLink Advisories The bottom left LSK on each UniLink page will display either the UNILINK MENU prompt or UniLink advisories. UniLink advisories notify the crew of UniLink activity that may require user action. Only one advisory will display at a time in the order of priority. Pressing the adjacent LSK allows viewing of the advisory message. When no advisory is displayed, the advisory field is used to display the UNILINK MENU prompt. Selecting this prompt displays the UNILINK MENU. When on an FMS page, UniLink advisories will be indicated by the flashing MSG annunciator. Pressing the [MSG] key will allow viewing of UniLink advisories and messages via the NEW MESSAGE Advisory prompt (LSK [5L]). This will open the appropriate UniLink page. Advisory Messages NEW ERROR MSG This advisory is active when an unviewed entry exists in the Error Log. Selection of this advisory displays the detailed error message page for most recently logged error message that has not been viewed. ACKNOWLEDGE Indicates that an uplink message that is displayed requires an acknowledgment message. NEW MSG Indicates a new unverified message in the Uplink Log. Selection of this advisory displays the detailed message page for the latest unread unverified message. acknowledgment. Selection will send crew NEW VERIF MSG Indicates a new verified message in the Uplink Log. Selection of this advisory displays the detailed message page for the latest unread verified message. NEW WX MAP Indicates a new unviewed weather graphic in the Graphic Log. Selection of this advisory displays the most recent graphic. SELCAL Indicates a SELCAL request has been received. Selection of this advisory displays the SELCAL page. VHF VOICE (applies to UL-800 only) Indicates the VDR is in Voice Mode. Selection of this advisory displays the VHF VOICE page. TEL SUSPEND Indicates the configured dial attempt limit has been reached and TEL LINK has been suspended (or TEL LINK has been manually suspended). Selection of this advisory displays the TEL DATA page. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 5 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual GND DELAY Indicates a configurable timer has elapsed since the last OUT event (push back) and the OFF event (take off) has not yet occurred. Selection of this advisory displays the EST TIME OFF page. NOCOMM Indicates multiple air/ground links are not available. Selection of this advisory displays the COMM STATUS page. SAT NOCOMM Indicates the configured SatCom air/ground link is not available. Selection of this advisory displays the COMM STATUS page. TEL NOCOMM telephony

(SatCom) system link is not available. Selection of this advisory displays the COMM STATUS page. VHF NOCOMM Indicates UniLink has determined that a VHF air/ground link is not available. Selection of this advisory displays the COMM STATUS page. the configured airborne Indicates 6 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Error Messages Most error messages generate a NEW ERROR MSG advisory which is displayed in the ERROR LOG pages. Certain error messages which are considered more urgent are displayed in a pop-up window in the middle of the current UniLink page. Examples include: QUEUE FULL, DISPLAY PROCESSOR FAIL and A740: PRINTER FAIL. Entry Error Pop-up Windows UniLink provides feedback when an invalid entry is made. After an invalid entry, a pop-up window identifies the entry error. The following is a list of data entry errors and the condition that will initiate the error pop-up window. Screen Text VALUE TOO LARGE VALUE TOO SMALL TOO MANY CHARACTERS TOO FEW CHARACTERS VALUE MUST BE NUMERIC VALUE MUST BE ALPHABETIC TOO MUCH PRECISION 23-20-06.01 December 2011 Condition The entered numeric value exceeds the allowable maximum. The entered numeric value is less than the allowable minimum. The entered number of characters exceeds the allowable maximum. The entered number of characters is less than the allowable minimum. The prompt only accepts digits. The prompt only accepts letters. The entered numeric value has too many numbers to the right of the decimal point. 7 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Screen Text NEGATIVE NOT PERMITTED MISSING N OR S MISSING E OR W INVALID NUMBER INVALID ENTRY ILLEGAL HYPHEN ILLEGAL VHF FREQUENCY ILLEGAL DATA FREQUENCY PRESSURE OUT OF RANGE INVALID SECONDS VALUE INVALID MINUTES VALUE INVALID HOURS VALUE INVALID DAY INVALID MONTH INVALID YEAR INVALID LEAP YEAR 8 Condition The prompt only accepts positive numbers. The entered latitude does not specify a hemisphere. The entered longitude does not specify a hemisphere. The entered characters could not be interpreted as a number. The entered characters do not conform to specific textual data item input restrictions. The entered tail number begins or ends with a hyphen. The entered frequency is not a valid VHF voice or data frequency, or is the CSC frequency (136.975). The Emergency Voice frequency

(121.500) has been entered at a prompt that expects to receive a data frequency. The entered atmospheric pressure is out of range. The entered seconds value within a time field is invalid. The entered minutes value within a time field is invalid. The entered hours value within a time field is invalid. The entered day value within a date field is invalid. The entered month value within a date field is invalid. The entered year value within a date field is invalid. The entered date value includes Feb 29th in a year that is not a leap year. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Condition The entered seconds value within a latitude or longitude field is invalid. The entered minutes value within a latitude or longitude field is invalid. An attempt has been made to navigate to a new page or send a request without supplying required information. Screen Text INVALID SECONDS INVALID MINUTES DATA REQUIRED Alerting Message Alerting Message alerting functions include visual and aural alerts, and digital outputs to various Line-Replaceable Units (LRU). The outputs are intended to drive visual or aural alerting when a new uplink message is received. The digital outputs provide messaging alerts that may be used by other devices for additional alerting functions, such as the FMS MSG annunciator. Alert Inhibiting UniLink Alert Inhibiting operates in order to suspend the output of message alerting during critical phases of flight (i.e., takeoff and landing). Displayed UniLink advisories are not suppressed during critical flight phases. NOTE:

If UniLink transitions out of the takeoff phase due to transitioning directly into the landing phase, UniLink will continuously inhibit alert outputs. This ensures there are no aural alerts that could potentially distract the crew. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 9 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual User Interface Menu Tree The UniLink Main Menu page is accessed from the UNILINK prompt on either DATA 1/4 or the MESSAGE page (from a reboot or initial startup). To navigate down through the menu tree, select the applicable page option LSKs to move to the desired function. Use the RETURN LSK to move back up the menu tree. Pages shown in the menu trees may or may not be available depending on specific installation configuration. Check with installer for specific configuration details. UniLink Menu 1/2

(Continued on next page) NOTES:

1. Only available if OOOI is enabled in configuration. 2. Only available if VHF is enabled in configuration. 3. Only available if DATA is enabled in configuration. 4. Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration. 10 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual UniLink Menu 1/2 (continued)

(Continued on next page) NOTES:

1. Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 11 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual UniLink Menu 2/2 NOTE: The SELCAL option only displays when associated messages are available and pending. NOTES:

1. Check with DSP for availability of this feature. 12 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Maintenance Menu Maintenance pages are used to access UniLink maintenance-related functions. They are accessed by pressing the MAINTENANCE LSK on the UNILINK MENU page 2/2. Other than TESTS, there are no user-

related functions that are performed on this page or subpages. See the associated UniLink installation and maintenance procedures. Installation Manual for 23-20-06.01 December 2011 13 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Configuration Menu Configuration pages are used to access UniLink configuration-related functions. They are accessed by selecting the CONFIG LSK on the MAINTENANCE 1/3 page. There are no user-related functions that are performed on this page or subpages. See the associated UniLink Installation Manual for installation and configuration procedures. MAINTENCE 1/3

(continued from previous page) SYS CONFIG 1/4 I/O CONFIG DISC IN DISC OUT ARINC RX ARINC TX SERIAL GRAPHICS VHF CONFIG SAT CONFIG PRIORITY TEL CONFIG POS REPORT REVIEW SYS CONFIG 2/4 AiRCRAFT CLEARANCES ALERTS SYS CONFIG 3/4 SYS CONFIG 4/4 14 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual UNILINK MENU Menu Navigation: DATA (1/4) or MESSAGE 1/1 >UNILINK MENU 1/2 The UniLink Menu pages are accessed by selecting UNILINK from either DATA 1/4 page or the MESSAGE 1/X page. The DATA 1/4 page is accessed by pressing the [DATA] key. The MESSAGE 1/X page is accessed by pressing the [MSG] key. NOTE: Based on installation and configuration, the FLIGHT NO. field may or may not be displayed. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 15 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Flight Information Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > FLIGHT INFO On the UNILINK MENU 1/2 Page, press FLIGHT INFO, LSK [1L], to access the FLIGHT INFO page. All services provided on this menu are available only over the ACARS VHF or SatCom packet data network. NOTE: Flight Information Services are advisory only. It is the responsibility of the pilot to exercise reasonable and prudent judgment in the use of these advisory services. NOTE: DEPARTURE, OCEANIC, PUSHBACK, and EXP TAXI requests are configurable options and are not displayed if configured as disabled. The aircraft tail number is automatically inserted in the CALL SIGN field. If the aircraft has a different ATS call sign assigned for the flight, it should be manually entered. To manually enter a callsign:

1. Press LSK [1R]. The CALLSIGN field will become active. 2. Enter the desired callsign using the alphanumeric keys. 3. Press [ENTER]. The new callsign will display in the field. 16 23-20-06.01 December 2011 ATIS Request UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Menu navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > FLIGHT INFO > D-ATIS The D-ATIS page is used to request local arrival or departure Automatic Terminal Information Service (ATIS). To request ATIS:

1. Press D-ATIS, LSK [1L] on the FLIGHT INFO page. The D-ATIS page will display. 2. With AIRPORT active, enter the Airport Identifier and press

[ENTER], or accept the default destination airport from the FMS flight plan. NOTE: If an incomplete identifier is entered, the message TOO FEW CHARACTERS will display and the field will flash. Pressing the LSK and re-entering a complete identifier will correct the error. 3. DEPT is the default type of ATIS. Press TYPE, LSK [2R] to toggle the field between ARRV and DEPT as needed. 4. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the message in queue for transmission. NOTE: If the information on this page is incomplete, the pop-up window DATA REQUIRED will display and the SEND prompt will not enable. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 17 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual TWIP Request Menu navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > FLIGHT INFO > TWIP The TWIP page is used to request Terminal Weather Information for Pilots (TWIP). To make a TWIP request:

1. Press TWIP, LSK [2L] on the FLIGHT INFO page. The TWIP page will display. 2. With AIRPORT active, enter a destination airport and press

[ENTER] or accept the Destination Airport from the FMS flight plan. NOTE: If an incomplete identifier is entered, the message TOO FEW CHARACTERS will display and the field will flash. Pressing the LSK and re-entering a complete identifier will correct the error. 3. Press the SEND LSK to place this message in queue for transmission. The SEND prompt will not be enabled if the information on this page is incomplete. NOTE: If the information on this page is incomplete, the pop-up window DATA REQUIRED will display and the SEND prompt will not enable. 18 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Departure Clearance Request Menu navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > FLIGHT INFO > DEPARTURE The DEPARTURE CLX page is used to request departure clearance. To request a Departure Clearance:

1. Press DEPARTURE, LSK [3L] on the FLIGHT INFO page. The DEPARTURE CLX page will display. 2. Verify or change the ORIG (origination) airport. This field defaults to the departure airport identifier from the FMS. 3. Verify or change the DEST (destination) airport. This field defaults to the destination airport from the FMS. 4. Enter GATE number (optional). 5. Press the REMARKS LSK to enter any remarks as needed (see the REMARKS Section in this manual). 6. Enter the latest ATIS version (alpha character). 7. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place this message in queue for transmission. NOTE: The SEND prompt will not be enabled if the required information on this page is incomplete, the call sign from the Flight Information Services page is not entered, or the aircraft type has not been configured from Aircraft Configuration page. Any attempt to send this request with incomplete information will result in the pop-up window DATA REQURED displaying. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 19 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Oceanic Clearance Request Menu navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > FLIGHT INFO > OCEANIC The OCEANIC CLX page is used to request Oceanic Clearance. To request an Oceanic Clearance:

1. Press OCEANIC, LSK [4L] on the FLIGHT INFO page. The OCEANIX CLX page will display. 2. Press ATC, LSK [1L] to open the OCEANIX CLX ATC page. 3. Select the ATC Station using the adjacent LSK, or enter a station ID in the OTHER field, LSK [R4]. The OCEANIX CLX page will display, showing the selected ATC station. If not active, press ENTRY POINT, LSK [3L] and enter the point of entry into oceanic airspace, then press [ENTER}. 4. NOTE: The Entry can have from 3 to 11 characters to specify the position by latitude/longitude, or by waypoint identifier. 5. If not active, press ENTRY TIME, LSK [3L] and enter the requested time for the clearance. Press [ENTER]. 20 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual 6. 7. If not active, press MACH, LSK [2R] and enter the requested Mach number. Press [ENTER]. If not active, press ALTITUDE, LSK [3R] and enter the requested flight level. Press [ENTER]. 8. Press REMARKS, LSK [4L] and enter any remarks as needed. OCEANIC Clearance remarks are entered using the OCEANIC CLX REMARKS page (see the REMARKS Page section in this manual). 9. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the message in queue for transmission. NOTE: If the information on this page is incomplete, a pop-up window DATA REQUIRED will display and the SEND prompt will not enable Verify Message Log Menu navigation: UNILINK MENU (1/2) > FLIGHT INFO > VERIF MSG LOG The VERIF MSGS page displays all verified uplink and downlink messages and can be used to check the queue status of sent messages. See VERIF MSG LOG in the Message Logs section of this manual. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 21 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Pushback Clearance Request Menu navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > FLIGHT INFO > PUSHBACK The PUSHBACK CLX page is used to request pushback clearance. To request Pushback Clearance:

1. Press PUSHBACK, LSK [3R] on the FLIGHT INFO page. The PUSHBACK CLX page will display. 2. Verify the ORIG (Origination) airport. Change by pressing ORIG, LSK [1L] (if not active) and entering a different airport. Press

[ENTER]. 3. 4. 5. If not active, press DEST (Destination), LSK [2L] to enter the destination airport. Press [ENTER]. If not active, press GATE, LSK [3L] to enter gate Information

(optional). Press [ENTER]. If not active, press SCHED DATE, LSK [1R] to enter the scheduled date (day). Press [ENTER]. NOTE: Default date is per GMT. 6. If not active, press SCHED TIME, LSK [2R] to enter the scheduled time. Press [ENTER]. 7. Press REMARKS, LSK [4L] to enter any remarks as needed

(optional). Pushback remarks are entered using the PUSHBACK CLX REMARKS page (See the Remarks Page section in this manual). 8. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place this message in queue for transmission. 22 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Expected Taxi Clearance Request Menu navigation: UNILINK MENU (1/2) > FLIGHT INFO > EXP TAXI The EXP TAXI CLX is used to request an Expected Taxi Clearance. To request an Expected Taxi Clearance:

1. Press EXP TAXI, LSK [4R] on the FLIGHT INFO page. The EXP TAXI CLX page will display. 2. Verify the ORIG (Origination) airport. Change by pressing ORIG, LSK [1L] and entering a different airport. Press [ENTER]. 3. 4. 5. If not active, press DEST (Destination), LSK [2L] to enter the destination airport. Press [ENTER]. If not active, press GATE, LSK [3L] to enter gate Information

(optional). Press [ENTER]. If not active, press SCHED DATE, LSK [1R] to enter the scheduled date (day). Press [ENTER]. NOTE: Default date is per GMT. 6. If not active, press SCHED TIME, LSK [2R] to enter the scheduled time. Press [ENTER]. 7. Press REMARKS, LSK [4L] to enter any remarks as needed

(optional). Taxi Clearance remarks are entered using the EXP TAXI CLX REMARKS page (See the Remarks Page section in this manual). 8. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place this message in queue for transmission. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 23 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Remarks Create and Include with Requests Menu navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > FLIGHT INFO > DEPARTURE or OCEANIC or PUSHBACK or EXP TAXI The Remarks page is available with the following Flight Information

(FLIGHT INFO) services pages:

DEPARTURE OCEANIC PUSHBACK EXP TAXI To access the REMARKS Page;

1. On a Flight Information service page (in this example, OCEANIC CLX), press the REMARKS LSK. The associated Remarks page will open with the cursor (@) flashing on the text line. NOTE: In this example, OCEANIC CLX is used. All REMARKS pages are operated in the same manner. 24 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual 2. Create a message using the alphanumeric keys and LSKs. The [ + ] key inserts spaces in the text. LSKs [1L] through [3L] provide special characters as indicated on the display. Pressing the specific LSK multiple times cycles through the displayed choices. To enter a special character several times in a row, select another key between special character LSK presses (example: to enter several periods in a row, press LSK [2L], then the right-arrow key (which does nothing), then [2R], then the right-arrow key, etc.). The arrow LSKs ([1R] through [4R]) move the cursor position within text already entered. Text entered at the cursor position in front of other text is inserted and word wrapping will occur as necessary. To start a new line of text, press [ENTER]; the cursor will start a new line of text. The CLEAR LSK erases all entered text on the page. The text automatically word wraps to the next line. The number of pages in the message will increase as necessary to accommodate entered text. 3. When finished editing the text portion of the message, press

[5R]. The entered text will display in the RETURN, LSK REMARKS field for review. NOTE: The REMARKS field displays the first 7 characters of entered text. A following ellipsis () indicates there is more text in the message. The REMARKS page allows review of the entire remarks text. 4. Press the SEND LSK to place the message in queue for transmission. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 25 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual FREE-TEXT Create and Send a Message Menu navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > FREE TEXT The FREE-TEXT option is available at LSK [2L] on the UNILINK MENU 1/2 page. The FREE TEXT page allows the user to create and edit text messages. Create and Send a Message 1. Press FREE-TEXT, LSK [2L] on the UNILINK MENU 1/2 page. 2. With the TO field active, enter the destination identifier. Press

[ENTER]. 3. Enter the destination/recipient telephone number (if known) in the NO: field and press [ENTER]. Pressing [ENTER] moves the cursor to the first text line of the TEXT EDIT page. NOTE: Pressing LSK [2L] will also bring up the TEXT EDIT page. 26 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual 4. Create a message using the alphanumeric text option keys. The [ ] key is used to insert a space. The text automatically word wraps to the next line. The number of pages in the message will increase as necessary to accommodate entered text. The left LSKs are used to insert special characters as indicated on the display. Selecting the same special character key multiple times will cause the selected character to cycle between the three displayed choices. The right line select keys are used to move the cursor (+) position within the text that has been entered. Any text entered at the cursor position in front of other text will be inserted and word wrapping will automatically occur as necessary. To start a new line of text, press [ENTER] and the cursor (+) will start a new line of text. 5. When finished editing the text portion of the message, press RETURN, LSK [5R]. The entered text is displayed on the FREE TEXT page for review with additional pages added as necessary. 6. Press SEND to place the message in queue for transmission. QUEUED will display above the SEND option to indicate the message is in queue. Send a Message to another Aircraft 1. On the Free Text page, enter the destination registry in the TO field and press [ENTER]. 2. Enter the letter A in the first position of the NO field followed by the registry of the destination aircraft and press [ENTER]. 3. Enter the message text in the free text area. When finished editing the text portion of the message, press RETURN, LSK [5R]. The entered text is displayed on the FREE TEXT page for review with additional pages added as necessary. 4. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the message in queue for transmission. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 27 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Send an E-Mail NOTE: Arrangement with DSP must be made for e-mail capability to be available. Specific detailed instructions for email operation may differ from the following procedure, depending on the service provider. 1. With the TO line active, press [ENTER] to make the NO field active. 2. Enter "E" in the first position of the NO field and press [ENTER]. 3. In the free text area, enter the destination e-mail address. Use DA for a dash (-), DOT for dot (.) and AT for at symbol (@). Delimit the address with ST (Example: SCOTT AT AOL DOT COM ST). Use spaces as indicated in the example and press [ENTER]. NOTE: The message will not send if symbols are used in place of text

(i.e., DA, DOT, AT). NOTE: Spaces are placed in text using the plus/minus ( [ + ] ) key. 4. Enter the message text beginning on the next line after ST. NOTE: If previously entered text is still in the Free-Text area, press CLEAR, LSK [4L] before entering new text. 5. When finished editing the text portion of the message, press RETURN, LSK [5R]. The entered text is displayed on the FREE TEXT page for review with additional pages added as necessary. 6. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the message in queue for transmission. A confirmation message will display if the e-mail is sent successfully. 28 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual 2. Send a Fax 1. On the FREE TEXT page, enter the fax recipient in the TO field and press [ENTER]. In the NO field, enter the letter F followed by the destination fax number with no spaces. Include: country code, area code, fax number (Example: F17139434610) and press [ENTER]. 3. Enter the message text in the free text area. When finished editing the text portion of the message, press RETURN, LSK [5R]. The entered text is displayed on the FREE TEXT page for review with additional pages added as necessary. 4. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the message in queue for transmission. Send a Page to a Skytel Pager (Skytel Customers Only) 1. Enter P followed by the Skytel Pager PIN number, (no spaces) in the NO field and press [ENTER]. 2. Enter the message text in the free text area. When finished editing the text portion of the message, press RETURN, LSK [5R]. The entered text is displayed on the FREE TEXT page for review with additional pages added as necessary. 3. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the message in queue for transmission. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 29 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual OOOI Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > OOOI OOOI pages record data about the current flight and flight history. The OOOI option is available (if configured) at LSK [3L] on the UNILINK MENU 1/2 page. OOOI Operation OOOI (Out, Off, On, In) reports allow a dispatch or schedule office to track a flight as well as provide accurate flight times and block times. Based on installation, UniLink may use inputs from one or more doors, the parking brake, and weight-on-wheels (WOW) status input. OOOI reports may also use digital inputs from devices such as the FMS or configured Input/Output Processors (IOP). UniLink monitors the state of each discrete and the WOW condition at power-up, but does not issue any reports unless a change in state is detected. The OUT requirement is met when all doors are closed and then the parking brake is released. The ideal sequence is:

1) UniLink powered up with brake set and doors open 2) Doors closed 3) Brake released 4) OUT report generated Once the OUT report has been generated, if the door happens to be opened prior to takeoff, an OUT/RETURN IN report will be generated. Once an OUT report is generated (and the door remains closed) a change in the WOW status from on-ground to in-air will result in an OFF report. If UniLink is powered up or reset in flight, it will monitor the WOW state, determine that the aircraft is airborne and ignore all changes in status of doors and brakes. A change to the WOW status from in-air to on-ground will result in the ON report. For an IN report to be generated, UniLink must:

detect an OUT transition detect an OFF transition detect an ON transition 30 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual and then detect that the door is opened The IN time that is recorded for the IN event is the last time the brake was set prior to the door opening, or the time that the door opens if the brake was not set. The time for all other OOOI events is the time that the UniLink detected the last state change required for the transition to occur. Ground Delay (Optional) To determine OOOI status, navigate to the SENSORS 1/2 page. A GROUND DELAY ADVISORY occurs when the configured time on the Ground Delay Timer expires after doors closed /brakes released

(OUT event) but before Weight-Off-Wheels/Takeoff (OFF event). The GROUND DELAY ADVISORY annunciation will display at LSK

[5L]. Pressing LSK [5L] will display the DELAY page. The crew can send a ground delay report by following the procedure listed in the DELAY section of this manual. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 31 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual OOOI Current NOTE: The FUEL fields display the Fuel Onboard quantity from the FMS when an event is triggered. The FMS will auto-populate time and fuel information at each event. The crew must ensure that the FMS fuel information is initialized. Depending on the installation and configuration, each field may or may not show the recorded times; a message is sent automatically when any of these four events take place. OUT - Door Closed and Parking Brake Released. Includes OUT time, Fuel Onboard, Departure Airport, and Destination Airport, OFF - Weight Off Wheels. Includes OFF time, Departure Airport, and Destination Airport. ON - WOW. Includes ON time, Departure Airport, and Destination Airport. IN - Parking Brake Set and Door Open. Includes IN time, Fuel On Board, Departure Airport, and Destination Airport. 32 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual OOOI History The OOOI event history is captured at the start of the flight. The most recently stored event is displayed on OOOI HIST 2/9 page. The next most recent is displayed on OOOI HIST 3/9. A maximum of nine OOOI HIST pages are available. OOOI HIST is accessed from the OOOI page by pressing the [PREV] or [NEXT] keys. OOOI data is retained during a power cycle. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 33 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual COMM STATUS Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > COMM STATUS The COMM STATUS page displays the current configured status of available communication media links. MODE The MODE field indicates the manner in which ACARS will be used. MODE A = POA (Plain Old ACARS) MODE B = AOA (AVLC Over ACARS) Based on the aircraft installation and configuration, all three media statuses may or may not display. If not configured, the media title will not display and the position on the page will be empty. The possible statuses include:

VHF Media Status COMM / IDLE COMM / SENDING NOCOMM / NO FREQ NOCOMM / SCANNING 34 Reason Communications have been established with the ground and datalink messages can be transmitted over VHF. No data is currently being transmitted. A message is currently in the process of being transmitted over VHF and UniLink is waiting for acknowledgement from the ground. UniLink has not selected a frequency for tuning due to invalid FMS lat/long or no radio type. UniLink is automatically selecting a frequency for tuning in current region with enabled DSP. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 VHF Media Status NOCOMM / CONNECTING NOCOMM / NO DSP NOCOMM / VOICE NOCOMM/VDR INOP NOCOMM/VDR FAULT NOCOMM/MONITORING NOCOMM VDR/UNAVAIL NOCOMM/SUSPEND SatCom Media Status COMM / IDLE COMM / SENDING NOCOMM /SDU UNAVAIL NOTE: SDU is the Satellite Data Unit NOCOMM / SDU INOP NOCOMM / AUTO DELAY NOCOMM / TIMEOUT NOCOMM / CONNECTING NOCOMM/SUSPENDED 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Reason UniLink has sent communication to the ground and is awaiting a reply. All DSPs have been manually selected OFF. The VDR is in VOICE mode. NOTE: Does not apply to UL-801 with internal VDR. VDR inoperative. VDR is reporting a fault. UniLink has not detected a viable VDL mode 2 ground station. UniLink has not set the VDRs protocol state. VHR communications suspended by the crew. been have Reason SatCom (SAT) communication has been established and datalink messages can be transmitted over SatCom. No data is currently being transmitted. A message is currently in the process of being transmitted. UniLink is waiting acknowledgement from the ground. The SatComs system SDU is reporting that it is unavailable.. to is waiting before UniLink does not detect the SDU. UniLink trying establish a SatCom (SAT) link again. Retries have been exhausted, and Auto Return to Comm configuration setting is disabled. A manual Link Test must be performed, or an uplink received for the medium to return to COMM. A SatCom (SAT) link is in the process of being established. SatCom (SAT) link has been suspended by the crew. 35 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual TEL Media Status COMM / MDM TIMEOUT COMM / DIALING COMM / CONNECTING COMM / IDLE COMM / CONNECTED COMM / PLEASE WAIT NOCOMM / SUSPENDED NOCOMM / AUTO DELAY Reason UniLink has dialed the phone but a timeout occurred prior to a connection being established. NOTE: Sequential, excessive timeouts will result in the NOCOMM/

AUTO DELAY display to eventually activate. UniLink has provided the phone with the dial string command and is waiting for the phone to answer. The ground has answered the phone and UniLink is communicating with the DSP The phone is hung up and no attempt is currently being made to use it and SatCom (TEL) is not suspended or waiting to retry. The phone line is connected and messages can or are currently being transferred. TEL SUSPEND has been manually activated. UniLink is in the process of shutting down the connection. SatCom (TEL) has been suspended, either by the crew or automatically due to excessive failed attempts. UniLink is waiting for the configurable AUTO-DELAY timer to expire before trying again. NOCOMM / CONFIG FAIL While CONNECTING with the ground server, a message is received saying the configuration sent by UniLink is invalid. The SatCom (TEL) system is permanently shut down. Cycling UniLink power is required to exit this state. 36 23-20-06.01 December 2011 TEL Media Status NOCOMM / INIT FAIL NOCOMM / DIALING UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Reason The telephone system is not available for operation. One or both of the following configuration items are invalid: Aircraft Registration Number or Phone Access Number. UniLink exited out of the 5-minute delay and is in the process of making another connection attempt. NOCOMM / PLEASE WAIT TEL SUSPEND has been manually NOCOMM / MDM TIMEOUT activated while a connection is in progress. UniLink is in the process of shutting down the connection. UniLink exited out of the 5-minute delay and while in the process of making another connection attempt the UniLink modem has timed out. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 37 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual COMM CONTROL Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > COMM STATUS > COMM CONTROL The COMM CONTROL page provides access to media control pages and options. Access the COMM CONTROL page by selecting COMM STATUS, LSK [3L] from the UNILINK MENU 1/2 page. Then select COMM CONTROL, LSK [4L] from the COMM STATUS page to display the COMM CONTROL page. The COMM CONTROL page gives access to VHF VOICE (UL-800 only), VHF DATA, SAT DATA, and TEL DATA options (as configured and installed) UL-800 with External VDR UL-801 with Internal VDR VHF Voice (UL-800 only) Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > COMM STATUS > COMM CONTROL > VHF VOICE The VHF VOICE option is available if the VHF radio supports voice communications (does not apply to UL-801 with internal VDR). 38 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Pressing VHF VOICE, LSK [1L] from the COMM CONTROL page displays the VHF VOICE page. UL-800 with External VDR The VHF VOICE page is used to enable/disable VHF voice mode. LSKs [1R] and [2R] allow selection of the MODE as either DATA or VOICE respectively (an asterisk <*> indicates the selected mode). DATA Mode - UniLink data communication; no voice communications. UniLink will tune to the appropriate datalink frequencies only. VOICE Mode - UniLink no longer communicates via VHF to support datalink communications. The external VDR is used for voice and voice frequencies are tuned via VOICE FREQ, LSK [3L]. VHF voice frequency can be tuned from this page if Voice Frequency Control enabled in configuration. Valid frequency range is:

If configured for frequency spacing of 25KHz - 118.000 to 136.950 If configured for frequency spacing of 25KHz/8.33KHz -

118.000 to 136.965 and 136.980 to 136.990 NOTE: The frequency 136.975 is a reserved frequency. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 39 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual VHF Data Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > COMM STATUS > COMM CONTROL > VHF DATA The VHF DATA option is available if a VHF radio is configured. The VHF DATA page allows the user to enable or disable the individual DSPs and provides access to the VHF Frequency (FREQUENCIES) page. On the COMM CONTROL page press VHF DATA, LSK [2L] to access the VHF DATA page. Pressing the LSK adjacent to each DSP toggles the network status between DISABLED and ENABLED. In the ENABLED status, UniLink will communicate with the service provider as appropriate. The DISABLED status prohibits communications with the provider. If all Service Providers are selected to DISABLED, the VHF status displayed on the COMM STATUS page will reflect NOCOMM/NO DSP. To resolve a VHF NOCOMM problem:

1. On the VHF DATA page, ensure VHF STATE is not set to SUSPEND. 2. Press LINK TEST SEND. This will initiate a link test to reestablish VHF communications. Communications should be reestablished within approximately one minute and the NOCOMM advisory should no longer be displayed. If NOCOMM continues to be displayed, this may indicate an equipment or VHF system network failure not associated with incorrect frequency usage. 40 23-20-06.01 December 2011 STATE UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual RESUME: When selected, <*> will display. This allows the VHF system to resume operation. SUSPEND: When selected, <*> will display. This suspends the system. While suspended, no VHF transmissions will be permitted by UniLink and no VHF uplink messages will be processed. DSPs DSPs are configured into UniLink at installation. These selections are the default selections displayed on the VHF DATA page but may be overridden by the crew. Care should be taken when overriding these selections to ENABLED as network access fees may be charged to your account by the service provider. DSPs include:

ARINC SITA Worldwide except Europe, North Atlantic and Japan Worldwide except North America and Japan (Includes DEPV network in Brazil). AVICOM Japan ALL COMM The ALL COMM function allows the status of all media DATA (VHF, TEL, SAT) to be set to SUSPEND or RESUME. RESUME: When selected, <*> will display. This allows the communication system (VHF, SAT, TEL) to resume operation. SUSPEND: When selected, <*> will display. This suspends the configured communication system (VHF, SAT, TEL). Each individual media DATA page has a STATE function that allows the same RESUME or SUSPEND status to be set just for that specific link. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 41 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual FREQUENCIES Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > COMM STATUS > COMM CONTROL > VHF DATA > FREQUENCIES is accessed by selecting the The FREQUENCIES page FREQUENCIES, LSK the VHF DATA page. The FREQUENCIES page displays the primary frequency table and a field for secondary frequency selection. Normal frequency selection is controlled automatically by UniLink management logic and user intervention is not required.

[3R] on If the UniLink Geographic Database indicates that a DSP has coverage on a particular frequency at the aircrafts current location, the DSPs name will be displayed above the frequency (ARINC, SITA, AVICOM, or MULTIPLE). Otherwise NO CVG (No Coverage) will display. LSKs allow manual selection of a primary frequency. The <*> icon indicates the frequency that is currently tuned. The secondary frequency may be manually entered or uplinked from the ground. Any entry in the range of 118.000 through 136.975 will be accepted. Only one frequency, primary or secondary, can be selected at a time. 42 23-20-06.01 December 2011 TEL DATA UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > COMM STATUS > COMM CONTROL > TEL DATA The TEL DATA page is available if an air phone is configured. The TEL DATA page displays the DSP configured telephone number and also allows manual override with a different number. To override the configured telephone number, press NUMBER, LSK

[3L]. This highlights the NUMBER field and allows the displayed number to be edited or a new number to be entered. An entry of up to 19 digits is acceptable. The new entry will remain active until the system is restarted, or the number may be restored to the configured value by pressing the [BACK], then [ENTER] keys. From the CDU/MCDU keyboard enter P for pause, L for #, or A for *. Contact your DSP for the appropriate telephone number. When the SUSPEND option is selected, telephone communication is suspended and no datalink messages can be sent via telephony. When RESUME is selected, the telephone can be used for sending messages. The SUSPEND option is automatically selected if there have been excessive unsuccessful attempts at sending messages via telephony to the ground. Any manual selection will override any automatically set condition. A <*> indicates the current state STATE RESUME: When selected, <*> will display. This allows the TEL system to resume operation. SUSPEND: When selected, <*> will display. This suspends the system. While suspended, no TEL transmissions will be permitted by UniLink and no TEL uplink messages will be processed. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 43 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Telephone Link Test This feature provides the operator the ability to test the telephone link by sending a downlink over the telephone system and then displays the link test status. Run the test by selecting LINK TEST SEND, LSK

[4R]. The state of the telephone link test will display on the line above. Once the test is complete, the telephone status is displayed on the COMM STATUS page. The displayed status is described in the COMM Status section of this manual. SAT DATA Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > COMM STATUS > COMM CONTROL > SAT DATA The SAT DATA page allows the user to send a SatCom link test. SatCom Datalink Test This feature provides the operator the ability to test the SatCom link by sending a downlink over the SatCom system and then display the link test status. Run the test by selecting LINK TEST SEND, LSK

[4R]. While the test is running, the state of the SatCom link test is displayed on the line above. Once the test is complete, the SatCom status is displayed on the COMM STATUS page. The displayed status is described in the COMM Status section of this manual. STATE RESUME: When selected, <*> will display. This allows the SAT system to resume operation. SUSPEND: When selected, <*> will display. This suspends the SAT system. While suspended, no SAT transmissions will be permitted by UniLink and no VHF uplink messages will be processed. 44 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Text Weather Report Requests Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > TEXT WX > TEXT WX REQUEST The TEXT WX REQUEST page allows the user to request four types of text weather reports from up to six locations. TERMINAL weather received from this request will apply to stations entered on this page, and will include both actual and forecast conditions for each station.

(Winds Aloft), SIGMETS

(Significant Meteorological WINDS information), and PIREPS (Pilot Weather Reports), and will apply to the flight plan route from the FMS. If a manual data entry is made in STATIONS fields (LSKs [1L & 2L]), the Winds Aloft will apply to waypoints along the great circle route from the aircrafts present position to the airport identifier. Stored text weather messages are accessed via the VERIF OPS WX page (accessed from the MESSAGE LOGS page). To request Text Weather:

1. Press TEXT WX, LSK [1R] on UNILINK MENU 1/2 page. 2. On the TEXT WX REQUEST page, enter up to six reporting stations (STATIONS) using LSKs [1L] and [2L], and then press the [ENTER] key. The first station will default to the FMS destination airport identifier. NOTE: When exiting this page, all stations entered are cleared. 3. Press TYPES, LSK [1R] to choose the type of reports to receive. The WX TYPE SELECT page will display. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 45 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual 4. Multiple report types may be selected. Press the LSK adjacent the report types to request. NOTE: Terminal is selected by default (indicated by <*>). 5. Press RETURN to go back to the TEXT WX REQUEST page. An asterisk will display next to the selected report types. 6. Press the SEND LSK to place the request in queue for transmission. NOTE: DATA REQUIRED displays if no reporting stations have been entered. 46 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Weather Map Requests Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > WX MAPS The UNILINK MENU 1/2 page allows the user to request and view graphical weather maps. Maps are available only over an airborne telephony link and the WX MAP REQUEST page is only available when the WX MAPS configuration selection is enabled. Graphic weather maps are available on Flat Panel Control Display Units

(FPCDU) having graphics capability. NOTE: WX MAP REQUEST page can be accessed either from UNILINK MENU 1/2 (WX MAPS, LSK [2R]) or the WX MAPS LSK on the TEXT WX REQUEST page. US Composite Radar Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU (1/2) > WX MAPS> COMP RADAR The US COMP RADAR page allows the user to request Composite Radar Weather maps at specified weather stations and International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) airports. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 47 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual To request a Composite Radar graphic:

1. Press COMP RADAR, LSK [1L] on the WX MAP REQUEST page. The US COMP RADAR page will display. 2. Enter an airport identifier in the STATION field and press

[ENTER], or accept the default destination airport identifier from the FMS. NOTE: If an incomplete identifier is entered, the message TOO FEW CHARACTERS will display and the field will flash. Pressing the LSK and re-entering a complete identifier will correct the error. 3. Select a Map Range using the range LSK options. A <*> indicator will display adjacent to the selected range. NOTE: The selected range is retained through system power cycles. 4. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the request in queue for transmission. NOTE: The SEND LSK will not be active and DATA REQUIRED displays if no airport identifier has been entered. US Radar Tops and Movement Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > WX MAPS > TOPS/MVMT The US TOPS/ MVMT page is used to request US Radar Tops and Movement graphics from a specific geographical area. 48 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual To request a Tops and Movement graphic:

1. Press TOPS/ MVMT, LSK [2L] on the WX MAP REQUEST page. The US TOPS/MVMT page will display 2. Press REGION, LSK [2L] to display the REGION- US TOPS/MVMT page. 3. Select a region LSK option for display and return to the US TOPS/MVMT page. The last selection will remain through system power cycles. 4. Press the SEND LSK to place the request in queue for transmission. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 49 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual IR SATELLITE Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > WX MAPS > IR SAT The IR SATELLITE page allows the user to request worldwide IR Satellite Weather maps. To request an IR Satellite Map graphic:

1. Press IR SAT, LSK [3R] on the WX MAP REQUEST page. The IR SATELLITE page will display. 2. Press REGION, LSK [2L] to display the REGION-IR SATELLITE 1/2 page. If needed, press NEXT to display the REGION-IR SATELLITE 2/2 page. 3. Select a region for display and return to the IR SATELLITE page. The last selection will remain through system power cycles. 4. Press the SEND LSK to place the request in queue for transmission. 50 23-20-06.01 December 2011 Icing/Turbulence Potential UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > WX MAPS > ICING/TURB The ICING TURB page is used to request worldwide icing potential or turbulence potential maps. To request an Icing Potential or Turbulence Potential Map:

1. Press ICING/TURB, LSK [4L] on the WX MAP REQUEST page. The ICING/TURB page will display. 2. Press REGION, LSK [2L] to display the REGION-ICING TURB page. 3. Select a region for display and return to the ICING/TURB page. The last selection will remain through system power cycles. 4. Press ALTITUDE to access the ALTITUDE-ICING/TURB page. 5. Select an altitude option by pressing the adjacent LSK and return to the ICING/TURB page. The last selection will remain through system power cycles. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 51 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual 6. Press ICING SEND or TURB SEND to place the request in queue for transmission. 52 23-20-06.01 December 2011 IFR/MVFR UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > WX MAPS > IFR/MVFR The IFR/MVFR page is used to request worldwide IFR/MVFR maps. To request an IFR/MVFR Map:

1. Press IFR/MVFR, LSK [1R] on the WX MAP REQUEST page. The IFR/MVFR page will display. 2. Press REGION, LSK [2L] to display REGION-IFR/MVFR page. 3. As needed, press the [NEXT] key to display the REGION 2/3 and 3/3 pages. Select a region and return to the IFR/MVFR page. NOTE: The last selection will be retained through system power cycles. 4. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the request in queue for transmission. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 53 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Significant Weather Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > WX MAPS > SIG WX The SIGNIFICANT WX page allows the user to request High Level Significant Weather Maps. To request a Significant Weather Map:

1. Press SIG WX, LSK [2R] on the WX MAP REQUEST page. The SIGNIFICANT WX page will display. 2. Press REGION, LSK [2L] to display the REGION-SIGNIFICANT WX 1/2 page. 3. As needed, press NEXT to display REGION-SIGNIFICANT WX 2/2 page. Select a region for display and return to the Significant Weather page. The last selection will remain through system power cycles. 4. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the request in queue for transmission. 54 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Winds Aloft Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > WX MAPS > WINDS ALOFT The WINDS ALOFT page allows the user to request the most current worldwide Winds Aloft maps by region. To request The Winds and Temperature Aloft graphic:

1. Press WINDS ALOFT, LSK [3R] on the WX MAPS REQUEST page. The WINDS ALOFT page will display. 2. Press REGION, LSK. [2L]. The REGION-WINDS ALOFT 1/3 page will display. 3. As needed, press the [NEXT] key to display the REGION-WINDS ALOFT pages 2/3 and 3/3. Select a region for display by pressing the adjacent LSK and return to the WINDS ALOFT page. The last selection will remain through system power cycles. 4. Press the ALTITUDE LSK to access the ALTITUDE-WINDS ALOFT 1/2 page. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 55 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual 5. As needed, press the [NEXT] key to display ALTITUDE-WINDS ALOFT page 2/2. Select an altitude by pressing the adjacent LSK and return to the WINDS ALOFT page. The last selection will remain through system power cycles. 6. Press the SEND LSK to place the message in queue for transmission. 56 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Weather Map Log Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > WX MAP LOG The WX MAP LOG pages allow the user to select previously uplinked weather graphics for viewing on a CDU/MCDU, MFD, EFI-890R, or for deletion. Weather map titles are listed in the order they are received with the last map received appearing first. UniLink stores up to 32 maps. NOTE: The WX MAP LOG page can be accessed from UNILINK MENU 1/2, TEXT WX REQUEST page, or WX MAP REQUEST page. To display a weather map:

1. Press the WX MAP LOG, LSK [4R] on the WX MAP REQUEST page, LSK [3R] on UNILINK MENU 1/2 page, or LSK [4L] on the TEXT WX REQUEST page. 2. Press the left-hand LSK adjacent the desired weather map. NOTE: Pressing any key while the map is displayed will return the display to the MAP LOG page. To display a new weather map after receiving a NEW WX MAP RCVD message:

1. Press the UNILINK LSK on the DATA 1/X page or the MESSAGE 1/X page to access the UNILINK MENU page. 2. Press NEW WX MAP advisory prompt to view the weather map. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 57 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual To delete an uplinked weather map:

1. Select the map to delete by pressing the adjacent right-hand LSK. This places the cursor over the map and displays the delete option window. 2. Press the DELETE LSK to delete the map. 3. To delete all uplinked weather maps, select the DELETE ALL option. DELETE ALL only appears on the WX MAP LOG 1/X page. 58 23-20-06.01 December 2011 Message Logs Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > MSG LOGS UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual The MESSAGE LOGS page allows the user to view, print, or delete messages. Verified Messages The VERIF MSGS 1/X page displays all ATS or other verified messages. Press VERIF MSG LOG, LSK [1R] to access the VERIF MSGS page. Operations Messages The OPS MSGS 1/X page displays all unverified messages (messages containing unverified data). Press OPS MSG LOG, LSK [2R] to access the OPS MSGS page. WX Map Uplinks The WX MAP LOG 1/X page displays all weather graphic uplinks. Press WX MAP LOG, LSK [3R] to access the WX MAP LOG pages. Message titles will appear on these pages in the inverse order they are received. The newest message will appear first. If more than one page of message titles exists, use the [PREV] and [NEXT] keys to cycle through the pages. A new message may be viewed from any UNILINK page by pressing the NEW MSG ADVISORY LSK. Messages may be viewed by selecting the left-hand LSK adjacent the message title. To delete all messages from a message log, press the DELETE ALL LSK. This prompt is only displayed on page 1 of the message log pages. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 59 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Verified Messages Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 1/2 > MSG LOGS > VERIF MSG LOG The VERIF MSGS page displays all ATS, Clearance, and other verified messages. Press VERIF MSG LOG, LSK [1R] to access the VERIF MSGS page. The total number of pages increases as verified messages are received. If more than one page of message titles exists, use the [PREV] and [NEXT] keys to cycle through the pages. LSKs [1L] through [3L] on page 1/X and [1L] through [4L] on succeeding pages display ATS and other verified message titles. Status information is displayed above the message title and includes the time received, transmission medium, uplink () or downlink () indicator, and status. Messages are sorted with the newest at the top of the list. Pressing the left-hand LSK adjacent a message displays the corresponding message if the message contains viewable text. Pressing a right-hand LSK displays the message pop-up window for the corresponding message and allows the deletion or printing of the message (see the Delete or Print a Message section later in this manual). Any key press other than [1R] or [2R] will exit the pop-up window. DELETE ALL, LSK [4L] on page 1/X is used to delete all uplinked messages from the displayed page. RETURN, LSK [5R] returns the display to the MESSAGE LOGS page. 60 23-20-06.01 December 2011 Message Status Descriptions UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual NEW OLD ACK RQD ACKED SENT SENDING The uplink is available in the log and has not been viewed. The uplink has been viewed and does not require and acknowledgement. The uplink has been viewed and the ACARS ATS facility requests that the crew manually acknowledge receipt of the message. The uplink has been viewed and an acknowledgement has been sent. The downlink has been successfully transmitted at the indicated time. The downlink is being transmitted via the indicated medium (VHF, SAT, TEL) DEFERRED The downlink message lacks priority for immediate transmission and is deferred pending availability of other downlink messages with which it can be bundled for transmission. The downlink message ceased being valid or useful before

(as determined by the downlink message timer). it could be successfully transmitted EXPIRED 23-20-06.01 December 2011 61 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Operations Messages Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU(1/2 > MSG LOGS > OPS MSG LOG The OPS MSGS page displays all operations unverified uplink messages including Text Weather and Free Text. Press OPS MSG LOG, LSK [2R] to access the OPS MSGS page. The total number of pages increases as uplink messages are received. If more than one page of message titles exists, use the [PREV] and [NEXT] keys to cycle through the pages. LSKs [1L] through [3L] on page 1/X and [1L] through [4L] on succeeding pages display unverified uplink message titles. Status information is displayed above the message title and includes the time received, transmission medium, uplink () or downlink () indicator, and status. Messages are sorted with the newest at the top of the list. Pressing a left-hand LSK displays the OPS MSG page for the corresponding message if the message contains viewable text. Pressing a right-hand LSK displays the message pop-up window for the corresponding message and allows the deletion or printing of the message (see the Delete or Print a Message section later in this manual). Any key press other than [1R] or [2R] will exit the pop-up window. DELETE ALL, LSK [4L] on page 1/X is used to delete all messages from the log. RETURN, LSK [5R] returns the display to the MESSAGE LOGS page. 62 23-20-06.01 December 2011 Message Status Descriptions UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual NEW OLD The uplink is available in the log and has not been viewed. The uplink has been viewed and does not require an acknowledgement. ACK RQD The uplink has been viewed and the customer AOC facility requests that the crew manually acknowledge receipt of the message. The uplink has been viewed and an acknowledgement has been sent. ACKED SENT SENDING The downlink has been successfully transmitted at the indicated time. The downlink is being transmitted via the indicated medium (VHF, SAT, TEL) DEFERRED The downlink message lacks priority for immediate transmission and is deferred pending availability of other downlink messages with which it can be bundled for transmission. The downlink message ceased being valid or useful before

(as determined by the downlink message timer). it could be successfully transmitted EXPIRED Weather Map Log

(See the Weather Map Log section). 23-20-06.01 December 2011 63 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual View Message - Detailed Message Screen A detailed message screen will display when a message is viewed by selecting a corresponding message LSK or via the NEW MESSAGE ADVISORY. 1. Press the [PREV] and [NEXT] keys to cycle through the pages. 2. In the message log page (VERIF MSGS, OPS MSGS, or WX MAP LOG), press the left LSK adjacent a message title to view a message. A detailed message screen or weather graphic will display. 64 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Delete or Print a Message NOTE: This procedure is available on the VERIF MSGS, OPS MSGS, and WX MAP LOG pages. 1. Access the desired message log page. 2. Press the right-hand LSK of a message. This activates the message pop-up window. 3. Press the PRINT LSK to print the message (a printer must be installed and configured). 4. Press the DELETE LSK to delete the message. 5. Press the CANCEL LSK to exit the pop-up menu. NOTE: Any LSK or CDU keyboard selection other than LSKs [1R] or

[2R] removes the pop-up window. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 65 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual DELAY Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 2/2 > DELAY The DELAY page is used to report estimated ground delays prior to take off. To send a Ground Delay report:

1. Press DELAY, LSK [1L] from UNILINK MENU page 2/2 or from any page when selecting the GROUND DELAY advisory. 2. With EST DELAY (estimated delay) active, enter the estimated time in minutes and press [ENTER]. 3. Press REASON, LSK [1R] to access the DELAY REASON page. 4. Press the LSK adjacent the appropriate reason option. The display will return to the DELAY page. NONE will be selected by default if no entry is made on this page. 5. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the message in queue for transmission. 66 23-20-06.01 December 2011 DIVERSION Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 2/2 > DIVERSION UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual The DIVERSION page is used to send a revised destination message. To send a diversion message:

1. Press DIVERSION, LSK [2L] from UNILINK MENU page 2/2. The DIVERSION page will display. 2. With NEW DEST active, enter a destination and press [ENTER]

or verify new destination data from the FMS. 3. If not active, press ETA (LSK [3L]), enter an ETA, and press

[ENTER]; or verify ETA data from the FMS. 4. Press REASON, LSK [1R] to access the DIVERT REASON page. 5. Press the LSK adjacent the appropriate Divert Reason option and return to the DIVERSION page. NONE will be selected by default if no entry is made on this page. 6. Press the SEND LSK to place the report or message in queue for transmission. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 67 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual NOTE: During a given flight leg, the first press sends a Diversion Report downlink. Each subsequent press sends a revised Diversion Report downlink. 68 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual ETA UPDATE Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 2/2 > ETA UPDATE The ETA UPDATE page is used to send an ETA update message. To send an ETA Update message:

1. Press ETA UPDATE, LSK [3L] from UNILINK MENU page 2/2. The ETA UPDATE page will display. 2. With ETA active, enter an ETA and press [ENTER], or verify ETA data from the FMS. 3. If not active, press DEST, LSK [3L], enter a destination airport identifier, and press [ENTER]; or verify the default identifier from the FMS. NOTE: This field will display dashes if the destination airport is not available. The FMS ETE field is provided for reference only and displays the current computed FMS estimated time enroute. 4. Press REASON, LSK [1R] to access the ETA REASON page. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 69 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual 5. Press the LSK adjacent the appropriate ETA Reason and return to the ETA UPDATE page. 6. Press the SEND LSK to place the report or message in queue for transmission. NOTE: During a given flight leg, the first press sends a Diversion Report downlink. Each subsequent press sends a revised Diversion Report downlink. SELCAL Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 2/2 > SELCAL The SELCAL (Selective Call) CONTACT page displays the Ground Voice Request frequency. The SELCAL option on the UNILINK MENU will only display if a voice frequency request is received and the SELCAL advisory has been selected. This prompt is hidden at the beginning of each flight leg. Press RETURN to return to the MAIN MENU or the CDU/MCDU page displayed when the ADVISORY was pressed to access the SELCAL contact message. NOTE If not currently in a UNILINK page when the SELCAL request is received, the MSG annunciation will flash in the upper right-

hand corner of the CDU/MCDU. Navigate to the UNILINK MENU page to access the SELCAL option. 70 23-20-06.01 December 2011 SITUATION Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 2/2 > SITUATION UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual The SITUATION page permits the sending of emergency report messages for mechanical and medical emergencies. All situation reports include FUEL ONBD and ENDURANCE data from FMS FUEL page 2/5. To make the report:

1. Press SITUATION, LSK [2R] on UNILINK MENU page 2/2. The SITUATION page will display. 2. With SOULS active, enter the number of persons onboard and press [ENTER]. 3. If not active, press REMARKS, LSK [2L] (optional) and, enter information as needed. Up to 24 characters may be entered. 4. Press REASON, LSK [1R] to access the SITUATION REASON page. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 71 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual 5. Press the LSK adjacent the appropriate reason and return to the SITUATION page. If no selection is made, the REASON field will default to NONE. 6. Press the SEND LSK transmission. to place the report in queue for POS REPORT Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 2/2 > POS REPORT The POS REPORT page is used to modify Position Report data prior to sending, and to enable and disable the Auto Position report (AUTO) function. Data on this page is prefilled FMS/ADC data. Normally this data will be valid for the Position Report; however, temporary manual entries are possible for the current manually initiated transmission only. To make the report:

1. Press POS REPORT, LSK [3R] from UNILINK MENU page 2/2. The POS REPORT page will display. 2. With TO WPT active, enter a waypoint name and press [ENTER]. 3. The TO WPT ETA (LSK [2L]) is supplied by the FMS. To change, if not active, press and enter up to four digits (Time is UTC time). Press [ENTER]. If not active, press GROUNDSPEED, LSK [3L] and enter up to three digits. Press [ENTER]. If not active, press WINDS, LSK [4L] and enter three digits for wind direction. Press [ENTER] to advance the cursor to the velocity field and enter up to three digits. Press [ENTER]. 4. 5. 72 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual If not already active, press ALTITUDE, LSK [3R] and enter current altitude if no ADC Altitude is available. Press [ENTER]. 6. 7. Press the SEND LSK to place the report in queue for transmission. Automatic Position Reporting 1. Press AUTO, LSK [1R] to toggle the Automatic Report function to ENABLED or DISABLED. The current status is displayed to the left of AUTO. 2. If AUTO is set to ENABLED, press IN AIR INTV, LSK [2R] to set the report interval time (default is based on configuration setting). Press [ENTER]. NOTE:

The IN AIR INTV option is not present if AUTO is set to DISABLED. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 73 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Maintenance Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 2/2 > MAINTENANCE Maintenance pages are used to access UniLink maintenance related functions. No operation-related functions are performed on this page or subpages. Operational tests can be conducted via the TESTS option. From the UniLink Menu 2/2, press MAINTENANCE, LSK [4L]. The MAINTENANCE 1/3 page will display. NOTE: See the associated UniLink Installation Manual for installation and maintenance procedures

. Tests Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 2/2 > MAINTENANCE > TESTS There are several tests available to exercise the functionality of UniLink. They include PRINTER Test, IMAGE Test, UniLink SELF-

TEST, PTT, FANS ALERTS, and UPLINK test. Press TESTS, LSK [2R] on the MAINTENANCE page to display the TESTS page. 74 23-20-06.01 December 2011 Printer Test UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU (2/2) > MAINTENANCE > TESTS >

PRINTER If a printer is connected and configured, selection of PRINTER, LSK

[1L] will send test message text to the printer. If there is no printer configured, the PRINTER option will not be displayed. When PRINTER is selected, a pop-up window PRINTER TEST IN PROGRESS is displayed. When complete, the pop-up window is no longer displayed. The following will be printed:

THIS IS NOT AN UPLINK. THIS IS AN INTERNALLY GENERATED PRINTER TEST MESSAGE. !"#$%&'()*+,-

./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`

{|}~;

Image Test Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 2/2 > MAINTENANCE > TESTS > IMAGE Selection of IMAGE, LSK [2L] is used to display a test image. While the test image is being displayed, any key push will cause the display to return to the MAINTENANCE page. Image Test is not available when the aircraft is in the air. When IMAGE is selected, a pop-up window with the message IMAGE TEST IN PROGRESS will display. When the test is complete, an ADVISORY will display on the CDU and NEW WX MAP is displayed adjacent LSK [5L] (LSK for MCDU may be different). Press NEW WX MAP, LSK [5L] to display the generated test weather image. A test weather map will display with the title IMAGE BUS TEST. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 75 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual NOTE: This image will display on an EFI-890R or MFD if installed and configured. To exit the image, press RTN, LSK [5R].The display returns to the TESTS page (NEW WX MAP and ADVISORY are no longer displayed). UniLink Self-Test Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU(2/2 > MAINTENANCE > TESTS > SELF-

TEST Selection of SELF-TEST, LSK [3L] places the system in a power up test mode. When the test is selected a pop-up window requesting to CONFIRM or CANCEL the test is displayed. Selecting CANCEL closes the pop-

up window and returns to the current display. Selecting CONFIRM reboots UniLink. The message UNILINK/FMS COMM ERROR RESELECT UNILINK is displayed. During the period of reboot, the UNILINK displayed on the CDUMCDU is not selectable. When the test is complete, UNILINK will be selectable. Selecting UNILINK will display UNILINK MENU page 1/2. PTT (Push-To-Talk) (UL-801 only) Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 2/2 > MAINTENANCE. > TESTS > PTT If available, this test commands the radio to transmit for 3 seconds. A pop-up window PTT TEST IN PROGRESS will display for 3 seconds. 76 23-20-06.01 December 2011 FANS ALERTS UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 2/2 > MAINTENANCE > TESTS > FANS ALERTS 1. Press FANS ALERTS, LSK [1R]. A pop-up window FANS DISCRETES NOT CONFIGURED will display, then close. Uplink Test Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU 2/2 > MAINTENANCE > TESTS >

UPLINK Selection of UPLINK, LSK [4R] causes a test uplink to be placed in the OPS message log, generating a NEW MSG advisory at the bottom of the display. 1. Press NEW MSG, LSK [5L] to display message. 2. If desired press PRINT, LSK [4R] to print the screen (Printer must be configured). 3. Press DELETE, LSK [4L] to delete test message. The display will return to the TESTS page. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 77 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual 78 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual GLOSSARY Acronym/Abbreviation

/Term Description ACARS ACK ADC ADS-C AFN ALT AOA AOC ARINC ATC ATIS ATM ATN ATS AVLC CDA CDB CDU Circuit Mode Data

-

Aircraft Communication Addressing and Reporting System Acknowledgement Air Data Computer Automatic Dependent Surveillance Contract ATS Facilities Notification Altitude ACARS Over Aviation VHF Link Control

(AVLC) Aeronautical (airline) Operational Control Aeronautical Radio, Inc. (data interface format standard) Air Traffic Control Automatic Terminal

(see D-ATIS) Air Traffic Management Aeronautical Telecommunications Network Air Traffic Services Aviation VHF Link Control Current Data Authority Customer Database Control Display Unit A full duplex bi-directional communication link transmitted and received simultaneously. A hand shake must be established prior to data being exchanged. Supported by a UniLink RS-232 port configured for TEL Information Service in which data is 23-20-06.01 December 2011 79 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Acronym/Abbreviation

/Term Description UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual CLX CM CMU CNS COMM CPDLC CRC CSC CSDB CTS CVFDR CVR D-ATIS DEPT CLX DM DP DTU DTU-100 DSP EFB EFI EFI-890R ETA ETD EUROCAE EXP 80

(data Clearance Configuration Module Communications Management Unit Communication Navigation Surveillance Communication Controller-Crew Datalink Communications Cyclic Redundancy Check Common Signaling Channel Commercial Standard Data Bus interface format standard) Clear to Send Cockpit Voice and Flight Data Recorder

(UASC) Cockpit Voice Recorder Digital Automatic Terminal System (also referred to as ATIS) Departure Clearance Downlink Message Display Processor Data Transfer Unit (UASC) Data Transfer Unit 100 (UASC) Datalink Service Provider referred to as DLSP) Electronic Flight Bag Electronic Flight Instrument Electronic Flight Instrument 890R (UASC) Estimated Time of Arrival Estimated Time of Departure European Organization for Civil Aviation Equipment Expected

(sometimes Information 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Acronym/Abbreviation

/Term Description FAA FANS FL FLT NO FMC FMS FPL FREQ GND SPD GNSS GPS HS ICAO ID IFR IOP I/O LAN LRU LS LSK MCDU MCU MDM MFD MSG MSK MVFR ND NO COMM 23-20-06.01 December 2011 Federal Aviation Administration Future Air Navigation Systems Flight Level Flight Number Flight Management Computer Flight Management System Flight Plan Frequency Ground Speed Global Global Positioning System High Speed International Civil Aviation Organization Identification, Identifier Instrument Flight Rules Input/Output Processor Input/Output Local Area Network Line-Replaceable Unit Low Speed Line Select Key Multifunctional Control Display Unit (UASC) Multi-Purpose Control Display Unit (ARINC) Modular Concept Unit Modem Multifunctional Display Message Minimum Shift Keying Marginal Visual Flight Rules Navigation Display No Communication 81 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Acronym/Abbreviation

/Term Description UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual NO CVG ONBD OOOI Packet Mode Data PIREP PDC POA POS RCDU RCVD RPTS RQD RTE RTS RX SAT 82 No Coverage Onboard Out, Off, On, In (used to detect and report changes to the major flight phases of the aircraft) A half-duplex bi-directional communication link in which data is accumulated in packets of various lengths and sent out in a burst or bursts so therefore does not support voice communications. Packet switching is the process of routing and transferring data by means of addressed packets so that a channel is occupied during the transmission of the packet only. Upon completion of the data transfer, the channel is made available for the transfer of other traffic. Supported by a UniLink ARINC port configured to provide VHF and SAT capability. Crew Weather Report Pre-Departure Clearance Plain Old ACARS Position Remote Control Display Unit Received Reports Required Route Request to Send Receive Abbreviation for Satellite Communications Link. The SAT link provides communication via Iridium Short Burst Data (SBD) and packet mode data Inmarsat equipment that utilizes a specific satellite constellation. 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Acronym/Abbreviation

/Term Description When SAT is commanded for use by UniLink, a SAT-configured ARINC 429 (741 protocol) port is used. SAT provides VHF backup in most cases and does not support weather graphics. Satellite Communications Software Control Number Satellite Data Unit Selective Calling Significant Meteorological Information Society of International Aeronautical Telecommunications (Societe Internationale de Telecommunications Aeronautiques) Signal Quality Parameter Solid State Data Transfer Unit (UASC) Abbreviation for telephony. The telephony communication link provides a circuit mode data connection via a dial-up modem. A hand shake must be established prior to data being exchanged. Only an RS-232 capable SatCom can be used. The circuit mode connection will be used for obtaining color weather graphics and may be used for VHF back up in most cases. However, this link will not support safety services communications, which consists of flight information services, which is a UniLink service. Terminal Weather Information for Pilots Transmit Universal Avionics Systems Corporation UniLink (UASC) Uplink Message Universal Serial Bus 83 SatCom SCN SDU SELCAL SIGMET SITA SQP SSDTU TEL TWIP TX UASC UL UM USB 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual Acronym/Abbreviation

/Term Description UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual UTC VDL VDR VHF VOX WOW WPT WX XOFF XON 84 Universal Time Coordinated VHF Digital Link VHF Data Radio Very high frequency terrestrial-based packet mode. This is a data communications link used for obtaining textual weather, D-ATIS, and the transmission of position reporting, OOOI, and safety services communications

(UniLink Flight Information Services). Does not support weather graphics. Voice Weight On Wheels Waypoint Weather Transmission Off Transmission On 23-20-06.01 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual INDEX A ACARS ......................................................................................................... 1, 16, 82, 85 Advisories ..................................................................................................................... 4 Alert Inhibiting .............................................................................................................. 8 ARINC ................................................................................................. 1, 82, 84, 85, 86 ATC ....................................................................................................................... 20, 82 ATIS ............................................................................................................................. 17 ATS .......................................................................................................... 16, 62, 63, 82 C call sign ....................................................................................................................... 19 CALL SIGN ............................................................................................................... 16 configurable options ................................................................................................ 16 Current Time ................................................................................................................. 2 DSP ...................................................................................... 1, 35, 38, 41, 42, 43, 45, 83 D Error Message ............................................................................................................... 6 E F FMS ............................................................................................................................... 1 FPCDU ......................................................................................................................... 49 Geographic Database.................................................................................................. 43 G I ICAO ............................................................................................................................ 49 IFR/VFR maps ............................................................................................................. 55 Image Bus Test ............................................................................................................ 79 23-20-06.01 December 2011 85 UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual N UniLink UL-800/801 Operators Manual NO COMM .................................................................................................................... 5 OOOI........................................................................................................................... 31 O S SatCom ................................................................................................................... 1, 46 T Tail Number ................................................................................................................ 16 Telephone .................................................................................................................. 45 Tests ........................................................................................................................... 77 TWIP ........................................................................................................................... 18 UniLink Menu ............................................................................................................. 15 U V VDR ............................................................................................................................... 1 VHF ............................................................................................................................... 1 86 23-20-06.01 December 2011 3260 East Universal Way Tucson, AZ 85756-5097 USA

 

 

UNILINK UL-800/801 FUTURE AIR NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(FANS) 1/A+

OPERATORS MANUAL SCN 30.X With Corporate Database The information contained herein is subject to the Export Administration Regulations (EAR), 15 C.F.R. Parts 730-774. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. 2011 UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual RECORD OF REVISIONS Rev No. Issue Date Insertion Date Initials Retain this record in front of the manual. Upon receipt of revision, insert and remove pages according to the List of Effective Pages. Then enter on this page the revision number, issue date, insertion date and your initials. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 ROR-1 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual RECORD OF TEMPORARY CHANGES Change No. Issue Date/

Page Insertion Date &

Initials Removal Date /

Initials / Reason Retain this record in front of the manual. Upon receipt of Temporary Change, insert pages into manual and enter, on this page, the Temporary Change number, issue dated, insertion date and your initials. Also, record the removal of each Temporary Change you remove. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 ROTC-1 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES Original..XX XXXX 201X Date Page No. Page No. Date Cover ............................. X/XX/XX 20 .................................. X/XX/XX 21 .................................. X/XX/XX ROR-1 ........................... X/XX/XX 22 .................................. X/XX/XX 23 .................................. X/XX/XX ROTC-1 ......................... X/XX/XX 24 .................................. X/XX/XX 25 .................................. X/XX/XX LOEP-1 ......................... X/XX/XX 26 .................................. X/XX/XX LOEP-2 ......................... X/XX/XX 27 .................................. X/XX/XX LOEP-3 ......................... X/XX/XX 28 .................................. X/XX/XX 29 .................................. X/XX/XX TOC-1 ........................... X/XX/XX 30 .................................. X/XX/XX TOC-2 ........................... X/XX/XX 31 .................................. X/XX/XX 32 .................................. X/XX/XX 1 .................................... X/XX/XX 33 .................................. X/XX/XX 2 .................................... X/XX/XX 34 .................................. X/XX/XX 3 .................................... X/XX/XX 35 .................................. X/XX/XX 4 .................................... X/XX/XX 36 .................................. X/XX/XX 5 .................................... X/XX/XX 37 .................................. X/XX/XX 6 .................................... X/XX/XX 38 .................................. X/XX/XX 7 .................................... X/XX/XX 39 .................................. X/XX/XX 8 .................................... X/XX/XX 40 .................................. X/XX/XX 9 .................................... X/XX/XX 41 .................................. X/XX/XX 10 .................................. X/XX/XX 42 .................................. X/XX/XX 11 .................................. X/XX/XX 43 .................................. X/XX/XX 12 .................................. X/XX/XX 44 .................................. X/XX/XX 13 .................................. X/XX/XX 45 .................................. X/XX/XX 14 .................................. X/XX/XX 46 .................................. X/XX/XX 15 .................................. X/XX/XX 47 .................................. X/XX/XX 16 .................................. X/XX/XX 48 .................................. X/XX/XX 17 .................................. X/XX/XX 49 .................................. X/XX/XX 18 .................................. X/XX/XX 50 .................................. X/XX/XX 19 .................................. X/XX/XX 51 .................................. X/XX/XX 23-20-06.02 December 2011 LOEP-1 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Date Page No. Page No. Date 51 .................................. X/XX/XX 85 ...................................X/XX/XX 52 .................................. X/XX/XX 86 ...................................X/XX/XX 53 .................................. X/XX/XX 87 ...................................X/XX/XX 54 .................................. X/XX/XX 88 ...................................X/XX/XX 55 .................................. X/XX/XX 89 ...................................X/XX/XX 56 .................................. X/XX/XX 90 ...................................X/XX/XX 57 .................................. X/XX/XX 91 ...................................X/XX/XX 58 .................................. X/XX/XX 92 ...................................X/XX/XX 59 .................................. X/XX/XX 93 ...................................X/XX/XX 60 .................................. X/XX/XX 94 ...................................X/XX/XX 61 .................................. X/XX/XX 95 ...................................X/XX/XX 62 .................................. X/XX/XX 96 ...................................X/XX/XX 63 .................................. X/XX/XX 97 ...................................X/XX/XX 64 .................................. X/XX/XX 98 ...................................X/XX/XX 65 .................................. X/XX/XX 99 ...................................X/XX/XX 66 .................................. X/XX/XX 100 .................................X/XX/XX 67 .................................. X/XX/XX 101 .................................X/XX/XX 68 .................................. X/XX/XX 102 .................................X/XX/XX 69 .................................. X/XX/XX 103 .................................X/XX/XX 70 .................................. X/XX/XX 104 .................................X/XX/XX 71 .................................. X/XX/XX 105 .................................X/XX/XX 72 .................................. X/XX/XX 106 .................................X/XX/XX 73 .................................. X/XX/XX 107 .................................X/XX/XX 74 .................................. X/XX/XX 108 .................................X/XX/XX 75 .................................. X/XX/XX 109 .................................X/XX/XX 76 .................................. X/XX/XX 110 .................................X/XX/XX 77 .................................. X/XX/XX 111 .................................X/XX/XX 78 .................................. X/XX/XX 112 ................................ X/XX/XX 79 .................................. X/XX/XX 113 ................................ X/XX/XX 80 .................................. X/XX/XX 114 ................................ X/XX/XX 81 .................................. X/XX/XX 115 .................................X/XX/XX 82 .................................. X/XX/XX 116 ................................ X/XX/XX 83 .................................. X/XX/XX 117 ................................ X/XX/XX 84 .................................. X/XX/XX 118 ................................ X/XX/XX LOEP-2 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Page No. Date 119 ................................ X/XX/XX 120 ................................ X/XX/XX 121 ................................ X/XX/XX 122 ................................ X/XX/XX 123 ................................ X/XX/XX 124 ................................ X/XX/XX 125 ................................ X/XX/XX 126 ................................ X/XX/XX 127 ................................ X/XX/XX 128 ................................ X/XX/XX 129 ................................ X/XX/XX 130 ................................ X/XX/XX 131 ................................ X/XX/XX 132 ................................ X/XX/XX 133 ................................ X/XX/XX 134 ................................ X/XX/XX 135 ................................ X/XX/XX 136 ................................ X/XX/XX 137 ................................ X/XX/XX 138 ................................ X/XX/XX 139 ................................ X/XX/XX 140 ................................ X/XX/XX 141 ................................ X/XX/XX 142 ................................ X/XX/XX 143 ................................ X/XX/XX 23-20-06.02 December 2011 LOEP-3 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION .................................................................................. 1 Components ..................................................................................... 2 MCDU ........................................................................................... 3 Applications ...................................................................................... 4 Operations ........................................................................................ 5 FMS Input ..................................................................................... 5 Communications ........................................................................... 6 Current Time ................................................................................. 6 SEND ............................................................................................ 6 UniLink Advisories ........................................................................ 8 Error Messages........................................................................... 12 User Interface Menu Tree .............................................................. 16 UniLink Menu (SCN 30.X) .......................................................... 16 UniLink Menu (continued) ........................................................... 17 UniLink Menu (continued) ........................................................... 17 UniLink Menu (continued) ........................................................... 18 Maintenance Menu ..................................................................... 20 Maintenance Menu (Continued) ................................................. 21 OPS Menu .................................................................................. 22 OPS Menu (Continued) .............................................................. 23 UNILINK MENU ................................................................................. 24 Flight Information ............................................................................ 25 D-ATIS Request .......................................................................... 27 TWIP Request............................................................................. 28 Departure Clearance Request .................................................... 29 Oceanic Clearance Request ....................................................... 30 Verified Message Log ................................................................. 31 Pushback Clearance Request .................................................... 32 Expected Taxi Clearance Request ............................................. 33 Remarks Create and Include with Requests ........................... 34 ATC ................................................................................................ 36 EMERGENCY ............................................................................. 37 LOG ON ...................................................................................... 41 REQUEST ................................................................................... 46 ATC FREE-TEXT ........................................................................ 66 RPTS LIST .................................................................................. 68 POS REPORT ............................................................................ 74 ATC MSG LOG ........................................................................... 75 COMM STATUS ............................................................................. 78 MODE ......................................................................................... 78 COMM CONTROL ...................................................................... 82 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................. 89 TOC-1 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Tests ............................................................................................ 89 OPS ................................................................................................. 94 FREE-TEXT ................................................................................. 95 OOOI ........................................................................................... 99 Text Weather Report Requests ................................................. 103 Weather Map Requests ............................................................. 105 MESSAGE LOGS ...................................................................... 115 Message Status Descriptions .................................................... 117 View Message - Detailed Message Screen ............................... 120 DELAY ....................................................................................... 122 DIVERSION ............................................................................... 123 ETA UPDATE ............................................................................ 125 SITUATION ................................................................................ 126 POS REPORT ........................................................................... 127 SELCAL ......................................................................................... 129 GLOSSARY ...................................................................................... 131 INDEX ............................................................................................... 139 TOC-2 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual INTRODUCTION The UniLink Airborne Datalink Product (hereafter referred to as UniLink) is an air-to-ground digital data communication system that operates with Universal Avionics Systems Corporations (UASCs) Fight Management Systems (FMSs). It is capable of using a variety of media such as Satellite Communications (SatCom) and Very High Frequency (VHF) communications to exchange data with datalink service providers (DSPs). When communicating over the Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting System

(ACARS) network, UniLink is the functional equivalent of an ARINC 758 Communications Management Unit (CMU). The UL-801 contains an imbedded VHF data radio (VDR) whereas the UL-800 requires an external VDR. The VDR provides ACARS and various other types of network communications capability for UniLink.

(FANS) 1/A+

The UniLink Future Air Navigation System implementation is intended to improve safety of flight, enhance efficiency, and increase air traffic capacity. Air traffic capacity increase is promoted by augmenting voice transmissions between crews and ATC with datalink messages during flight in oceanic and remote areas that have radar coverage. The FANS 1/A+

implementation is defined in RTCA/DO-258A and ARINC 622. Features of this implementation include Air Traffic Services (ATS), Facilities Notification (AFN), Automatic Dependent Surveillance-

Contract (ADS-C) , and Controller-Pilot Datalink Communications

(CPDLC) text data transmissions. limited or no The FAA has approved the aircraft datalink system to the criteria contained in AC 20-140A for FANS 1/A+ using VDL M2, VDL M0/A, and SatCom (IMMARSAT). The datalink system meets the aircraft-

allocated performance requirements of RCP 240 and type 180 (all sub-networks), and the performance requirements for continental applications (VDL M2 only). This design approval does not constitute operational authorization. NOTE: The colors shown on the screens in this operators manual are based on an FMS with SCN 1000.5/1100.5 installed and configured for STANDARD-2 color pallet. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 1 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Components One UASC FMS utilizing SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later is required for UniLink FANS-1/A+ implementation. A complete system includes:

UASC FMS (SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later) with a Control Display Unit (CDU) or Multifunctional Control Display Unit

(MCDU) FANS Visual Annunciator(s) FANS Aural Alerting device Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) (to record CPDLC/FANS messages and events) Approved SatCom System (to support remote oceanic FANS CPDLC communications) UniLink Airborne Datalink (SCN 30.X or later) - FANS Enabled will display the following MAIN MENU:

2 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual MCDU Use of a UASC MCDU with the UniLink UL-80X involves the following configuration/operation performance considerations:

When configured for a 429 interface, LSKs [L6] and [R6] will not be functional When configured for a 702 interface, LSKs [L5] and [R5] will not be functional (LSKs [L6] and [R6] will be used instead). The plus/minus ( + ) key will not operate as a space key. The MCDU [SP] key is used for the space function. UNILINK MENU on MCDU (429 Interface) 23-20-06.02 December 2011 3 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Applications FANS 1/A + is principally composed of three applications:

Controller-Pilot Datalink Communications

(CPDLC) CPDLC allows datalink messages to substitute for traditional voice communications for routine communications between a crew and an air traffic controller. CPDLC messages can be used to request and grant clearances, to inform the ground of the aircrafts position and situation, and to provide instructions to the crew. Air Traffic Services Facilities Notification (AFN) This application requires no crew action. AFN allows the aircraft and an Air Traffic Services (ATS) provider on the ground to exchange addresses, as well as information about which FANS applications they support. Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Contract (ADS-C) This application requires no crew action. ADS-C allows ATS providers to query the aircraft to provide position reports and other situational data at regular intervals or in response to events specified by the ATS provider, such as a change in altitude or lateral deviation. 4 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Operations NOTE: This Operators Manual includes procedures and functions used in a FANS-Enabled UniLink System. Crews that operate this system must be trained and obtain operational approval from the state of registry. Crew interface is accomplished through the FMS CDU and/or MCDU, utilizing a UASC FMS with SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later. Data may be entered at any field highlighted by a cursor. The cursor is displayed in the first empty data field. Fields with plus signs (+) indicate information is required. Fields exhibiting minus signs (-) indicate input is optional. If there is no cursor displayed in a data field, selecting the ENTER key will place the cursor over the first enterable field on the page. Data is then entered into the field using the CDU/MCDU alphanumeric keys. In some situations, flight progress and related data from the FMS will be prefilled. Subsequent presses of the [ENTER] key will move the cursor to the next enterable field. Pressing a line select key (LSK) highlights the corresponding data entry field. Selecting [ENTER] when the cursor is in the last data field on the page results in the cursor parking off of the page. Pressing [ENTER] again positions the cursor on the initial enterable field on the page. FMS Input The FMS continuously provides current data to UniLink. Many messages and requests have fields that prefill with FMS flight progress data and computed information. In most cases the user accepts the data for inclusion into the message. It is possible however to change a value by overriding that value with a manual data entry. Manual entries are generally retained until power shutdown, although data that would normally change as a flight progresses will be cleared once the page has been exited (is no longer displayed). Source FMS The crew must ensure that the FMS that is navigating the aircraft

(Source FMS) is the same FMS that supplies data to UniLink. The Source FMS is shown on the SOURCE FMS page, accessed via MAINTENANCE > SENSOR STATUS > SOURCE FMS. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 5 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual The Source FMS is indicated by an asterisk next to it. Any available FMS can be manually selected by pressing the adjacent LSK. If automatic (AUTO) selection is desired, the SELECTION METHOD LSK will toggle between MANUAL and AUTO. NOTE: It is important for the crew to ensure that the Source FMS is not changed prior to an expected flight plan modification uplink. If the Source FMS is changed prior to the uplink, the flight plan information will need to be transferred to the new Source FMS from the previously designated FMS. Communications Prior to entering Oceanic Airspace (and loss of VHF communications) the crew should suspend VHF and transition to satellite communication (See STATE under VHF DATA in the COMM CONTROL section). Current Time On every UniLink screen above the RETURN option at LSK [5R], the current UTC time is displayed. SEND When the SEND LSK is pressed, the request is placed into queue for transmission. The delivery status of the message appears above the SEND option. If data required for the message has not been entered completely, the SEND option will display as inactive and if selected, a pop-up window DATA REQUIRED will display (indicating the data is insufficient).The SEND prompt will not display an arrow (indicating active) until all required data is entered. Clear the pop-up window by pressing any active LSK. 6 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual SEND status displays the current status of the message. When the SEND LSK is pressed, the status will briefly change to QUEUED, then SENDING. The selected media for transmission (VHF, SAT, or TEL) is indicated after SENDING. When acknowledgement is received from the DSP, SENT status will display. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 7 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual UniLink Advisories The bottom left LSK on each UniLink page will display either the UNILINK MENU prompt or UniLink advisories. UniLink advisories notify the crew of UniLink activity that may require user action. Only one advisory will display at a time in the order of priority. Pressing the adjacent LSK allows viewing of the advisory message. When no advisory is displayed, the advisory field is used to display the UNILINK MENU prompt. Selecting this prompt displays the UNILINK MENU. When on an FMS page, UniLink advisories will be indicated by the flashing MSG annunciator. Pressing the [MSG] key will allow viewing of UniLink advisories and messages via the NEW MESSAGE Advisory prompt (LSK [5L]). This will open the appropriate UniLink page. Advisory Messages NEW ERROR MSG This advisory is active when an unviewed message exists in the Error Log. Selection of this advisory displays the detailed error message page for most recently logged error message that has not been viewed. ACKNOWLEDGE Indicates that an uplink message that is displayed requires crew acknowledgment. Selection will send an acknowledgment message. NEW MSG Indicates a new unverified message in the Uplink Log. Selection of this advisory displays the detailed message page for the latest unread unverified message. NEW VERIF MSG Indicates a new verified message in the Uplink Log. Selection of this advisory displays the detailed message page for the latest unread verified message. NEW WX MAP Indicates a new unviewed weather graphic in the Graphic Log. Selection of this advisory displays the most recent graphic. SELCAL Indicates a SELCAL request has been received. Selection of this advisory displays the SELCAL page. VHF VOICE (applies to UL-800 only) Indicates the VDR is in Voice Mode. Selection of this advisory displays the VHF VOICE page. 8 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual TEL SUSPEND Indicates the configured dial attempt limit has been reached and TEL LINK has been suspended (or TEL LINK has been manually suspended). Selection of this advisory displays the TEL DATA page. GND DELAY Indicates a configurable timer has elapsed since the last OUT event (push back) and the OFF event (take off) has not yet occurred. Selection of this advisory displays the EST TIME OFF page. NOCOMM Indicates multiple air/ground links are not available. Selection of this advisory displays the COMM STATUS page. SAT NOCOMM Indicates the configured SatCom air/ground link is not available. Selection of this advisory displays the COMM STATUS page. TEL NOCOMM telephony

(SatCom) system link is not available. Selection of this advisory displays the COMM STATUS page. the configured airborne Indicates VHF NOCOMM Indicates UniLink has determined that a VHF air/ground link is not available. Selection of this advisory displays the COMM STATUS page. NEW ATC MSG Indicates the presence of an unviewed CPDLC uplink. Selecting this advisory displays the uplink, together with any appropriate response options (e.g., WILCO/UNABLE). If multiple unviewed CPDLC uplinks are present, the oldest will be viewed, ensuring that messages are presented in the order received. If this advisory is active when the UNILINK prompt is selected on the FMS MESSAGE or DATA page, the advisory is selected automatically. OPEN ATC MSG Indicates the presence of a CPDLC uplink that has not yet received a closure response. Required closure responses include WILCO, UNABLE, ROGER, AFFIRM, and NEGATIVE. STANDBY is not a closure response and will not dismiss this advisory. The advisory remains active until the required closure response has been queued. If multiple open CPDLC uplinks are present, the oldest will be viewed, ensuring that messages are responded to in the order received. If this advisory is active when the UNILINK prompt is selected on the FMS MESSAGE or DATA page, the advisory is selected automatically. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 9 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual ATC RPT READY Indicates that the necessary conditions for sending a CPDLC report downlink previously requested by ATC have been met. If a single report is ready to be sent, and all the data required by that report is available, selecting the advisory will display a review page from which the report may be sent. If a single report is ready to be sent, and some of the data required by the report must be entered manually, selecting the advisory will display a message composition page on which the required data may be entered. If multiple reports are ready to be sent, selecting the advisory displays the ATC RPTS page, which contains a log of all ATC report requests that have not yet been fulfilled. From this page the desired report request can be selected, and the appropriate review page or message composition page will be displayed. Once selected, this advisory is dismissed until another requested report becomes ready to send. It does not remain active until a report has been sent. NOTE: UniLinks ability to detect REPORT PASSING events is limited. UniLink can detect the passing of a flight plan waypoint but cannot detect the passing of an arbitrary pair of lat/lon coordinates or a given latitude line or meridian. The pilot retains responsibility for monitoring the situation and sending requested reports when necessary. ATC CNCT XXXX Indicates that a new Air Traffic Service Unit

(ATSU) has become the aircrafts current ATC data authority. The ICAO code (XXXX) of the ATSU is included in the advisory. This advisory is informational; it is dismissed when selected and requires no further action. ATC DISCNECT Indicates that the aircraft no longer has a current ATC data authority. The connection with the aircrafts current ATC data authority has been lost, and there is no next data authority to take its place. This advisory is informational; it is dismissed when selected and requires no further action. ATC LOGON FAIL Indicates that an attempted AFN log on has failed, either because a negative acknowledgement was received from the ATSU or because no acknowledgement was received within ten minutes of the transmission of the AFN log on downlink. Selecting this advisory displays the ATC LOG ON page, where the status indication above the LOG ON prompt at LSK [3L] indicates the reason for the failure (ERROR or TIMEOUT). 10 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual ATC RPTS FULL Indicates that the log of pending CPDLC report requests received from ATC is now full, and one of these requests must be either satisfied or deleted. Selecting this advisory displays the ATC RPTS page. The log of pending report requests can hold up to fifteen entries. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 11 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Error Messages Most error messages generate a NEW ERROR MSG advisory which is displayed in the ERROR LOG pages. Certain error messages which are considered more urgent are displayed in a pop-up window in the middle of the current UniLink page, for example: QUEUE FULL, DISPLAY PROCESSOR FAIL, or A740: PRINTER FAIL. Entry Error Pop-up Windows UniLink provides feedback when an invalid entry is made. After an invalid entry, a pop-up window identifies the entry error. The following is a list of data entry errors and the condition that will initiate the error pop-up window. Screen Text VALUE TOO LARGE VALUE TOO SMALL TOO MANY CHARACTERS TOO FEW CHARACTERS VALUE MUST BE NUMERIC VALUE MUST BE ALPHABETIC TOO MUCH PRECISION 12 Condition The entered numeric value exceeds the allowable maximum. The entered numeric value is less than the allowable minimum. The entered number of characters exceeds the allowable maximum. The entered number of characters is less than the allowable minimum. The prompt only accepts digits. The prompt only accepts letters. The entered numeric value has too many numbers to the right of 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Screen Text NEGATIVE NOT PERMITTED MISSING N OR S MISSING E OR W INVALID NUMBER INVALID ENTRY ILLEGAL HYPHEN ILLEGAL VHF FREQUENCY Condition the decimal point. The prompt only accepts positive numbers. The entered latitude does not specify a hemisphere. The entered longitude does not specify a hemisphere. The entered characters could not be interpreted as a number. The entered characters do not conform to specific textual data item input restrictions. The entered tail number begins or ends with a hyphen. The entered frequency is not a valid VHF Voice or data frequency, or is the CSC frequency (136.975). INVALID MINUTES VALUE INVALID SECONDS VALUE PRESSURE OUT OF RANGE ILLEGAL DATA FREQUENCY The Emergency Voice frequency

(121.500) has been entered at a prompt that expects to receive a data frequency. The entered atmospheric pressure is out of range. The entered seconds value within a time field is invalid. The entered minutes value within a time field is invalid. The entered hours value within a time field is invalid. The entered day value within a date field is invalid. The entered month value within a date field is invalid. The entered year value within a INVALID HOURS VALUE INVALID MONTH INVALID YEAR INVALID DAY 23-20-06.02 December 2011 13 Screen Text INVALID LEAP YEAR INVALID SECONDS INVALID MINUTES DATA CANNOT BE MODIFIED TOO MANY VALUES INTERNAL ERROR ENTER L OR R, THEN DISTANCE DATA REQUIRED UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Condition date field is invalid. The entered date value includes Feb 29th in a year that is not a leap year. The entered seconds value within a latitude or longitude field is invalid. The entered minutes value within a latitude or longitude field is invalid.

( MCDU only) An attempt has been made to delete data from an edit prompt that displays read-

only data. MCDU only) Too may slashes have been entered in the scratchpad; the number of entered values exceeds the number of values associated with an LSK. An error is detected in the software or customer database. The entered CPDLC offset value did not begin with L or R. An attempt has been made to navigate to a new page or send a request without supplying required information. 14 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Alerting Message Alerting Message alerting functions include visual and aural alerts, and digital outputs to various Line-Replaceable Units (LRU). The outputs are intended to drive visual or aural alerting when a new uplink message is received. The digital outputs provide messaging alerts that may be used by other devices for additional alerting functions, such as the FMS MSG annunciator. Alert Inhibiting UniLink Alert Inhibiting operates in order to suspend the output of message alerting during critical phases of flight (i.e., takeoff and landing). Displayed UniLink advisories are not suppressed during critical flight phases. NOTE:

If UniLink transitions out of the takeoff phase due to transitioning directly into the landing phase, UniLink will continuously inhibit alert outputs. This ensures there are no aural alerts that could potentially distract the crew. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 15 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual User Interface Menu Tree The UniLink Main Menu page is accessed from the UNILINK prompt on either DATA 1/4 or the MESSAGE page (from a reboot or initial startup). To navigate down through the menu tree, select the applicable page option LSKs to move to the desired function. Use the RETURN LSK to move back up the menu tree. Pages shown in the menu trees may or may not be available depending on specific installation configuration. Check with installer for specific configuration details. UniLink Menu (SCN 30.X) UNILINK MENU FLIGHT INFO D-ATIS TWIP DEPARTURE CLX OCEANIC CLX OCEANIC CLX ATC VERIFY MSGS PUSHBACK CLX EXP TAXI CLX ATC ATC EMERGENCY ATC REVIEW

(MAYDAY) ATC REVIEW

(PAN) ATC REVIEW

(Cancel Emergency) ATC LOG ON ATC LOG ON 1/2 TO

(Continued on next page) ATC LOG ON 2/2 16

(LOG ON TO Region pages including:

- N PACIFIC

- S PACIFIC

- ASIA

- INDIAN OCEAN

- N ATLANTIC

- S ATLANTIC

- EUROPE) 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual UniLink Menu (continued) UNILINK MENU Continued ATC Continued ATC REQUEST ATC REQ ALTITUDE

(SINGLE) ATC REQ ALTITUDE

(BLOCK) ATC REVIEW

(REQUEST BLOCK) ATC REVIEW

(REQUEST VMC DESCENT) ATC REQ SPEED

(SINGLE) ATC REVIEW

(REQUEST) ATC REQ SPEED

(BLOCK) ATC REVIEW ATC REVIEW

(Continued on next page) 23-20-06.02 December 2011 17 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual UniLink Menu (continued) UNILINK MENU Continued ATC Continued ATC REQUEST Continued ATC REQUEST CLEARANCE

(FREE TEXT) ATC REQ RTE 1/2 ATC REQUEST DTO ATC REQ RTE 2/2 ATC REVIEW ATC REQ OFFSET ATC REQ VOICE CONTACT ATC EXPECT WHEN CAN WE ATC EXP ALTITUDE ATC EXP SPEED

(SINGLE) ATC REVIEW

(WHEN CAN WE EXPECT BACK ON ROUTE FREE-TEXT) ATC REQUEST AT ATC REVIEW

(REQUEST OFFSET OF ROUTE FREE-

TEXT) ATC REVIEW

(REQUEST VOICE CONTACT FREE-

TEXT) ATC REVIEW

(WHEN CAN WE EXPECT FREE-

TEXT) ATC EXP SPEED (BLOCK) ATC REVIEW

(WHEN CAN WE EXPECT FREE-

TEXT)

(Continued on next page) 18 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual UniLink Menu (continued) UNILINK MENU Continued ATC Continued ATC FREE-

TEXT ATC REVIEW ATC RPTS 1/X ATC POS RPT 1/2 ATC POS RPT 2/2 ATC MSGS 1/X ATC REPORTED WPT ATC NEXT WPT ATC REVIEW ATC ENSUING WPT ATC REVIEW COMM STATUS COMM CONTROL VHF VOICE See NOTE 1 See NOTE 1 VHF DATA FREQUENCIES SAT DATA TEL DATA See NOTE 2 See NOTE 3

(Continued on next page) NOTES:

1. Only available if VHF is enabled in configuration (UL-800 only) 2. Only available if SAT is enabled in configuration. 3. Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 19 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Maintenance Menu Maintenance provide access UniLink maintenance-related functions. They are accessed by pressing MAINTENANCE, LSK [4L] on the UNILINK MENU page. Other than TESTS, there are no user-related functions on these pages. See the associated UniLink Installation Manual for installation and maintenance procedures. UNILINK MENU Continued MAINTENANCE 1/3 DEVICES SENSORS 1/2 DISCRETES BCST DATA SOURCE FMS SENSORS 2/2 VDR STATUS VERSIONS ERROR LOG SYS CONFIG 1/4 I/O CONFIG DISC IN VHF CONFIG DISC OUT SAT CONFIG ARINC RX PRIORITY ARINC TX TEL CONFIG SERIAL POS REPORT GRAPHICS

(Continued on next page) REVIEW 20 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Maintenance Menu (Continued) UNILINK MENU Continued MAINTENCE Continued MAINTENCE 1/3 Continued SYS CONFIG Continued SYS CONFIG 2/4 AIRCRAFT CLEARANCES ALERTS SYS CONFIG 3/4 SYS CONFIG 4/4 TESTS TESTS POWER LOG POWER LOG PRINT JOB PRINT JOBS MAINTENANCE DATA LOAD DATA LOAD 2/3 1/2 2/2 MAINTENANCE FANS FPL 3/3 DATA

(Continued on next page) 23-20-06.02 December 2011 21 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual OPS Menu Operational (OPS) pages are used to access UniLink AOC-related functions. They are accessed through the UniLink Menu page by selecting OPS, LSK [1R}.

(Continued on next page) NOTES:

1. Only available if OOOI is enabled in configuration 2. Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration. 22 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual OPS Menu (Continued) UNILINK MENU Continued OPS 1/2 Continued OPS 2/2 See NOTE 1. WX MAP LOG MESSAGE LOGS VERIF MSGS OPS MSGS WX MAP LOG DELAY DIVERSION DELAY REASON DIVERT REASON ETA UPDATE ETA REASON SITUATION SITUATION REASON POS REPORT See NOTE 2. SELCAL NOTES:

1. Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration 2. The SELCAL option only displays when associated messages are available. Check with DSP for availability of this feature. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 23 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual UNILINK MENU Menu Navigation: [DATA] or [MSG] > UNILINK All UNILINK MENU options are contained on one page. The UniLink Menu page is accessed by selecting UNILINK from either the FMS DATA 1/4 page or the FMS MESSAGE 1/1 page. NOTE: Based on installation and configuration, the FLIGHT NO. field may or may not be displayed. 24 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Flight Information Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > FLIGHT INFO On the UNILINK MENU page, press FLIGHT INFO, LSK [1L], to access the FLIGHT INFO page. All services provided on this menu are available only over the ACARS VHF or SatCom packet data network. NOTE: Flight Information Services are advisory only. It is the responsibility of the crew to exercise reasonable and prudent judgment in the use of these advisory services. NOTE: DEPARTURE, OCEANIC, PUSHBACK, and EXP TAXI requests are configurable options and are not displayed if configured as disabled. The aircraft tail number, or registration (entered during configuration), is automatically inserted in the CALL SIGN field (less any hyphen characters). If the aircraft has a different ATS call sign (flight identifier) assigned for the flight, it should be manually entered. NOTE: If the flight number option is enabled in configuration and a flight number is entered on the UNILINK MENU page, the three-digit airline flight number (e.g., UVA1234) is inserted in the CALLSIGN field, overriding the tail number. four-digit ID and To manually enter a callsign:

1. Press LSK [1R]. The CALLSIGN field will become active. 3. Enter the desired callsign using the alphanumeric keys. 4. Press [ENTER]. The new callsign will display in the field. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 25 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual NOTE: The hierarchy of flight identifier information is as follows (with 1 being the highest):

1. A manually entered call sign 2. Airline ID/Flight Number (commercial airline only) 3. Default registration (set during installation/configuration) 26 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual D-ATIS Request Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > FLIGHT INFO > D-ATIS The D-ATIS page is used to request local arrival or departure Automatic Terminal Information Service (ATIS). To request ATIS:

1. Press D-ATIS, LSK [1L] on the FLIGHT INFO page. The D-ATIS page will display. 2. With AIRPORT active, enter the Airport Identifier and press

[ENTER] or accept the default destination airport from the FMS flight plan. NOTE: If an incomplete airport identifier is entered, the pop-up window TOO FEW CHARACTERS will display and the field will flash. Pressing the LSK and re-entering a complete identifier will correct the error. 3. DEPT is the default type of ATIS. Press LSK [2R] to toggle this field between ARRV and DEPT as needed. 4. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the message in queue for transmission. NOTE: If the information on this page is incomplete, the pop-up window DATA REQUIRED will display and the SEND prompt will not enable. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 27 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual TWIP Request Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > FLIGHT INFO > TWIP The TWIP page is used to request Terminal Weather Information for Pilots (TWIP). To make a TWIP request:

1. Press TWIP, LSK [2L] on the FLIGHT INFO page. The TWIP page will display. 2. With AIRPORT active, enter a destination airport and press

[ENTER] or accept the Destination Airport from the FMS flight plan. NOTE: If an incomplete airport identifier is entered, the pop-up window TOO FEW CHARACTERS will display and the field will flash. Pressing the LSK and re-entering a complete identifier will correct the error. 3. Press the SEND LSK to place this message in queue for transmission. The SEND prompt will not be enabled if the information on this page is incomplete. NOTE: If the information on this page is incomplete, the pop-up window DATA REQUIRED will display and the SEND prompt will not enable. 28 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Departure Clearance Request Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > FLIGHT INFO > DEPARTURE The DEPARTURE CLX page is used to request departure clearance. To request a Departure Clearance:

1. Press Departure, LSK [3L] on the FLIGHT INFO page. The DEPARTURE CLX page will display. 2. Verify or change the ORIG (origination) airport. This field defaults to the departure airport identifier from the FMS. 3. Verify or change the DEST (destination) airport. This field defaults to the destination airport from the FMS. 4. Enter GATE number (optional). 5. Press the REMARKS LSK to enter any remarks as needed (see the REMARKS Section in this manual). 6. Enter the latest ATIS version (alpha character). 7. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place this message in queue for transmission. NOTE: The SEND prompt will not be enabled if the required information on this page is incomplete, the call sign from the Flight Information Services page is not entered, or the aircraft type has not been configured from the Aircraft Configuration page. Any attempt to send this page with incomplete information results in the pop-up window DATA REQUIRED displaying. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 29 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Oceanic Clearance Request Menu Navigation: UNIILINK MENU > FLIGHT INFO > OCEANIC The OCEANIC CLX page is used to request Oceanic Clearance. To request an Oceanic Clearance:

1. Press OCEANIC, LSK [4L] on the FLIGHT INFO page. The OCEANIX CLX page will display. 2. Press ATC, LSK [1L] to open the OCEANIX CLX ATC page. 3. Select the ATC Station using the adjacent LSK, or enter a station ID in the OTHER field, LSK [R4]. The OCEANIX CLX page will display, showing the selected ATC station. If not active, press the ENTRY POINT, LSK [2L] and enter the point of entry into oceanic airspace. Press [ENTER]. 4. NOTE: Enter three to eleven characters to specify the position by latitude/longitude or by waypoint identifier. 5. If not active, press the ENTRY TIME, LSK [3L] and enter the requested time for the clearance. Press [ENTER]. 30 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 6. 7. If not active, press MACH, LSK [2R] and enter the requested Mach number. Press [ENTER]. If not active, press ALTITUDE, LSK [3R] and enter the requested flight level. Press [ENTER]. 8. Press the REMARKS LSK and enter any remarks as needed. OCEANIC Clearance remarks are entered using the OCEANIC CLX REMARKS page (see the REMARKS Page section in this manual). 9. Press SEND to place the message in queue for transmission. NOTE: If the information on this page is incomplete, the pop-up window DATA REQUIRED will display and the SEND prompt will not enable. Verified Message Log Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > FLIGHT INFO > VERIF MSG LOG The VERIF MSGS page displays all verified uplink and downlink messages and can be used to check the queue status of sent messages. See VERIF MSG LOG in the MESSAGE LOGS section of this manual. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 31 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Pushback Clearance Request Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > FLIGHT INFO > PUSHBACK The PUSHBACK CLX page is used to request pushback clearance. To request Pushback Clearance:

1. Press PUSHBACK, LSK [3R] on the FLIGHT INFO page. The PUSHBACK CLX page will display. 3. 2. Verify the ORIG (Origination) airport. Change by pressing the ORIG field LSK (if not active) and entering a different airport. Press [ENTER]. If not active, press DEST (Destination), LSK [2L] to enter the destination airport. Press [ENTER]. If not active, press GATE, LSK [3L] to enter gate Information

(optional). Press [ENTER]. If not active, press SCHED DATE, LSK [1R] to enter the scheduled date (day). Press [ENTER]. 5. 4. NOTE: Default date is per GMT. 6. If not active, press SCHED TIME, LSK [2R] to enter the scheduled time. Press [ENTER]. 7. Press REMARKS, LSK [4L] to enter any remarks as needed

(optional). Pushback remarks are entered using the PUSHBACK CLX REMARKS page (See the Remarks Page section in this manual). 8. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the message in queue for transmission. 32 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Expected Taxi Clearance Request Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > FLIGHT INFO > EXP TAXI The EXP TAXI CLX is used to request an Expected Taxi Clearance. To request an Expected Taxi Clearance:

1. Press EXP TAXI, LSK [4R] on the FLIGHT INFO page. The EXP TAXI CLX page will display. 2. Verify the ORIG (Origination) airport. Change by pressing the ORIG field LSK (if not active) and entering a different airport. Press [ENTER]. 3. 4. 5. If not active, press DEST (Destination), LSK [2L] to enter the destination airport. Press [ENTER]. If not active, press GATE, LSK [3L] to enter gate Information

(optional). Press [ENTER]. If not active, press SCHED DATE, LSK [1R] to enter the scheduled date (day). Press [ENTER]. NOTE: Default date is per GMT. 6. If not active, press SCHED TIME, LSK [2R] to enter the scheduled time. Press [ENTER]. 7. Press REMARKS, LSK [4L] to enter any remarks as needed

(optional). Taxi Clearance remarks are entered using the EXP TAXI CLX REMARKS page (See the Remarks Page section in this manual). 8. Press SEND to place the message in queue for transmission. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 33 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Remarks Create and Include with Requests Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > FLIGHT INFO > DEPARTURE or OCEANIC or PUSHBACK or EXP TAXI The Remarks page is available from the following Flight Information

(FLIGHT INFO) services pages:

DEPARTURE OCEANIC PUSHBACK EXP TAXI To access the REMARKS Page:

1. On a Flight Information service page (in this example, OCEANIC CLX), press the REMARKS LSK. The associated Remarks page will open with the cursor (@) flashing on the text line. NOTE: In this example, OCEANIC CLX is used. All REMARKS pages are operated in the same manner. 34 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 2. Create a message using the alphanumeric keys and LSKs. The [ + ] key inserts spaces in the text ([SP] key on MCDU). Text will automatically word wrap to the next line as applicable. The number of pages in the message will increase as necessary to accommodate entered text. LSKs [1L] through [3L] provide special characters as indicated on the display. Pressing the specific LSK multiple times cycles through the displayed choices. To enter a special character several times in a row, select another key between special character LSK presses (example: to enter several periods in a row, press LSK [2L], then the right-arrow key (which does nothing), then [2R], then the right-arrow key, etc.). The arrow LSKs ([1R] through [4R]) move the cursor position within text already entered. Text entered at the cursor position in front of other text is inserted and word wrapping will occur as necessary. To start a new line of text, press [ENTER]; the cursor will start a new line of text (the active text line will have larger text). The CLEAR LSK erases all entered text on the page. 3. When finished editing the text portion of the message, press RETURN, LSK [5R]. The entered text will display in the REMARKS field for review. NOTE: The REMARKS field displays the first 7 characters of entered text. A following ellipsis () indicates there is more text in the message. The REMARKS page allows review of the entire remarks text. 4. Press the SEND LSK to place the message in queue for transmission. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 35 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual ATC Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > ATC The ATC page provides a number of options for communicating with Air Traffic Control. Options to communicate emergencies, various reports, requests, and general commentary are available on this page. To access the ATC page, press ATC, LSK [2L] on the UNILINK MENU page. NOTE: If connected to a Current Data Authority (CDA), it will display in the page title. Otherwise dashed lines will display. 36 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual EMERGENCY Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > ATC > EMERGENCY The ATC EMERGENCY page displays emergency communication and messaging options. Selecting EMERGENCY, LSK [1L} opens the ATC EMERGENCY page. Create and Send an Emergency Message To send an emergency message:

1. Verify that fields for LSKs [R1] through [R4} (DIVERTING TO, DESCENDING TO, OFFSETTING, FUEL/SOULS) are correct. NOTE: All these fields are optional. DIVERTING TO A four character airport identifier indicating the diversion destination. DESCENDING TO Altitude the aircraft will descend to using the following entry criteria:

Flight Level Enter the three digit designation for flight level (370 = FL370), FL followed by a three digit number Altitude (feet) Enter the altitude (i.e., 16000) Altitude Below 600 ft. Enter the altitude with a leading 0

(0137 = 137 ft) Metric Flight Level Enter S followed by a number Altitude (meters) Enter a number followed by an M 23-20-06.02 December 2011 37 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Altitude Data Ranges Units Feet Meters Flight Level Metric Flight Level Lower Limit Upper Limit Resolution 0 0 030 0100 10 1 1 (i.e., 100 ft.) 1 (i.e., 10m.) 25,000 16,000 600 2000 OFFSETTING The offset distance from the original flight plan track the aircraft will acquire using the following criteria:

Entered distance must be preceded by an L or R as applicable Offset distance must be between 1 and 128 NM, per RTCA DO-258A. UniLink allows communication of an offset up to 128 NM; however, the UASC FMS will only accept a maximum of 99.9 NM. A full offset distance greater than 99.9 NM will require manual steering by the crew. FUEL/SOULS Indicate the flight time in hours + minutes

(XX+XX) that the remaining fuel makes available (maximum entry of 23+59), and the number of persons onboard. 2. Press the MAYDAY or PAN LSK as needed. The associated ATC REVIEW page will display. Depending on how much information was pre-filled or entered into the right-hand fields on the ATC EMERGENCY page, the ATC REVIEW page will have multiple pages. NOTE: For a Mayday downlink, an abbreviated position report including current position, time, altitude, and speed will display on the ATC REVIEW page (if available from the source air data computer (ADC) or the FMS). NOTE: The SEND option will not be available for sending the message until all pages in the ATC REVIEW have been viewed. 38 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 3. As needed, press the FREE-TEXT, LSK

[3L] and enter information as required. Press the [ENTER] key. NOTE: The FREE-TEXT field is optional. It can contain a maximum of 24 characters. 4. Press the SEND LSK. QUEUED will display above the SEND option to indicate the message is in queue for transmission. The SEND option will no longer have an arrow. 5. Press the RETURN LSK to display the ATC EMERGENCY page. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 39 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Cancel an Emergency To cancel an emergency:

1. On the ATC EMERGENCY page, press CANCEL EMRG, LSK

[4L]. The ATC REVIEW (CANCEL EMERGENCY) page will display. NOTE: The CANCEL EMRG prompt becomes visible only after sending a MAYDAY downlink. 2. Press the FREE-TEXT LSK and enter information as needed. 3. Press the SEND LSK to place the message is in queue for transmission. 40 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual LOG ON Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > ATC > LOG ON The ATC LOG ON page is used to log on to an ATC facility via the ATS Facilities Notification (AFN) application. This log-on functions as a datalink equivalent to voice initial contact. Prior to initiating an ATC Log On, the following should be verified:

The aircraft identification matches the identification in the filed flight plan The flight plan contains the correct aircraft registration and address

(If planning to use ADS-C services), ADS-C is ENABLED Prior to ATC LOG ON, and throughout FANS operations, the crew should ensure the flight path intent data (waypoint Lat/Long, altitude, and offsets) of the Universal Avionics FMS providing data to the UL-80X remains synchronized to the navigating FMS by automatic or manual means for at least the next two waypoints. Appropriate times and conditions for performing an ATC log on include:

Time/Condition Prior to takeoff (where permitted or required), but no earlier than 45 minutes prior to ETD 15 minutes or more prior to FIR boundary estimate, above 10,000 feet Less than 15 minutes prior to FIR boundary estimate, above 10,000 feet ATSU/ATC Current ATSU for the FIR that the departure airport is located within. Current ATSU for the FIR in which the aircraft is operating Next ATSU that provides CPDLC and/or ADS-C services for the FIR on that flight 23-20-06.02 December 2011 41 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual As instructed per above Following an unsuccessful data link transfer to another ATSU or when instructed by ATC LOG ON To perform an AFN log on:

1. Verify the aircraft identification. Or press CALLSIGN, LSK [1L], enter an aircraft call sign, and press [ENTER]. 2. Press ATC, LSK [2L] to select an ATC facility. The ATC LOG ON TO page will open for selection of a region. A region selection opens listings of specific ATC facility identifiers. A facility ID may also be manually entered. Selecting an ATC facility returns the display to ATC LOG ON 1/2. 3. Once an ATC facility is selected, the LOG ON option becomes active (arrow displays). Press LOG ON, LSK [3L] to initiate an AFN log on downlink message. NOTE: A successful AFN log on is indicated by SUCCESS displaying above the LOG ON option. The ATC facility may in turn initiate ADS-C and/or CPDLC connections with UniLink. AFN log on failure is indicated by an ATC LOGON FAIL advisory alert and a status of either TIMEOUT (no response to the AFN log on downlink within 10 minutes) or ERROR (if UniLink received an error response to the log on downlink). The user may attempt another AFN log on or revert to voice communications. Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Contract (ADS-C) ADS-C surveillance is dependent on automatic downlink information from onboard avionics triggered by specified events or time intervals. The ADS-C interface (provided by the ATC database) provides the following functions:

ADS-C Disable/Enable Pressing LSK [1R] toggles ENABLED and DISABLED:

ENABLED allows established the ADS-C contract with ATC to be DISABLED suspends ADS-C communication and terminates all existing contracts. 42 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual ADS-C NORM/EMRG Pressing LSK [2R] toggles the ADS-C application mode between Normal and Emergency. This will also change the ADS-C mode on the ATC EMERGENCY page (and vice versa). The ATC LOG ON page 2/2 (ADS-C STATUS) Pressing the [NEXT]

key displays the Status of each ADS-C connection (including ACARS address, periodic contracts, event contracts, and emergency/normal mode). Controller-Pilot Datalink Communications (CPDLC) CPDLC is a two-way datalink system allowing controllers at a CDA to communicate text messages to the crew instead of using traditional voice communications. When a successful AFN log on is established, a CPDLC connection can be made by the CDA. When the CDA establishes a CPDLC connection, the CPDLC status displayed at LSK [3R] changes from INACTIVE to ACTIVE. Selecting TERMINATE at LSK [3R] breaks all exiting CPDLC connections, returning the CPDLC status to INACTIVE. An ATC facility cannot establish another CPDLC connection with UniLink until the user performs another successful AFN log on. NOTE: The crew should exercise prompt response/closure following receipt of a CPDLC uplink. Open CPDLC uplinks should not be deleted. CURR (Current) ATC and NEXT ATC These fields display the identifiers for the CDA and Next Data Authority (NDA). Exiting a FANS Service Area:

Approximately 15 minutes after exiting CPDLC or ADS-C service areas, the following should display:

ATC LOG ON 1/2:

The CURR ATC and NEXT ATC fields on ATC LOG ON 1/2 display dashes The CPDLC field, LSK [3R] displays INACTIVE The ADS-C field, LSK [1R] displays either ENABLED or DISABLED (but not ACTIVE) 23-20-06.02 December 2011 43 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual ATC LOG ON 2/2:

All five ADS-C connection fields display dashes NOTE: If a CPDLC or ADS-C connection remains active, the crew should take action to ensure the connections are terminated. 44 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual LATENCY Upon CPDLC connection, the CDA (ATC) may send a FREE-TEXT uplink with the desired message latency value. Latency may be reset by the crew to the ATC-specified value. Upon hand-off to a different ATC, a new value request may be received. The request will be in the form of SET MAX UPLINK DELAY VALUE TO [value] SECONDS or CONFIRM MESSAGE LATENCY TIMER OFF. To change the LATENCY value:

1. Press LATENCY, LSK [4R]. 2. Using the numeric keys, type in the desired value (can be set to a non-zero value between 1 and 999). 3. Press [ENTER]. To turn off the LATENCY function:

1. Press LATENCY, LSK [4R]. 2. Press the [BACK] key. 3. Press the [ENTER] key. The field will show SEC to indicate LATENCY is turned off. Received CPDLC uplinks can have an optional SENT timestamp appended to the message (at ATCs discretion). The message latency value is used by UniLink to determine if a received uplink is delayed by comparing the sent time to the system time at which the uplink was received. The delayed status of a given message is displayed following the message text (example):

2211Z KZAK NEW PROCEED DIRECT TO NUCAR

(SENT 2205Z DELAYED) The time stamp that follows the uplink ATC message will include the word DELAYED (SENT 1234Z--DELAYED). The crew may decide to respond to the uplink normally or to contact ATC for clarification. UniLink resets the message latency value to the default value stored in the configuration module whenever the aircraft is without a CPDLC connection such as end of flight, commanded termination, etc. The latency value is not automatically reset during a CPDLC handoff. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 45 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual REQUEST Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > ATC > REQUEST The ATC REQUEST page is used to communicate various flight operations requests via the CPDLC connection. Each request option

(ALTITUDE, VMC DESCENT, SPEED, etc.) utilizes specific sub-

pages to implement the request. ALTITUDE Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > ATC > REQUEST > ALTITUDE Altitude requests can be made for SINGLE or BLOCK altitudes. SINGLE altitudes are specific, whereas BLOCK altitudes refer to a range or block of altitudes. Consequently, altitude requests will be made from either the ATC REQ ALTITUDE SINGLE or ATC REQ ALTITUDE BLOCK page. To make an altitude request Single Altitude:

1. From the ATC REQUEST page, press ALTITUDE, LSK [1L]. The ATC REQ ALTITUDE SINGLE page will display. 46 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 2. With ALTITUDE active, enter the desired altitude and press

[ENTER]. NOTE: Altitude can be entered as follows:

Flight Level Enter the three digit designation for flight level

(370 = FL370), FL followed by a three digit number Altitude (feet) Enter the altitude (i.e., 16000) Altitude Below 600 ft. Enter the altitude with a leading 0

(0137 = 137 ft) Metric Flight Level Enter S followed by a number Altitude (meters) Enter a number followed by an M Altitude Data Ranges Units Feet Meters Flight Level Metric Flight Level Lower Limit Upper Limit Resolution 0 0 030 0100 10 1 1 (i.e., 100 ft.) 1 (i.e., 10m.) 25,000 16,000 600 2000 3. Press CLIMB, LSK [2L] and toggle between NORMAL and CRUISE as applicable. 4. Press AT, LSK [3L] (optional). The ATC REQUEST AT screen will display. NOTE: When the AT LSK is selected, the CLIMB option will automatically set to NORMAL; CPDLC does not allow an altitude request at a position or time to involve a CRUISE climb. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 47 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 5. Press the appropriate LSK to enter information for FIX, NAVAID, AIRPORT, TIME (ZULU), LAT/LON, or Place/Bearing/Distance

(P/B/D). Display will return to ATC REQ ALTITUDE page. 6. Press DUE TO, LSK [1R] and toggle between WEATHER, A/C PERF, or NONE as applicable (default is NONE). 7. Press AT PILOT DISC, LSK [2R] and toggle between NO and YES to indicate altitude change at the crews discretion (default is NO). 8. Press OWN SEP/VMC, LSK [3R] and toggle between NO and YES to indicate whether traffic separation will be maintained by the crew (per VMC rules) or separation will be under ATC control

(default is NO) 9. Press REVIEW, LSK [4L]. The ATC REVIEW 1/X page will display, reflecting the information entered on the ATC REQ ALTITUDE page. NOTE: If no data was entered in the ALTITUDE field, the pop-up window DATA REQUIRED will display. 10. Press FREE-TEXT, LSK [3L] (optional) and enter information as needed. 11. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to put the altitude request in queue for transmission. To make an altitude request Block Altitude:

1. From the ATC REQUEST page, press ALTITUDE, LSK [1L]. The ATC REQ ALTITUDE SINGLE page will display. 2. Press BLOCK, LSK [4R]. The ATC REQ ALTITUDE - BLOCK page will display. 48 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 3. With ALTITUDE active, enter one end of a desired altitude range 4. and press [ENTER]. If not active, press TO, LSK [2L] and enter the other end of the desired altitude range. Press [ENTER]. NOTE: Altitude can be entered as follows:

Flight Level Enter the three digit designation for flight level

(370 = FL370), FL followed by a three digit number Altitude (feet) Enter the altitude (i.e., 16000) Altitude Below 600 ft. Enter the altitude with a leading 0

(0137 = 137 ft) Metric Flight Level Enter S followed by a number Altitude (meters) Enter a number followed by an M Altitude Data Ranges Units Feet Meters Flight Level Metric Flight Level Lower Limit Upper Limit Resolution 0 0 030 0100 10 1 1 (i.e., 100 ft.) 1 (i.e., 10m.) 25,000 16,000 600 2000 5. Press DUE TO, LSK [1R] and toggle between WEATHER, A/C PERF, or NONE as applicable (default is NONE). 6. Press AT PILOT DISC, LSK [2R] and toggle between NO and YES to indicate altitude change at the crews discretion (default is NO). 7. Press OWN SEP/VMC, LSK [3R] and toggle between NO and YES to indicate whether traffic separation will be maintained by the crew (per VMC rules) or separation will be under ATC control

(default is NO) 8. Press REVIEW, LSK [4L]. The ATC REVIEW 1/X page will display, reflecting the information entered on the ATC REQ ALTITUDE-BLOCK page. NOTE: If no data was entered in the ALTITUDE or TO fields, the pop-

up window DATA REQUIRED will display. 9. Press FREE-TEXT, LSK [3R] and enter information as needed. 10. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to put the altitude request in queue for transmission. VMC DESCENT 23-20-06.02 December 2011 49 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > ATC > REQUEST > VMC DESCENT The ATC REVIEW REQUEST VMC DESCENT page is used to request a crew-controlled descent under Visual Meteorological Conditions (VMC) flight rules. To make a VMC request:

1. Press VMC DESCENT, LSK [2R] on the ATC REQUEST page. The ATC REVIEW REQUEST VMC DESCENT page will display. 2. Press FREE-TEXT, LSK [3L] and enter text as need regarding the descent request. 3. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the message in queue for transmission. 50 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual SPEED Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > ATC > REQUEST > SPEED Speed requests can be made for SINGLE or BLOCK speeds. SINGLE speeds are specific, whereas BLOCK speeds refer to a speed range or block. Consequently, speed requests will be made from either the ATC REQ SPEED SINGLE or ATC REQ SPEED BLOCK page. To make a speed request - Single Speed:

1. Press SPEED, LSK [3L] on the ATC REQUEST page. The ATC REQ SPEED SINGLE page will display. 2. With SPEED active, enter a desired speed as follows:

To enter speed in IAS (knots) - enter the speed value (i.e. 235) and press [ENTER]. The entered value will be followed by IAS. To enter a Mach value - type M, use the [ + ] key to place a period, then enter the value. Press [ENTER] and an M will display after the entered value. To enter speed in IAS KPH enter the speed value (i.e., 235), then enter KM and press [ENTER]. The entered value will be followed by KM IAS. Speed Data Ranges:

Units Knots IAS KPH IAS Mach Lower Limit Upper Limit 70 100 0.61 380 1370 6.04 Resolution 10 10 0.01 3. Press DUE TO, LSK [1R] and toggle between WEATHER, A/C PERF, or NONE as applicable (default is NONE). 23-20-06.02 December 2011 51 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 4. Press REVIEW, LSK [4L]. The ATC REVIEW 1/X page will display, reflecting the information entered on the ATC REQ SPEED page. NOTE: If no data was entered in the SPPED field, the pop-up window DATA REQUIERED will display. 5. Press FREE-TEXT, LSK [3L] and enter information as needed. NOTE: Text is limited to 24 characters on the page (text will not wrap). 6. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to put the speed request in queue for transmission. To make a speed request - Block Speed:

1. From the ATC REQUEST page, press Speed, LSK [3L]. The ATC REQ SPEED SINGLE page will display. 2. Press BLOCK, LSK [4R]. The ATC REQ SPEED - BLOCK page will display. 3. With SPEED active, enter a desired speed as follows:

To enter speed in IAS (knots) - enter the speed value (i.e. 235) and press [ENTER]. The entered value will be followed by IAS. To enter a Mach value - type M, use the [ + ] key to place a period, then enter the value. Press [ENTER] and an M will display after the entered value. To enter speed in IAS KPH enter the speed value (i.e., 235), then enter KM and press [ENTER]. The entered value will be followed by KM IAS. 52 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Speed Data Ranges:

Units Knots IAS KPH IAS Mach Lower Limit Upper Limit 70 100 0.61 380 1370 6.04 Resolution 10 10 0.01 4. Press TO, LSK [2L] and enter the other end of the desired speed range. 5. Press DUE TO, LSK [1R] and toggle between WEATHER, A/C PERF, or NONE as applicable (default is NONE). 6. Press REVIEW, LSK [4L]. The ATC REVIEW 1/X page will display, reflecting the information entered on the ATC REQ SPEED - BLOCK page. NOTE: If no data was entered in the SPEED or TO fields, the pop-up window DATA REQUIERED will display 7. Press FREE-TEXT, LSK [3R] and enter information as needed. NOTE: Text is limited to 24 characters on the page (text will not wrap). 8. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to put the altitude request in queue for transmission. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 53 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual CLEARANCE Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > ATC > REQUEST > CLEARANCE ATC Clearance requests are made utilizing the ATC REVIEW PAGE. To request ATC clearance:

1. Press CLEARANCE, LSK [1R]. The ATC REVIEW-REQUEST CLEARANCE page will display. 2. Press FREE-TEXT, LSK [3L] and enter request information. NOTE: Text is limited to 24 characters on the page (text will not wrap). 3. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to put the request into queue for transmission. 54 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual ROUTE Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > ATC > REQUEST > ROUTE NOTE: DTO, Track, Heading, and procedures are all mutually exclusive. If data is entered in one of these fields, entry of data in another field prior to sending the request will eliminate the previous field entry. The ATC route request pages are used to submit ATC requests for direct-to routes; arrival, approach, and departure procedures; and heading clearances. The route request pages include ATC REQ RTE 1/2 and 2/2. Access ATC REQ RTE page 1/2 by selecting ROUTE, LSK [2R] from the ATC REQUEST page. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 55 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Direct-To To make a Direct-To route request:

1. On the ATC REQ RTE 1/2 page, press DTO, LSK [2L]. The ATC REQUEST DTO page will display. 2. Press the appropriate LSK to enter information for FIX, NAVAID, AIRPORT, LAT/LON, or Place/Bearing/Distance (P/B/D). The display will return to the ATC REQ RTE 1/2 page showing the entered information at the DTO option. If applicable, press DUE TO, LSK [1R] and toggle between NONE, WEATHER, and A/C PERF as applicable. 3. 4. Press REVIEW, LSK [4L]. The ATC REVIEW 1/X page will display showing information from the ATC REQ RTE 1/2 page. NOTE: If no data was entered in the DTO field, the pop-up window DATA REQUIRED will display. 5. Press FREE-TEXT, LSK [3R] to add any additional text for the Direct-To request. 6. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to put the request into queue for transmission Heading or Ground Track To make a heading or ground track route request:

1. On the ATC REQ RTE 1/2 page, press HEADING, LSK [2R], or TRACK, LSK [3R], as needed. 2. Enter the desired heading or ground track. NOTE: Entry of a number will result in a magnetic heading. Entry of a number followed by a T will result in a true heading. 56 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 3. If applicable, press DUE TO, LSK [1R] and toggle between WEATHER, A/C PERF, or NONE (NONE is the default). 4. Press REVIEW, LSK [4L]. The ATC REVIEW 1/X page will display showing the information entered on the ATC REQ RTE 1/2 page. NOTE: If no data was entered in the HEADING or TRACK fields, the pop-up window DATA REQUIRED will display. 5. Press FREE-TEXT, LSK [3L] and enter additional information as needed. 6. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to put the request into queue for transmission. Procedure - Arrival, Approach, or Departure To make a Procedure request:

1. On ATC REQ RTE 2/2, press PROC NAME, LSK [1L] and enter the desired procedure name (up to six alphanumeric characters). 2. Press PROC TYPE, LSK [2L] and toggle between DEPT

(departure), ARRV (arrival), and APPR (approach) as applicable. 3. Press PROC TRANS, LSK [3L] (optional) and enter a transition

(up to five alphanumeric characters). 4. Press REVIEW, LSK [4L]. The ATC REVIEW 1/X page will display with the procedure request information showing. NOTE: If no data was entered in the PROC NAME field, the pop-up window DATA REQUIRED will display. 5. Press FREE-TEXT, LSK [3L] and enter additional information as needed. 6. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to put the request into queue for transmission. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 57 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual OFFSET Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > ATC > REQUEST > OFFSET An offset request involves specifying to ATC a direction and a lateral distance (offset) from the desired track (DTK). The ATC REQ OFFSET page, accessed via LSK [3R] on the ATC REQUEST page, is used to make an offset request. To make an Offset request:

1. With OFFSET active, enter an offset distance and press

[ENTER]. NOTE: Entered distance (in NM) must be preceded by an L or R to indicate offset side from track. Offset distances must be between 1 and 128 NM (the UASC FMS has a maximum of 99.9 NM). NOTE: It is recommended that offsets beyond 25 NM of the original route be avoided. Greater offsets may cause ETAs in ADS-C reports tolerance requirement. three-minute error to exceed the 2. Press AT, LSK [2L] (optional). The ATC REQUEST AT page will display. 3. Press the appropriate LSK to enter information for FIX, NAVAID, AIRPORT, TIME (ZULU), LAT/LON, or Place/Bearing/Distance

(P/B/D). The display will return to the ATC REQ OFFSET page showing the entered information at the AT option. 4. Press DUE TO, LSK [1R] and toggle between WEATHER, A/C PERF, or NONE (NONE is the default). NOTE: If no valid entry is made at the AT option and the value of DUE TO is WEATHER, the ATC REVIEW page will indicate 58 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual REQUEST WEATHER DEVIATION UP TO (offset distance and direction) OF ROUTE. 5. Press REVIEW, LSK [4L]. The ATC REVIEW 1/X page displays showing the information from the ATC REQ OFFSET page. NOTE: If no data was entered in the OFFSET field, the pop-up window DATA REQUIRED will display. 6. Press FREE-TEXT, LSK [3L] and enter text as needed. 7. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to put the OFFSET request in queue for transmission. VOICE CONTACT Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > ATC > REQUEST > VOICE CONTACT The ATC REQ VOICE CONTACT page, accessed via LSK [4R] on the ATC REQUEST page, is used to request voice communication with ATC on a specific frequency or channel. To make a voice contact request:

1. Press the associated LSK for VHF FREQ, HF FREQ, UHF FREQ, or SAT CHANNEL as needed. Enter a frequency or channel. NOTE: A valid entry at any of the LSKs will invalidate (remove) the entry at any other LSK made previously. 2. Press REVIEW, LSK [4L]. The ATC REVIEW 1/X page will display, showing REQUEST VOICE CONTACT and the entered frequency or channel. (If no frequency or channel was entered, none will display on the REVIEW page). 3. Press FREE-TEXT, LSK [3L] and enter text as needed. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 59 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual NOTE: Text is limited to 24 characters on the page (text will not wrap). 4. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to put the voice contact request in queue for transmission. EXPECT Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > ATC > EXPECT CPDLC Negotiation Requests (or ATC EXPECT) are used as a follow-

up to previous altitude, speed, or route requests made to ATC (if ATC has not responded in a timely manner). This is accomplished via the ATC EXPECT page, accessed by pressing EXPECT, LSK [4L] on the ATC page. ALTITUDE Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > ATC > EXPECT > ALTITUDE To create an altitude negotiation request:

Press ALTITUDE, LSK [1L]. The ATC EXP ALTITUDE page will display. 60 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual NOTE: There are two ways to indicate altitude for the ATC EXP ALTITUDE request. The user can enter a specific altitude and indicate the type of climb (if ascending), or the altitude change can be identified as either HIGHER or LOWER without a specific altitude indicated. Specific altitude request:

1. Press ALTITUDE, LSK [1L] and enter a desired altitude. NOTE: Altitude can be entered as follows:

Flight Level Enter the three digit designation for flight level

(370 = FL370), or FL followed by a three digit number Altitude (feet) Enter the altitude (16000) Altitude Below 600 ft. Enter the altitude with a leading 0

(0137 = 137 ft) Metric Flight Level Enter S followed by a number Altitude (meters) Enter a number followed by M Altitude Data Ranges Units Feet Meters Flight Level Metric Flight Level Lower Limit Upper Limit Resolution 0 0 030 0100 10 1 1 (i.e., 100 ft.) 1 (i.e., 10m.) 25,000 16,000 600 2000 2. Press CLIMB, LSK [2L] and toggle NORMAL or CRUISE as desired. General altitude request:

3. Press HIGHER or LOWER (LSKs [1R] or [2R] respectively). An asterisk (*) will display next to the selection. CLIMB will default to NORMAL (it is not applicable in a general altitude request). 4. After entering specific or general altitude request information, press REVIEW, LSK [4L]. The ATC REVIEW 1/X page will display showing the information entered on the ATC EXP ALTITUDE page WHEN CAN WE EXPECT (specific altitude value entered information). 23-20-06.02 December 2011 61 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual NOTE: If no data was entered in the ALTITUDE field, or either HIGHER or LOWER selected, the pop-up window DATA REQUIRED will display. 5. Press FREE-TEXT, LSK [3L] and enter text as needed. NOTE: Text is limited to 24 characters on the page (text will not wrap). 6. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to put the request in queue for transmission. SPEED Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > ATC > EXPECT > SPEED Speed negotiation requests can be made for specific speeds (Single) or speed ranges (Block). Speed Single:

1. Press SPEED: LSK [2L]. The ATC EXP SPEED SINGLE page will display. 2. With SPEED active, enter a desired speed as follows:

To enter speed in IAS (knots) - enter the speed value (i.e. 235) and press [ENTER]. The entered value will be followed by IAS. To enter a Mach value - type M, use the [ + ] key to place a period, then enter the value. Press [ENTER] and an M will display after the entered value. To enter speed in IAS KPH enter the speed value (i.e., 235), then enter KM and press [ENTER]. The entered value will be followed by KM IAS. 62 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Speed Data Ranges:

Units Knots IAS KPH IAS Mach Lower Limit Upper Limit 70 100 0.61 380 1370 6.04 Resolution 10 10 0.01 3. Press REVIEW, LSK [4L]. The ATC REVIEW 1/X page will display showing the entered speed from the ATC EXP SPEED SINGLE page: WHEN CAN WE EXPECT (specific speed value entered). NOTE: If no data was entered in the SPEED field, the pop-up window DATA REQUIERED will display 4. Press FREE-TEXT, LSK [3L] and add text as needed. NOTE: Text is limited to 24 characters on the page (text will not wrap). 5. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to put the speed negotiation request into queue for transmission. Speed Block:

1. Press SPEED: LSK [2L]. The ATC EXP SPEED SINGLE page will display. 2. Press BLOCK, LSK [4R]. The ATC EXP SPEED BLOCK page will display. 3. With SPEED active, enter the bottom of the desired speed range:

To enter speed in IAS (knots) - enter the speed value (i.e. 235) and press [ENTER]. The entered value will be followed by IAS. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 63 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual To enter a Mach value - type M, use the [ + ] key to place a period, then enter the value. Press [ENTER] and an M will display after the entered value. To enter speed in IAS KPH enter the speed value (i.e., 235), then enter KM and press [ENTER]. The entered value will be followed by KM IAS. Speed Data Ranges:

Units Knots IAS KPH IAS Mach Lower Limit Upper Limit 70 100 0.61 380 1370 6.04 Resolution 10 10 0.01 In the TO field, enter top of the desired speed range. 4. 5. Press REVIEW, LSK [4L]. The ATC REVIEW 1/X page will display showing the entered speeds from the ATC EXP SPEED BLOCK page. WHEN CAN WE EXPECT (speed value entered).TO (speed value entered). NOTE: If no data was entered in the SPEED or TO fields, the pop-up window DATA REQUIERED will display 6. Press FREE-TEXT, LSK [3L] and add text as needed. NOTE: Text is limited to 24 characters on the page (text will not wrap). 7. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to put the speed negotiation request into queue for transmission. 64 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual BACK ON ROUTE Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > ATC > EXPECT > BACK ON ROUTE 1. Press BACK ON ROUTE, LSK [3L]. The ATC REVIEW 1/1 page will display showing WHEN CAN WE EXPECT BACK ON ROUTE. 2. Press FREE-TEXT, LSK [3L] and enter text as needed. NOTE: Text is limited to 24 characters on the page (text will not wrap). 3. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to put the speed negotiation request into queue for transmission. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 65 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual ATC FREE-TEXT Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > ATC > FREE-TEXT General purpose communications with ATC can be performed through the FREE-TEXT function. Communications of a non-emergency nature or general inquiries are made using the ATC FREE-TEXT page. To send a text message:

1. Press FREE-TEXT, LSK [1R] on the ATC page. The ATC FREE-

TEXT 1/1 page will display with the cursor (@) flashing at the beginning of the text line. 2. Enter text (alphanumeric keys) as needed. The plus/minus [ + ] key is used to insert a space ([SP] key on MCDU). The text automatically word wraps to the next line. The number of pages in the message will increase as necessary to accommodate entered text. LSKs [1L] and [2L] are used to insert special characters as indicated on the display. Selecting the same special character key multiple times will cause the selected character to cycle between the displayed choices. To enter a special character several times in a row, select another key between special character LSK presses (example: to enter several periods in a row, press LSK [2R], then the right-arrow key (which does nothing), then [2R], then the right-arrow key, etc.). The arrow LSKs ([1R] through [4R]) will move the cursor position within the text that has been entered. 66 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 3. To delete entire message, press CLEAR, LSK [3L]. 4. When finished entering text, press REVIEW, LSK [4L]. The ATC REVIEW 1/X page will display showing text entered on the ATC FREE-TEXT page. NOTE: If no text was entered on the FREE-TEXT page, the pop-up window DATA REQUIRED will display. 5. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to put the message into queue for transmission. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 67 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual RPTS LIST Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > ATC > RPTS LIST The RPTS (reports) LIST function provides a listing (displayed on the ATC RPTS 1/X page) of the 15 oldest unanswered report requests by ATC, with the most recent request shown first. As reports successfully complete transmission (i.e., receive an ACARS network acknowledgement), they are deleted from the RPTS LIST. The number of pages of the ATC RPTS screen is dependent on the number of requested reports. UniLink displays up to four report requests per page for a maximum of four pages. NOTE: A report requested by ATC can be accessed and sent via the ATC RPTS 1/X page. Report Statuses include:

Status PENDING UniLink has not yet determined that the conditions have been Description READY QUEUED met for the report to be sent. UniLink has determined that the conditions have been met for the report to be sent. UniLink placed the report in its downlink queue but has not yet successfully transmitted it. SENDING UniLink is transmitting the report. To view the Reports List:

1. On the ATC page press RPTS LIST, LSK [2R]. The ATC RPTS 1/X page will display, showing the 15 oldest unanswered report requests in queue. Above each report is displayed the time the report was received and its status. 68 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual NOTE: If the request title is truncated (as in the above example due to no text wrapping), the complete title can be viewed on an ATC MSG page. 2. To view a specific report response, press the left LSK adjacent the listed request. 3. To delete a specific report, press the adjacent right-hand LSK. A pop-up window will display to DELETE or CANCEL; press the desired LSK. 4. Press RETURN, LSK [5R] to return to the ATC page. NOTE: UniLink does not detect duplicate uplink ATC requests. This must be done by the crew. To respond to an ATC report request:

1. On the ATC RPTS 1/X page, find the requested report. 2. Press the left-hand LSK adjacent the report. If UniLink is capable of prefilling the data required in the report, the ATC RPT 1/1 page will display showing the requested information. If UniLink does not have enough information to prefill the report, a data entry page will display depending on the specific report data required.

(Example of an ATC RPT page) 3. If needed, press MODIFY, LSK [4L]. Depending on the requested information, the ATC report page will display (such as ATC PRESENT ALTITUDE or ATC ASSIGNED ROUTE). 4. Modify the information as needed and press REVIEW, LSK [4L]. The ATC RPT page displays showing the changed information. 5. As needed, press FREE-TEXT, LSK [3L] and enter text. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 69 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 6. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to put the message in queue for transmission. Immediate and Delayed Reports and Requests There are over 20 possible report or request pages, categorized as either Immediate or Delayed. Immediate Requests and Reports Immediate uplink requests and reports, listed in Table 1, do not require a ROGER response and can be fulfilled immediately. If UniLink receives a valid Data Transaction uplink containing a request, that request will be added to the RPTS LIST with status pending. NOTE: Data statuses include:

Sufficient = UniLink supplies the necessary data on the page Insufficient = UniLink cannot supply all the data and it will need to be entered No Data = No data is required for the communication TABLE 1 Immediate Reports and Requests Uplink Requests Display CONFIRM ALTITUDE CONFIRM POSITION CONFIRM SPEED CONFIRM HEADING CONFIRM GROUND TRACK CONFIRM ASSIGNED ALTITUDE CONFIRM ASSIGNED SPEED CONFIRM NEXT WAYPOINT CONFIRM NEXT Downlink Reports Display PRESENT ALTITUDE

[altitude]

PRESENT POSITION

[position]

PRESENT SPEED [speed]

PRESENT HEADING

[degrees]

PRESENT GROUND TRACK

[degrees]

ASSIGNED ALTITUDE

[altitude]

ASSIGNED BLOCK [altitude]

TO [altitude]

Data Sufficient Sufficient Sufficient Sufficient Sufficient Sufficient Insufficient ASSIGNED SPEED [speed]

Insufficient NEXT WAYPOINT [position]

Sufficient NEXT WAYPOINT ETA [time]

Sufficient 70 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Uplink Requests Display WAYPOINT ETA Downlink Reports Display CONFIRM ENSUING WAYPOINT CONFIRM REPORTED WAYPOINT CONFIRM TIME OVER REPORTED WAYPOINT CONFIRM SQUAWK REQUEST POSITION REPORT REPORT REMAINING FUEL AND SOULS ON BOARD WHEN CAN YOU ACCEPT [altitude]

WHEN CAN YOU ACCEPT [speed]

WHEN CAN YOU ACCEPT [distance offset] [direction]

OFFSET 23-20-06.02 December 2011 ENSUING WAYPOINT

[position]

REPORTED WAYPOINT

[position]

REPORTED WAYPOINT

[time]

SQUAWKING [beacon code]

POSITION REPORT [position report]

[remaining fuel] OF FUEL REMAINING AND [remaining souls] SOULS ON BOARD WE CAN ACCEPT [altitude]

AT [time]

WE CAN ACCEPT [altitude]

AT [position]

WE CANNOT ACCEPT

[altitude]

WE CAN ACCEPT [speed] AT

[time]

WE CAN ACCEPT [speed] AT

[position]

WE CANNOT ACCEPT

[speed]

WE CAN ACCEPT [distance offset] [direction] OFFSET AT

[time]

WE CAN ACCEPT [distance offset] [direction] OFFSET AT

[position]

WE CANNOT ACCEPT

[distance offset] [direction]

Data Sufficient Sufficient Sufficient Insufficient Insufficient Insufficient Insufficient Insufficient Insufficient Insufficient Insufficient Insufficient Insufficient Insufficient Insufficient 71 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Downlink Reports Display OFFSET CONFIRM ASSIGNED ROUTE NOT SUPPORTED AT [time] [distance] [to from]

[position]

ATIS [ATIS code]

Data No Data Insufficient Insufficient Uplink Requests Display CONFIRM ASSIGNED ROUTE REPORT DISTANCE

[to from] [position]

CONFIRM ATIS CODE Delayed Requests and Reports Delayed uplink requests and reports, listed in Table 2, do require a ROGER response and cannot be fulfilled immediately. If the crew queues a positive downlink closure response (i.e., ROGER]) to a Data Transaction uplink containing a delayed request, UniLink will add the request to the RPTS LIST with status pending. NOTE: Data statuses include:

Specified = All data is specified by ATC No Data = No data is required for the communication TABLE 2 Delayed Reports and Requests Uplink Reports Display REPORT LEAVING

[altitude]

REPORT PASSING

[position]

REPORT LEVEL

[altitude]

REPORT BACK ON ROUTE REPORT REACHING

[altitude]

REPORT REACHING BLOCK [altitude] TO

[altitude]

72 Downlink Reports Display LEAVING [altitude]

PASSING [position]

LEVEL [altitude]

BACK ON ROUTE REACHING [altitude]

REACHING BLOCK [altitude]

TO [altitude]

Data Specified Specified Specified No Data Specified Specified 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Delayed Report and Request downlinks are auto-generated. If UniLink designates a delayed uplink request as READY, a FANS visual alert is activated in addition to displaying the ATC RPT READY advisory. The crew may access the ATC RPTS LIST and send any report at any time regardless of UniLink PENDING/READY designation. The PENDING/READY designation and ATC RPT READY advisory are intended to aid in the timely response of reports, but it is ultimately the responsibility of the crew to ensure reports are transmitted at the appropriate time. NOTE: The BACK ON ROUTE downlink can only be sent in response to a REPORT BACK ON ROUTE uplink. The crew must use voice communication to report BACK ON ROUTE in the absence of an uplink. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 73 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual POS REPORT Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > ATC > POS REPORT The POS (Position) REPORT function allows the user to make a position report to ATC. A report is made via ATC POS RPT pages. To make a position report:

1. Press POS REPORT, LSK [3R] on the ATC page. ATC POS RPT 1/2 will display. NOTE: ATC POS RPT can also be accessed from the RPTS 1/X page if a position report request has been received. 2. Review the auto-filled information in the fields on pages 1/2 and 3. 2/2. If any information is missing or incorrect, press the adjacent LSK and enter the correct information. NOTE: ALTITUDE is required. All other information is optional. 74 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 4. Press REVIEW, LSK [4L]. The ATC REVIEW page with information for the position report will display. 5. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to put the position report in queue for transmission. ATC MSG LOG Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > ATC >ATC MSG LOG The ATC Message Log (ATC MSG LOG) function provides a log of up to 150 of the most recent viewable messages exchanged with ATC

(75 most recently received and 75 most recently queued), with the newest message shown first. The message entries are displayed on the ATC MSGS 1/X page, accessed from the ATC page by pressing ATC MSG LOG (LSK [4R]). The ATC MSG LOG page allows users to review and/or print a message (if a printer is configured). NOTE: The number of pages of the ATC MSGS screen is dependent on the number of viewable messages that UniLink has logged. ATC MSGS displays up to four messages per page (except for the first page which lists a maximum of three). ATC MSGS may be composed of up to 38 pages. UniLink assigns a status to each uplink message as follows:

Status NEW OLD Description UniLink has not yet displayed the uplink message to the user. UniLink has displayed the uplink message to the user and the message does not require a downlink closure response message from the user. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 75 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual OPEN UniLink has displayed the uplink message to the user but the message requires a downlink closure response message from the user. UniLink sent a WILCO downlink closure response message initiated by the user at the indicated time. UniLink sent an UNABLE downlink closure response message initiated by the user at the indicated time. UniLink sent an AFFIRM downlink closure response message initiated by the user at the indicated time. UniLink sent a Negative downlink closure response message initiated by the user at the indicated time. UniLink sent a ROGER downlink closure response message initiated by the user at the indicated time. WILCO hhmmZ UNABLE hhmmZ AFFIRM hhmmZ NEGATV hhmmZ ROGER hhmmZ STANDBY UniLink sent a STANDBY downlink response message initiated by the user. UniLink aborted the uplink message at the indicated time because it closed the CPDLC connection. ABORTD hhmmZ UniLink assigns a status to each downlink message as follows:

Status QUEUED SENDING

[medium]

SENT hhmmZ OPEN UNABLE hhmmZ STANDBY Description UniLink placed the downlink message in its downlink queue but has not yet successfully transmitted it. UniLink is transmitting the downlink message via the indicated medium. (The possible media are VHF and SAT [SATCOM], depending on UniLink configuration). UniLink successfully transmitted a downlink message at the indicated time that does not require an uplink closure response message from ATC. UniLink successfully transmitted a downlink that requires an uplink closure response message from ATC. UniLink message from ATC at the indicated time. UniLink received a STANDBY uplink response message from ATC. received an UNABLE uplink closure response DEFERRED UniLink received a REQUEST DEFERRED uplink response message from ATC. UniLink received a ROGER uplink closure response message from ATC at the indicated time. UniLink received an AFFIRM uplink closure response message ROGER hhmmZ AFFIRM 76 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Status hhmmZ NEGATV hhmmZ CLOSED hhmmZ Description from ATC at the indicated time. UniLink received a NEGATIVE uplink closure response message from ATC at the indicated time. UniLink received an uplink closure response message other than ROGER, AFFIRM, NEGATIVE, or UNABLE from ATC at the indicated time. UniLink aborted the downlink message at the indicated time because it closed the CPDLC connection. ABORTD hhmmZ To review a message:

1. On the ATC MSGS page, locate the message of interest. 2. Press the left LSK adjacent that message. While displaying the detailed message page, pressing [PREV] and [NEXT] can be used to navigate multiple page messages. 3. Press RETURN to return to the ATC MSGS page. To delete all messages in the messages log:

1. On the ATC MSGS 1/X page, press DELETE ALL, LSK [4L]. A CONFIRM/CANCEL pop-up window will display. 2. Press CONFIRM to delete all entries or CANCEL to cancel the DELETE ALL function. To delete or print messages in the messages log:

1. On the ATC MSGS page, press the adjacent right-hand LSK. A PRINT/DELETE/CANCEL pop-up menu will display. 2. Press the desired LSK (to print or delete). 3. Press the CANCEL LSK to cancel the function. NOTE: PRINT will display on the pop-up menu only if a printer is configured. To print a message from the detailed message display:

1. On the ATC MSGS page, locate the message of interest. 2. Press the adjacent left-hand LSK. The ATC MSG screen will display with the selected message showing. 3. Press the PRINT LSK. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 77 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual COMM STATUS Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > COMM STATUS The COMM STATUS page displays the current configured status of available communication media links. MODE The MODE field indicates the manner in which ACARS will be used. MODE A = POA (Plain Old ACARS) MODE B = AOA (AVLC Over ACARS) Based on the aircraft installation and configuration, all three media statuses may or may not display. If not configured, the media title will not display and the position on the page will be empty. The possible statuses include:

VHF Media Status COMM / IDLE COMM / SENDING NOCOMM / NO FREQ NOCOMM / SCANNING Reason Communications have been established with the ground and datalink messages can be transmitted over VHF. No data is currently being transmitted. A message is currently in the process of being transmitted over VHF and UniLink is waiting for acknowledgement from the ground. UniLink has not selected a frequency for tuning due to invalid FMS lat/long or no radio type UniLink is automatically selecting a frequency for tuning in current region with enabled DSP. 78 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual VHF Media Status NOCOMM / CONNECTING NOCOMM / NO DSP NOCOMM / VOICE NOCOMM/VDR INOP NOCOMM/VDR FAULT NOCOMM/VDR UNAVAIL NOCOMM/MONITORING NOCOMM/SUSPEND SatCom Media Status COMM / IDLE COMM / SENDING NOCOMM / SDU UNAVAIL NOTE: SDU is the Satellite Data Unit. NOCOMM / SDU INOP NOCOMM / AUTO DELAY NOCOMM / TIMEOUT NOCOMM / CONNECTING is Reason UniLink has sent communication to the ground and is awaiting a reply. All DSPs have been manually selected OFF. The VDR in VOICE mode. NOTE: Does not apply to UL-801 with internal VDR. VDR inoperative. VDR is reporting a fault. UniLink has not set the VDRs protocol state. UniLink has not detected a viable VDL Mode 2 ground station. VHF communications suspended by the crew. been have Reason SatCom (SAT) communication has been established and datalink messages can be transmitted over SatCom. No data is currently being transmitted. A message is currently in the process of being transmitted. UniLink is waiting for acknowledgement from the ground. The SatComs system SDU is reporting that it is unavailable. to is waiting before UniLink does not detect the SDU. UniLink trying establish a SatCom (SAT) link again. Retries have been exhausted, and Auto Return to Comm configuration setting is disabled. A manual Link Test must be performed, or an uplink received for the medium to return to COMM. A SatCom (SAT) link is in the process of being established. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 79 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual SatCom Media Status NOCOMM/SUSPENDED Reason SatCom (SAT) link has been suspended by the crew. TEL Media Status COMM / MDM TIMEOUT COMM / DIALING COMM / CONNECTING COMM / IDLE COMM / CONNECTED COMM / PLEASE WAIT NOCOMM / SUSPENDED Reason UniLink has dialed the phone but a timeout occurred prior to a connection being established. NOTE: Sequential, excessive timeouts will result in the NOCOMM /

AUTO DELAY message displaying. UniLink has provided the phone with the dial string command and is waiting for the phone to answer. The ground has answered the phone and UniLink is communicating with the DSP The phone is hung up and no attempt is currently being made to use it and SatCom (TEL) is not suspended or waiting to retry. The phone line is connected and messages can or are currently being transferred. TEL SUSPEND has been manually activated. UniLink is in the process of shutting down the connection. SatCom (TEL) has been suspended, either by the crew or automatically due to excessive failed attempts. NOCOMM / AUTO DELAY UniLink is waiting for the 80 configurable AUTO-DELAY timer to expire before trying again 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual TEL Media Status NOCOMM / CONFIG FAIL While CONNECTING with the Reason NOCOMM / INIT FAIL NOCOMM / DIALING NOCOMM / MDM TIMEOUT ground server, a message is received saying the configuration sent by UniLink is invalid. The SatCom (TEL) system is permanently shut down. Cycling UniLink power is required to exit this state. The SatCom (TEL) system is not available for operation. One or both of the following configuration items are invalid: Aircraft Registration Number, or Phone Access Number. UniLink exited out of the 5-minute delay and is in the process of making another connection attempt. activated while a connection is in progress. UniLink is in the process of shutting down the connection. UniLink exited out of the 5-minute delay and while in the process of making another connection attempt the UniLink modem has timed out. NOCOMM / PLEASE WAIT TEL SUSPEND has been manually 23-20-06.02 December 2011 81 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual COMM CONTROL Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > COMM STATUS > COMM CONTROL The COMM CONTROL page provides access to media control pages and options. Access the COMM CONTROL page by selecting COMM STATUS, LSK [3L] from the UNILINK MENU page. Then select COMM CONTROL, LSK [4L] from the COMM STATUS page to display the COMM CONTROL page. The COMM CONTROL page gives access to VHF VOICE (UL-800 only), VHF DATA, SAT DATA, and TEL DATA options (as configured and installed). UL-800 with External VDR UL-801 with Internal VDR VHF Voice (UL-800 only) Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > COMM STATUS > COMM CONTROL >

VHF VOICE The VHF VOICE option is available if the VHF radio supports voice communications (does not apply to UL-801 with internal VDR). Pressing VHF VOICE, LSK [1L] from the COMM CONTROL page displays the VHF VOICE page. 82 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual UL-800 with External VDR The VHF VOICE page is used to enable/disable VHF voice mode. LSKs [1R] and [2R] allow selection of the MODE as either DATA or VOICE respectively (an asterisk <*> indicates the selected mode). DATA Mode - UniLink data communication; no voice communications. UniLink will tune to the appropriate datalink frequencies only. VOICE Mode - UniLink no longer communicates via VHF to support datalink communications. The external VDR is used for voice and voice frequencies are tuned via VOICE FREQ, LSK [3L]. VHF voice frequency can be tuned from this page if Voice Frequency Control enabled in configuration. Valid frequency range is:

If configured for frequency spacing of 25KHz - 118.000 to 136.950 If configured for frequency spacing of 25KHz/8.33KHz -

118.000 to 136.965 and 136.980 to 136.990 NOTE: The frequency 136.975 is a reserved frequency. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 83 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual VHF Data Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > COMM STATUS > COMM CONTROL >

VHF DATA The VHF DATA page allows the user to enable or disable the individual DSPs and provides access the VHF Frequency

(FREQUENCIES) page. On the COMM CONTROL page press VHF DATA, LSK [2L] to access the VHF DATA page. NOTE: The FREQUENCIES prompt is only displayed while the VHF to link is operating in POA (mode). Pressing the LSK adjacent to each DSP toggles the network status between DISABLED and ENABLED. In the ENABLED status, UniLink will communicate with the service provider as appropriate. The DISABLED status prohibits communications with the provider. If all Service Providers are selected to DISABLED, the VHF status displayed on the COMM STATUS page will reflect NOCOMM/NO DSP. To resolve a VHF NOCOMM problem:

1. On the VHF DATA page, ensure VHF STATE is not set to SUSPEND. 2. Press LINK TEST SEND. This will initiate a link test to reestablish VHF communications. Communications should be reestablished within approximately one minute and the NOCOMM advisory should no longer be displayed. If NOCOMM continues to be displayed, this may indicate an equipment or VHF system network failure not associated with incorrect frequency usage. 84 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual STATE RESUME: When selected, <*> will display. This allows the VHF system to resume operation. SUSPEND: When selected, <*> will display. This suspends the system. While suspended, no VHF transmissions will be permitted by UniLink and no VHF uplink messages will be processed. DSPs DSPs are configured into UniLink at installation. These selections are the default selections displayed on the VHF DATA page but may be overridden by the crew. Care should be taken when overriding these selections to ENABLED as network access fees may be charged to your account by the service provider. DSPs include:

ARINC SITA Worldwide except Japan Worldwide except Japan AVICOM Japan ALL COMM The ALL COMM function allows the status of all media DATA (VHF, TEL, SAT) to be set to SUSPEND or RESUME. RESUME: When selected, <*> will display. This allows the communication system (VHF, SAT, TEL) to resume operation. SUSPEND: When selected, <*> will display. This suspends the configured communication system (VHF, SAT, TEL). Each individual media DATA page has a STATE function that allows the same RESUME or SUSPEND status to be set just for that specific link. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 85 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual FREQUENCIES Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > COMM STATUS > COMM CONTROL >

VHF DATA > FREQUENCIES is accessed by selecting the The FREQUENCIES page FREQUENCIES, LSK the VHF DATA page. The FREQUENCIES page displays the primary frequency table and a field for secondary frequency selection. Normal frequency selection is controlled automatically by UniLink management logic and user intervention is not required.

[3R] on If the UniLink Geographic Database indicates that a DSP has coverage on a particular frequency at the aircrafts current location, the DSPs name will be displayed above the frequency (ARINC, SITA, AVICOM, or MULTIPLE). Otherwise NO CVG (No Coverage) will display. LSKs allow manual selection of a primary frequency. The <*> icon indicates the frequency that is currently tuned. The secondary frequency may be manually entered or uplinked from the ground. Any entry in the range of 118.000 through 136.975 will be accepted. Only one frequency, primary or secondary, can be selected at a time. TEL DATA Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > COMM STATUS > COMM CONTROL >

TEL DATA The TEL DATA page is available if an air phone is configured. The TEL DATA page displays the DSP configured telephone number and also allows manual override with a different number. 86 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual To override the configured telephone number, press NUMBER, LSK

[3L]. This highlights the NUMBER field and allows the displayed number to be edited or a new number to be entered. An entry of up to 19 digits is acceptable. The new entry will remain active until the system is restarted, or the number may be restored to the configured value by pressing the [BACK], then [ENTER] keys. From the CDU/MCDU keyboard enter P for pause, L for #, or A for *. Contact your DSP for the appropriate telephone number. When the SUSPEND option is selected, telephone communication is suspended and no datalink messages can be sent via telephony. When RESUME is selected, the telephone can be used for sending messages. The SUSPEND option is automatically selected if there have been excessive unsuccessful attempts at sending messages via telephony to the ground. Any manual selection will override any automatically set condition. A <*> indicates the current state. STATE RESUME: When selected, <*> will display. This allows the TEL system to resume operation. SUSPEND: When selected, <*> will display. This suspends the system. While suspended, no TEL transmissions will be permitted by UniLink and no TEL uplink messages will be processed. Telephone Link Test This feature provides the operator the ability to test the telephone link by sending a downlink over the telephone system and then displays the link test status. Run the test by selecting LINK TEST SEND, LSK

[4R]. The state of the telephone link test will display on the line above. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 87 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Once the test is complete, the telephone status is displayed on the COMM STATUS page. The displayed status is described in the COMM Status section of this manual. SAT DATA Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > COMM STATUS > COMM CONTROL >

SAT DATA The SAT DATA page allows the user to send a SatCom link test. SatCom Datalink Test This feature provides the operator the ability to test the SatCom link by sending a downlink over the SatCom system and then display the link test status. Run the test by selecting LINK TEST SEND, LSK [4R]. While the test is running, the state of the SatCom link test is displayed on the line above. Once the test is complete, the SatCom status is displayed on the COMM STATUS page. The displayed status is described in the COMM Status section of this manual. STATE RESUME: When selected, <*> will display. This allows the SAT system to resume operation. SUSPEND: When selected, <*> will display. This suspends the SAT system. While suspended, no SAT transmissions will be permitted by UniLink and no VHF uplink messages will be processed. 88 23-20-06.02 December 2011

 

 

UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual MAINTENANCE Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > MAINTENANCE Maintenance pages are used to access UniLink maintenance related functions. No operation-related functions are performed on this page or subpages. Operational tests can be conducted via the TESTS option. From the UniLink Menu, press MAINTENANCE, LSK [4L]. The MAINTENANCE 1/3 page will display. NOTE: See the associated UniLink Installation Manual for installation and maintenance procedures. Tests Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > MAINTENANCE > TESTS There are several tests available to exercise the functionality of UniLink. They include PRINTER Test, IMAGE Test, UniLink SELF-

TEST, PTT (UL-801 only), FANS ALERTS, and UPLINK Test. Press TESTS, LSK [2R] on the MAINTENANCE page to display the TESTS page. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 89 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Printer Test Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > MAINTENANCE > TESTS > PRINTER If a printer is connected and configured, selection of PRINTER, LSK

[1L] will send test message text to the printer. If there is no printer configured, the PRINTER option will not be displayed. When PRINTER is selected, a pop-up window PRINTER TEST IN PROGRESS is displayed. When complete, the pop-up window will no longer display. The following will be printed:

THIS IS NOT AN UPLINK. THIS IS AN INTERNALLY GENERATED PRINTER TEST MESSAGE. !"#$%&'()*+,-

./0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_`

{|}~;

Image Test Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > MAINTENANCE > TESTS > IMAGE Selection of IMAGE, LSK [2L] is used to display a test image. While the test image is being displayed, any key push will cause the display to return to the MAINTENANCE page. Image Test is not available when the aircraft is in the air. When IMAGE is selected, a pop-up window IMAGE TEST IN PROGRESS will display. Upon test completion, an ADVISORY will display on the CDU and NEW WX MAP is displayed adjacent LSK

[5L] (LSK for MCDU may be different). 90 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Press NEW WX MAP, LSK [5L] to display the generated test weather image. A test weather map is displayed with the title IMAGE BUS TEST. NOTE: This image will display on an EFI-890R or MFD if installed and configured. To exit the image, press RTN, LSK [5R]. The display returns to the TESTS page (NEW WX MAP and ADVISORY are no longer displayed). UniLink Self-Test Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > MAINTENANCE > TESTS > SELF-TEST Selection of SELF-TEST, LSK [3L] places the system in a power up test mode. When the test is selected a pop-up window requesting to CONFIRM or CANCEL the test is displayed. Selecting CANCEL closes the pop-

up window and returns to the current display. Selecting CONFIRM reboots UniLink. The message UNILINK/FMS COMM ERROR RESELECT UNILINK is displayed. During the period of reboot, the UNILINK option displayed on the CDU/MCDU (LSK [5L]) is not 23-20-06.02 December 2011 91 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual selectable (smaller font, no arrow). When the test is complete, UNILINK will be selectable. Selecting UNILINK will display the UNILINK MENU page. PTT (Push-To-Talk) (UL-801 only) Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > MAINTENANCE > TESTS > PTT If available, this test commands the radio to transmit for 3 seconds. A pop-up window PTT TEST IN PROGRESS will display for 3 seconds. FANS ALERTS Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > MAINTENANCE > TESTS > FANS ALERTS A FANS-equipped aircraft is required to have audio and visual alerts. Based on installation, one or two ATC annunciators (or visual annunciations) will be visible to the crew. Check with the installer for details. 1. Press FANS ALERTS, LSK [1R]. A pop-up window FANS DISCRETE TEST IN PROGRESS will display, then close. NOTE: The ATC annunciator(s) will illuminate for approximately 3 seconds during the test. Aural alerts are installation-

dependent. MSG will annunciate in the upper right-hand of the screen. 2. Press the [MSG] key to view test results (UNILINK ATC ALERT). 92 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Uplink Test Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > MAINTENANCE > TESTS > UPLINK Selection of UPLINK, LSK [4R] causes a test uplink to be placed in the OPS message log, generating a NEW MSG advisory at the bottom of the display. 1. Press NEW MSG, LSK [5L] to display message. 2. If desired, press PRINT, LSK [4R] to print the screen (printer must be configured). 3. Press DELETE, LSK [4L] to delete the test message. The display returns to the TESTS page. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 93 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual OPS Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS On the UNILINK MENU page, press OPS, LSK [1R], to access the OPS 1/2 page. This page provides access to the FREE TEXT, OOOI, TEXT WX, WX MAPS, WX MAP LOG, and MSG LOGS options Pressing the [NEXT] key displays the OPS 2/2 page. This page provides access to the DELAY, DIVERSION, ETA UPDATE, SELCAL

(when made available), SITUATION, and POS REPORT options. 94 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual FREE-TEXT Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS(1/2) > FREE-TEXT The FREE-TEXT option is available at LSK [2L] on the OPS 1/2 page. The FREE TEXT page allows the user to create and edit text messages. Create and Send a Message NOTE: Messages sent using this procedure will go to a service provider website. 1. Press FREE-TEXT, LSK [2L] on the OPS 1/2 page. 2. With the TO: field active, enter the destination identifier/recipient and press [ENTER]. 3. Enter the destination/recipient telephone number (if known) in the NO: field and press [ENTER]. Pressing [ENTER] moves the cursor to the first text line of the TEXT EDIT page. NOTE: Pressing LSK [2L] will also bring up the TEXT EDIT page. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 95 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 4. Create a message using the alphanumeric text option keys. The [ ] key is used to insert a space. The text automatically word wraps to the next line. The number of pages in the message will increase as necessary to accommodate entered text. The left LSKs are used to insert special characters as indicated on the display. Selecting the same special character key multiple times will cause the selected character to cycle between the three displayed choices. The right LSKs are used to move the cursor (+) position within the text that has been entered. Any text entered at the cursor position in front of other text will be inserted and word wrapping will automatically occur as necessary. To start a new line of text, press [ENTER] and the cursor (+) will start a new line of text. 5. When finished editing the text portion of the message, press RETURN, LSK [5R]. The entered text is displayed on the FREE TEXT page for review with additional pages added as necessary. 6. Press SEND to place the message in queue for transmission. Send a Message to another Aircraft 1. On the Free Text page, enter the destination aircraft registry (tail number) in the TO field and press [ENTER]. 2. Enter the letter A in the first position of the NO field followed by the registry of the destination aircraft and press [ENTER]. 3. Enter the message text in the free text area. When finished editing the text portion of the message, press RETURN, LSK [5R]. The entered text is displayed on the FREE TEXT page for review with additional pages added as necessary. 4. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the message in queue for transmission. 96 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Send an E-Mail NOTE: Arrangement with DSP must be made for e-mail capability to be available. Specific detailed instructions for email operation may differ from the following procedure, depending on the service provider. 1. With the TO line active, press [ENTER] to make the NO field active. 2. Enter E in the first position of the NO field and press [ENTER]. 3. In the free text area, enter the destination e-mail address. Use DA for a dash (-), DOT for dot (.) and AT for at symbol (@). Delimit the address with ST (Example: SCOTT AT AOL DOT COM ST). Use spaces as indicated in the example and press [ENTER]. NOTE: The message will not send if symbols are used in place of text

(i.e., DA, DOT, AT). NOTE: Spaces are placed in text using the plus/minus ( [ + ] ) key. 4. Enter the message text beginning on the next line after ST. NOTE: If previously entered text is still in the Free-Text area, press CLEAR, LSK [4L] before entering new text. 5. When finished editing the text portion of the message, press RETURN, LSK [5R]. The entered text is displayed on the FREE TEXT page for review with additional pages added as necessary. 6. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the message in queue for transmission. A confirmation message will display if the e-mail is sent successfully. Send a Fax 1. On the FREE TEXT page, enter the fax recipient in the TO field 2. and press [ENTER]. In the NO field, enter the letter F followed by the destination fax number with no spaces. Include: country code, area code, fax number (Example: F17139434610) and press [ENTER]. 3. Enter the message text in the free text area. When finished editing the text portion of the message, press RETURN, LSK [5R]. The entered text is displayed on the FREE TEXT page for review with additional pages added as necessary. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 97 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 4. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the message in queue for transmission. Send a Page to a Skytel Pager (Skytel Customers Only) 1. Enter P followed by the Skytel Pager PIN number, (no spaces) in the NO field and press [ENTER]. 2. Enter the message text in the free text area. When finished editing the text portion of the message, press RETURN, LSK [5R]. The entered text is displayed on the FREE TEXT page for review with additional pages added as necessary. 3. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the message in queue for transmission. 98 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual OOOI Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS(1/2) > OOOI OOOI pages record data about the current flight and flight history. The OOOI option is available (if configured) at LSK [3L] on the OPS 1/2 page. OOOI Operation OOOI (Out, Off, On, In) reports allow a dispatch or schedule office to track a flight as well as provide accurate flight times and block times. Based on installation, UniLink may use inputs from one or more doors, the parking brake, and weight-on-wheels (WOW) status input. OOOI reports may also use digital inputs from devices such as the FMS or configured Input/Output Processors (IOP). UniLink monitors the state of each discrete and the WOW condition at power-up, but does not issue any reports unless a change in state is detected. The OUT requirement is met when all doors are closed and then the parking brake is released. The ideal sequence is:

1) UniLink powered up with brake set and doors open 2) Doors closed 3) Brake released 4) OUT report generated Once the OUT report has been generated, if the door is opened prior to takeoff, an OUT/RETURN IN report will be generated. A change in the WOW status from on-ground to in-air will result in an OFF report. If UniLink is powered up or reset in flight, it will monitor the WOW state, determine that the aircraft is airborne and ignore all changes in status of doors and brakes. A change to the WOW status from in-air to on-ground will result in the ON report. For an IN report to be generated, UniLink must:

detect an OUT transition detect an OFF transition detect an ON transition and then detect that the door is opened 23-20-06.02 December 2011 99 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual The IN time that is recorded for the IN event is the last time the brake was set prior to the door opening, or the time that the door opens if the brake was not set. The time for all other OOOI events is the time that the UniLink detected the last state change required for the transition to occur. Ground Delay (Optional) Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > MAINTENANCE > SENSOR STATUS To determine OOOI status, navigate to the SENSORS 1/2 page. A GROUND DELAY ADVISORY occurs when the configured time on the Ground Delay Timer expires after doors closed /brakes released

(OUT event) but before Weight-Off-Wheels/Takeoff (OFF event). The GROUND DELAY ADVISORY annunciation will display at LSK

[5L]. Pressing LSK [5L] will display the DELAY page. The crew can send a ground delay report by following the procedure listed in the DELAY section of this manual. 100 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual OOOI Current Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS(1/2) > OOOI NOTE: The FUEL fields display the Fuel Onboard quantity from the FMS when an event is triggered. The FMS will auto-populate time and fuel information at each event. The crew must ensure that the FMS fuel information is initialized. Depending on the installation and configuration, each field may or may not show the recorded times; a message is sent automatically when any of these four events take place. OUT - Door Closed and Parking Brake Released. Includes OUT time, Fuel Onboard, Departure Airport, and Destination Airport, OFF - Weight Off Wheels. Includes OFF time, Departure Airport, and Destination Airport. ON - WOW. Includes ON time, Departure Airport, and Destination Airport. IN - Parking Brake Set and Door Open. Includes IN time, Fuel On Board, Departure Airport, and Destination Airport. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 101 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual OOOI History Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS(1/2) > OOOI > [NEXT]

The most recently stored events are displayed on OOOI HIST 2/9 page. The next most recent are displayed on OOOI HIST 3/9. A maximum of eight OOOI HIST pages are available. OOOI HIST is accessed from the OOOI CURR page by pressing the [NEXT] key. OOOI data is retained during a power cycle. 102 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Text Weather Report Requests Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS (1/2) > TEXT WX The TEXT WX REQUEST page allows the user to request four types of text weather reports from up to six locations. TERMINAL weather received from this request will apply to stations entered on this page, and will include both actual and forecast conditions for each station.

(Winds Aloft), SIGMETS WINDS

(Significant Meteorological Information), and PIREPS (Pilot Weather Reports) will apply to the flight plan route from the FMS. If a manual data entry is made in STATIONS fields (LSKs [1L & 2L]), the Winds Aloft will apply to waypoints along the great circle route from the aircrafts present position to the airport identifier. Stored text weather messages are accessed via the MESSAGE LOGS page). the OPS MSG LOG page (accessed from To request Text Weather:

1. Press TEXT WX, LSK [1R] on OPS 1/2 page. 2. On the TEXT WX REQUEST page, enter up to six reporting stations (STATIONS) using LSKs [1L] and [2L] and the [ENTER]

key. The first station will default to the FMS destination airport identifier. NOTE: When exiting this page, all stations entered are cleared. 3. Press TYPES, LSK [1R] to choose the type of reports to receive. The WX TYPE SELECT page will display. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 103 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 4. Multiple report types may be selected. Press the LSK adjacent the report types to request. NOTE: Terminal is selected by default (indicated by <*>). 5. Press RETURN to go back to the TEXT WX REQUEST page. An asterisk will display next to the selected report types. 6. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the request in queue for transmission. NOTE: DATA REQUIRED displays if no reporting stations have been entered. 104 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Weather Map Requests Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS (1/2) > WX MAPS or TEXT WX>WX MAPS The OPS 1/2 page allows the user to request and view graphical weather maps. Maps are available only over an airborne telephony link and the WX MAP REQUEST page is only available when the WX MAPS configuration selection is enabled. Graphic weather maps are available on Flat Panel Control Display Units (FPCDU) having graphics capability. NOTE: The WX MAP REQUEST page is accessed by pressing WX MAPS, LSK [2R] on the OPS 1/2 page, or TEXT WX on the OPS 1/2 page, then WX MAPS. US Composite Radar Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS (1/2) > WX MAP > COMP RADAR The US COMP RADAR page allows the user to request Composite Radar Weather maps at specified weather stations and ICAO airports. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 105 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual To request a Composite Radar graphic:

1. Press COMP RADAR, LSK [1L] on the WX MAP REQUEST page. The US COMP RADAR page will display. 2. Enter an airport identifier in the STATION field and press

[ENTER], or accept the default destination airport identifier from the FMS. NOTE: If an incomplete identifier is entered, the message TOO FEW CHARACTERS will display and the field will flash. Pressing the LSK and re-entering a complete identifier will correct the error. 3. Select a Map Range using the range LSK options. A <*> indicator will display adjacent to the selected range. NOTE: The selected range is retained through system power cycles. 4. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the request in queue for transmission. NOTE: The SEND LSK will not be active and DATA REQUIRED displays if no airport identifier has been entered. US Radar Tops and Movement Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS(1/2) > WX MAP > TOPS/MVMT The US TOPS/ MVMT page is used to request US Radar Tops and Movement graphics from a specific geographical area. 106 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual To request a Tops and Movement graphic:

1. Press TOPS/ MVMT, LSK [2L] on the WX MAP REQUEST page. The US TOPS/MOVEMENT page will display. 2. Press REGION, LSK [2L] to display the REGION-US TOPS/MVMT page. 3. Select a region LSK option for display and return to the US TOPS/MVMT page. The last selection will remain through system power cycles. 4. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the request in queue for transmission. IR Satellite Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS (1/2) > WX MAP > IR SAT The IR SATELLITE page allows the user to request worldwide IR Satellite Weather maps. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 107 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual To request an IR Satellite Map graphic:

1. Press IR SAT, LSK [3R] on the WX MAP REQUEST page. The IR SATELLITE page will display. 2. Press REGION, LSK [2L] to display the REGION-IR SATELLITE 1/2 page. If needed, press NEXT to display the REGION-IR SATELLITE 2/2 page. 3. Select a region for display and return to the IR SATELLITE page. The last selection will remain through system power cycles. 4. Press the SEND LSK to place the request in queue for transmission. Icing/Turbulence Potential Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS (1/2) > WX MAP > ICING/TURB The ICING/TURB page is used to request worldwide icing potential or turbulence potential maps. 108 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual To request an Icing Potential or Turbulence Potential Map:

1. Press ICING/TURB, LSK [4L] on the WX MAP REQUEST page. The ICING/TURB page will display. 2. Press REGION, LSK [2L] to display the REGION-ICING TURB page. 3. Select a region for display and return to the ICING/TURB page. The last selection will remain through system power cycles. 4. Press ALTITUDE to access the ALTITUDE-ICING/TURB page. 5. Select an altitude option by pressing the adjacent LSK and return to the ICING/TURB page. The last selection will remain through system power cycles. 6. Press ICING SEND or TURB SEND to place the request in queue for transmission. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 109 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual IFR/MVFR Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS (1/2) > WX MAP > IFR/MVFR The IFR/MVFR page is used to request worldwide IFR/MVFR maps. To request an IFR/MVFR Map:

1. Press IFR/MVFR, LSK [1R] on the WX MAP REQUEST page. The IFR/MVFR page will display. 2. Press REGION, LSK [2L] to display REGION-IFR/MVFR page. 3. As needed, press the [NEXT] key to display the REGION 2/3 and 3/3 pages. Select a region and return to the IFR/MVFR page. NOTE: The last selection will be retained through system power cycles. 4. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the request in queue for transmission. 110 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Significant Weather Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS (1/2) > WX MAP > SIG WX The SIGNIFICANT WX page allows the user to request High Level Significant Weather Maps. To request a Significant Weather Map:

1. Press SIG WX, LSK [2R] on the WX MAP REQUEST page. The SIGNIFICANT WX page will display. 2. Press REGION, LSK [2L] to display the REGION-SIGNIFICANT WX 1/2 page. 3. As needed, press NEXT to display the REGION-SIGNIFICANT WX 2/2 page. Select a region the SIGNIFICANT WX page. The last selection will remain through system power cycles. for display and return to 4. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the request in queue for transmission. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 111 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Winds Aloft Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS (1/2) > WX MAP > WINDS ALOFT The WINDS ALOFT page allows the user to request the most current worldwide Winds Aloft maps by region. To request The Winds and Temperature Aloft graphic:

1. Press WINDS ALOFT, LSK [3R] on the WX MAP REQUEST page. The WINDS ALOFT page will display. 2. Press REGION, LSK [2L]. The REGION-WINDS ALOFT 1/3 page will display. 3. As needed, press the [NEXT] key to display the REGION-WINDS ALOFT pages 2/3 and 3/3. Select a region for display by pressing the adjacent LSK and return to the WINDS ALOFT page. The last selection will remain through system power cycles. 4. Press ALTITUDE, LSK [3L] to access the ALTITUDE-WINDS ALOFT 1/2 page. 112 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 5. As needed, press the [NEXT] key to display the ALTITUDE-WINDS ALOFT 2/2 page. Select an altitude by pressing the adjacent LSK and return to the WINDS ALOFT page. The last selection will remain through system power cycles. 6. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the message in queue for transmission. Weather Map Log Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS (1/2) > WX MAP > WX MAP LOG The WX MAP LOG pages allow the user to select previously uplinked weather graphics for viewing on a CDU (but not on a MCDU), MFD, EFI-890R, or for deletion. Weather map titles are listed in the order they are received with the last map received appearing first. UniLink stores up to 32 maps. NOTE: The WX MAP LOG 1/X page can be accessed from the OPS 1/2 page, the MESSAGE LOGS page, the TEXT WX REQUEST page, or the WX MAP REQUEST page. To display a weather map:

23-20-06.02 December 2011 113 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 1. Press WX MAP LOG, LSK [4R] on the WX MAP REQUEST page. 2. Press the left-hand LSK adjacent the desired weather map. NOTE: Pressing any key while the map is displayed will return the display to the MAP LOG page. To display a new weather map after receiving a NEW WX MAP RCVD message:

1. On the DATA 1/X page or MESSAGE 1/X page, press the UNILINK LSK to access the UNILINK MENU page. 2. Press NEW WX MAP advisory prompt to view the weather map. To delete an uplinked weather map:

1. Select the map to delete by pressing the adjacent LSK. This places the cursor over the map and displays the delete option window. 2. Press the DELETE LSK to delete the map. 4. To delete all uplinked weather maps, select the DELETE ALL option. DELETE ALL only appears on the WX MAP LOG 1/X page. 114 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual MESSAGE LOGS Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS (1/2) > MSG LOGS The MESSAGE LOGS page allows the user to view, print, or delete messages. Verified Messages The VERIF MSGS 1/X page displays all ATS and other verified messages (with the exception of FANS messages, which are maintained in the ATC MSG LOG). Press VERIF MSG LOG, LSK [1R] to access the VERIF MSGS page. Operations Messages The OPS MSGS 1/X page displays all unverified messages (messages containing unverified data). This data is advisory only and should not be used for safety of flight operations. Press OPS MSG LOG, LSK [2R] to access the OPS MSGS page. WX Map Uplinks The WX MAP LOG 1/X page displays all weather graphic uplinks. Press WX MAP LOG, LSK [3R] to access the WX MAP LOG pages. Message titles will appear on these pages in the inverse order they are received. The newest message will appear first. If more than one page of message titles exists, use the [PREV] and [NEXT] keys to cycle through the pages. A new message may be viewed from any UniLink page by pressing the NEW MESSAGE ADVISORY LSK. Messages may be viewed by selecting the left-hand LSK adjacent the message title. To delete all messages from a message log, press the DELETE ALL LSK. This prompt is only displayed on page 1 of the message log pages. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 115 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Verified Messages Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS > MSG LOGS > VERIF MSG LOG The VERIF MSGS page displays all ATS, Clearance, and other verified messages (with the exception of FANS messages). Press VERIF MSG LOG, LSK [1R] to access the VERIF MSGS page. The total number of pages increases as messages are sent and received. If more than one page of message titles exists, use the [PREV] and

[NEXT] keys to cycle through the pages. LSKs [1L] through [3L] on page 1/X and [1L] through [4L] on succeeding pages display ATS and other verified message titles. Status information is displayed above the message title and includes the time received, transmission medium, uplink () or downlink () indicator, and status. Messages are sorted with the newest at the top of the list. Pressing the left-hand LSK adjacent a message displays the corresponding message if the message contains viewable text. NOTE: The UniLink Verified Message Log (VERIF MSGS) retains the most recent 40 uplinks (excluding AFN and CPDLC uplinks). The crew will need to monitor the log and remove non-

clearance uplinks. NOTE: UniLink does not check format of OCL (Oceanic Clearance) messages. The crew should verify all clearance and re-clearance information. the Pressing a right-hand LSK displays the message pop-up window for the corresponding message and allows the deletion or printing of the message (see the Delete or Print a Message section later in this manual). Any key press other than [1R] or [2R] will exit the pop-up window. 116 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual The DELETE ALL LSK on page 1/X is used to delete all messages from the displayed log. The RETURN LSK returns the display to the MESSAGE LOGS page. Message Status Descriptions NEW OLD The uplink is available in the log and has not been viewed. The uplink has been viewed and does not require an acknowledgement. ACK RQD The uplink has been viewed and the ACARS ATS facility requests that the crew manually acknowledge receipt of the message. ACKED SENT The uplink has been viewed and an acknowledgement has been sent. The downlink has been successfully transmitted at the indicated time. SENDING The downlink is being transmitted via the indicated medium (VHF, SAT, TEL) DEFERRED The downlink message lacks priority for immediate transmission and is deferred pending availability of other downlink messages with which it can be bundled for transmission. EXPIRED The downlink message ceased being valid or useful before

(as determined by the downlink message timer). it could be successfully transmitted 23-20-06.02 December 2011 117 Operations Messages UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS > MSG LOGS > OPS MSG LOG The OPS MSGS page displays all operations unverified messages including Text Weather and Free Text. This data is advisory only and should not be used for safety of flight operations. Press OPS MSG LOG, LSK [2R] to access the OPS MSGS page. The total number of pages increases as messages are received. If more than one page of message titles exists, use the [PREV] and [NEXT] keys to cycle through the pages. LSKs [1L] through [3L] on page 1/X and [1L] through [4L] on succeeding pages display unverified uplink message titles. Status information is displayed above the message title and includes the time received, transmission medium, uplink () or downlink () indicator, and status. Messages are sorted with the newest at the top of the list. Pressing a left-hand LSK displays the corresponding message if the message contains viewable text. Pressing a right-hand LSK displays the message pop-up window for the corresponding message and allows the deletion or printing of the message (see the Delete or Print a Message section later in this manual). Any key press other than [1R] or [2R] will exit the pop-up window. The DELETE ALL LSK on page 1/X is used to delete all messages from the log. The RETURN LSK returns the display to the MESSAGE LOGS page. 118 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Message Status Descriptions NEW OLD The uplink is available in the log and has not been viewed. The uplink has been viewed and does not require an acknowledgement.. ACK RQD The uplink has been viewed and the customer AOC facility requests that the crew manually acknowledge receipt of the message. ACKED SENT The uplink has been viewed and an acknowledgement has been sent. The downlink has been successfully transmitted at the indicated time. SENDING The downlink is being transmitted via the indicated medium (VHF, SAT, TEL) DEFERRED The downlink message lacks priority for immediate transmission and is deferred pending availability of other downlink messages with which it can be bundled for transmission. EXPIRED The downlink message ceased being valid or useful before

(as determined by the downlink message timer). it could be successfully transmitted Weather Map Log

(See the section titled Weather Map Logs, or the WX MAP REQUEST page). 23-20-06.02 December 2011 119 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual View Message - Detailed Message Screen A detailed message screen will display when a message is viewed by selecting a corresponding message LSK or via the NEW MESSAGE ADVISORY. 1. On the message log page (VERIF MSGS, OPS MSGS, or WX MAP LOG), press the left-hand LSK adjacent a message title to view a message. A detailed message screen or weather graphic will display. 2. Press the [PREV] and [NEXT] keys to cycle through the pages. NOTE: OPS messages are advisory only and should not be used for safety of flight operations. 120 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Delete or Print a Message NOTE: This procedure is available on the VERIF MSGS, OPS MSGS, and WX MAP LOG pages. 1. Access the desired message log page. 2. Press the right-hand LSK of a message. This activates the message pop-up window. 3. Press the PRINT LSK to print the message (a printer must be installed and configured). 4. Press the DELETE LSK to delete the message. 5. Press the CANCEL LSK to exit the pop-up menu. NOTE: Any LSK or CDU keyboard selection other than LSKs [1R] or

[2R] removes the pop-up window. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 121 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual DELAY Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS (2/2) > DELAY The DELAY page is used to report estimated ground delays prior to take off. To send a Ground Delay report:

1. Press DELAY, LSK [1L] from OPS page 2/2 or from any page when selecting the GROUND DELAY advisory. 2. With EST DELAY (estimated delay) active, enter the estimated time in minutes. 3. Press REASON, LSK [1R] to access the DELAY REASON page. 4. Press the LSK adjacent the appropriate reason option. The display will return to the DELAY page. NONE is the default if no entry is made on this page. 5. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the message in queue for transmission. 122 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual DIVERSION Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS (2/2) > DIVERSION The DIVERSION page is used to send a revised destination message. To send a diversion message:

1. Press DIVERSION, LSK [2L] from OPS page 2/2. The DIVERSION page will display. 2. With NEW DEST active, enter a destination and press [ENTER], or verify new destination data from the FMS. 3. If not active, press ETA, LSK [3L], enter an ETA, and press

[ENTER], or verify ETA data from the FMS. 4. Press REASON, LSK [1R] to access the DIVERT REASON page. 5. Press the LSK adjacent the appropriate Divert Reason option and return to the DIVERSION page. NONE will be selected by default if no entry is made on this page. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 123 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 6. Press the SEND LSK to place the report or message in queue for transmission. NOTE: During a given flight leg, the first press sends a Diversion Report downlink and each subsequent press sends a Revised Diversion Report downlink. 124 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual ETA UPDATE Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS (2/2) > ETA UPDATE The ETA UPDATE page is used to send an ETA update message. To send an ETA Update message:

1. Press ETA UPDATE, LSK [3L] from OPS page 2/2. The ETA UPDATE page will display. 2. With ETA active, enter an ETA and press [ENTER], or verify ETA data from the FMS. 3. If not active, press DEST, LSK [3L], enter a destination airport identifier and press [ENTER]; or verify the default identifier from the FMS. NOTE: This field will display dashes if the destination airport is not available. THE FMS ETE field is provided for reference only and displays the current computed FMS estimated time enroute. 4. Press REASON, LSK [1R] to access the ETA REASON page. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 125 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 5. Press the LSK adjacent the appropriate ETA Reason and return to the ETA UPDATE page. 6. Press SEND, LSK [4R] to place the report or message in queue for transmission. NOTE: During a given leg, the first press sends an ETA Update Report downlink and each subsequent press sends a Revised ETA Report downlink. SITUATION Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS (2/2) > SITUATION The SITUATION page permits the sending of emergency report messages for mechanical and medical emergencies. All situation reports include FUEL ONBD and ENDURANCE data from FMS FUEL page 2/5. To make the report:

1. Press SITUATION, LSK [2R] on OPS page 2/2. The SITUATION page will display. 2. With SOULS active, enter the number of persons onboard and press [ENTER]. 3. If not active, press REMARKS, LSK [2L] (optional) and enter information as needed. Up to 24 characters may be entered. 4. Press REASON, LSK [1R] to access the SITUATION REASON page. 126 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 5. Press the LSK adjacent the appropriate reason and return to the SITUATION page. If no selection is made the REASON field will default to NONE. 6. Press the SEND LSK to place the report in queue for transmission. POS REPORT Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > OPS (2/2) > POS REPORT The POS REPORT page is used to modify Position Report data prior to sending, and to enable and disable the Auto Position report (AUTO) function. Data on this page is prefilled FMS/ADC data. Normally this data will be valid for the Position Report; however, temporary manual entries are possible for the current manually initiated transmission only. To make the report:

1. Press POS REPORT, LSK [3R] from OPS page 2/2. The POS REPORT page will display. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 127 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 4. 2. With TO WPT active, enter a waypoint name. Press [ENTER]. 3. The TO WPT ETA information is supplied by the FMS. To change, if not active, press LSK [2L] and enter up to four digits

(Time is UTC time), then press [ENTER]. If not active, press GROUNDSPEED, LSK [3L] and enter up to three digits. Press [ENTER]. If not active, press WINDS, LSK [4L] and enter three digits for wind direction. Press [ENTER] to advance the cursor to the velocity field and enter up to three digits. Press [ENTER]. If not active, press ALTITUDE, LSK [3R] and enter the current altitude if no ADC altitude is available. Press [ENTER]. 5. 6. 7. Press the SEND LSK to place the report in queue for transmission. Automatic Position Reporting 1. Press AUTO, LSK [1R] to toggle the Automatic Report function to ENABLED or DISABLED (default is based on configuration setting). The current status is displayed to the left of AUTO. 2. If AUTO is set to ENABLED, press IN AIR INTV, LSK [2R] to set the report interval time (default is based on configuration setting). Press [ENTER]. NOTE: The IN AIR INTV option is not present if AUTO is set to DISABLED. 128 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual SELCAL Menu Navigation: UNILINK MENU > SELCAL The SELCAL (Selective Call) CONTACT page displays the Ground Voice Request frequency. The SELCAL option on the UNILINK MENU will only display if a voice frequency request is received and the SELCAL advisory has been selected. This prompt is hidden at the beginning of each flight leg. Press RETURN to return to the MAIN MENU or the CDU/MCDU page displayed when the ADVISORY was pressed to access the SELCAL contact message. NOTE If not currently in a UNILINK page when the SELCAL request is received, the MSG annunciation will flash in the upper right-

hand corner of the CDU/MCDU. Navigate to the UNILINK MENU page to access the SELCAL option. 23-20-06.02 December 2011 129 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 130 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual GLOSSARY Acronym/Abbreviation/

Term Description ACARS ACK ADC ADS-C AFN ALT AOA AOC ARINC ATC ATIS ATM ATN ATS ATSU AVLC CDA CDB CDU Circuit Mode Data

-

Aircraft Communication Addressing and Reporting System Acknowledgement Air Data Computer Automatic Dependent Surveillance Contract ATS Facilities Notification Altitude ACARS Over Aviation VHF Link Control

(AVLC) Aeronautical (airline) Operational Control Aeronautical Radio, Inc. (data interface format standard) Air Traffic Control Automatic Terminal Information Service

(see D-ATIS) Air Traffic Management Aeronautical Network Air Traffic Services Air Traffic Service Unit Aviation VHF Link Control Current Data Authority Customer Database Control Display Unit A full duplex bi-directional communication link in which data is transmitted and received simultaneously. A hand shake must be established prior to data being exchanged. Supported by a UniLink RS-

Telecommunications 23-20-06.02 December 2011 131 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Acronym/Abbreviation/

Term Description CLX CM CMU CNS COMM CPDLC CRC CSDB CTS CVFDR CVR D-ATIS DEPT CLX DM DP DTU DTU-100 DSP EFB EFI EFI-890R ETA ETD EUROCAE 132 232 port configured for TEL Clearance Configuration Module Communications Management Unit Communication Navigation Surveillance Communication Controller-Pilot Datalink Communications Cyclic Redundancy Check Commercial Standard Data Bus (data interface format standard) Clear to Send Cockpit Voice and Flight Data Recorder

(UASC) Cockpit Voice Recorder Digital Automatic Terminal System (also referred to as ATIS) Departure Clearance Downlink Message Display Processor Data Transfer Unit (UASC) Data Transfer Unit 100 (UASC) Datalink Service Provider referred to as DLSP) Electronic Flight Bag Electronic Flight Instrument Electronic Flight

(UASC) Estimated Time of Arrival Estimated Time of Departure European Organization for Civil Aviation Equipment Instrument 890R

(sometimes Information 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Acronym/Abbreviation/

Term Description EXP FAA FANS FL FLT NO FMC FMS FPL FREQ GND SPD GNSS GPS HS ICAO ID IFR IOP I/O LAN LRU LS LSK MCDU MCU MDM MFD MSG Expected Federal Aviation Administration Future Air Navigation Systems Flight Level Flight Number Flight Management Computer Flight Management System Flight Plan Frequency Ground Speed Global Global Positioning System High Speed International Civil Aviation Organization Identification, Identifier Instrument Flight Rules Input/Output Processor Input/Output Local Area Network Line-Replaceable Unit Low Speed Line Select Key Multifunctional Control Display Unit

(UASC) Multi-Purpose Control Display Unit

(ARINC) Modular Concept Unit Modem Multifunctional Display Message 23-20-06.02 December 2011 133 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Acronym/Abbreviation/

Term Description MSK MVFR ND NO COMM NO CVG ONBD OOOI Packet Mode Data PIREP PDC POA POS RCDU RCVD RPTS RQD RTE RTS 134 is accumulated Minimum Shift Keying Marginal Visual Flight Rules Navigation Display No Communication No Coverage Onboard Out, Off, On, In (used to detect and report changes to the major flight phases of the aircraft) A half-duplex bi-directional communication link in which data in packets of various lengths and sent out in a burst or bursts so therefore does not support voice communications. Packet switching is the process of routing and transferring data by means of addressed packets so that a channel is occupied during the transmission of the packet only. Upon completion of the data transfer, the channel is made available for the transfer of other traffic. Supported by a UniLink ARINC port configured to provide VHF and SAT capability. Pilot Weather Report Pre-Departure Clearance Plain Old ACARS Position Remote Control Display Unit Received Reports Required Route Request to Send 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Acronym/Abbreviation/

Term Description RX SAT SatCom SCN SDU SELCAL SIGMET SITA SQP SSDTU TEL Receive Abbreviation for Satellite Communications Link. The SAT link provides communication via Iridium Short Burst Data (SBD) and packet mode data Inmarsat equipment that utilizes a specific satellite constellation. When SAT is commanded for use by UniLink, a SAT-

configured ARINC 429 (741 protocol) port is used. SAT provides VHF backup in most cases and does not support weather graphics. Satellite Communications Software Control Number Satellite Data Unit Selective Calling Significant Meteorological Information Society of International Aeronautical Telecommunications (Societe Internationale de Telecommunications Aeronautiques) Signal Quality Parameter Solid State Data Transfer Unit (UASC) Abbreviation for telephony. The telephony communication link provides a circuit mode data connection via a dial-up modem. A hand shake must be established prior to data being exchanged. Only an RS-232 capable SatCom can be used. The circuit mode connection will be used for obtaining color weather graphics and may be used for VHF back up in most cases. However, this link will not support safety services communications, which consists of flight information services, 23-20-06.02 December 2011 135 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Acronym/Abbreviation/

Term Description TWIP TX UASC UL UM UNVERIFIED Message USB UTC VDL VDR VERIFIED Message VHF VOX WOW WPT 136 which is a UniLink service. Terminal Weather Information for Pilots Transmit Universal Avionics Systems Corporation UniLink (UASC) Uplink Message An UNVERIFIED message is one that does not contain safeguards to prevent data corruption during transmission. Such messages are labeled AOC on the page in which they are displayed. (See VERIFIED Message) Universal Serial Bus Universal Time Coordinated VHF Digital Link VHF Data Radio A VERIFIED message is one that has been safeguarded against potential data corruption during transmission and is determined to be error-free using CRC code comparisons and validity indicators.

(See UNVERIFIED Message) Very high frequency terrestrial-based packet mode. This is a data communications link used for obtaining textual weather, D-ATIS, and the transmission of position reporting, OOOI, and safety services communications

(UniLink Flight Information Services). Does not support weather graphics. Voice Weight On Wheels Waypoint 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual Acronym/Abbreviation/

Term WX XOFF XON Description Weather Transmission Off Transmission On 23-20-06.02 December 2011 137 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 138 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual INDEX A ACARS .......................................................................................................... 23 ADS-C ................................................................................................... 1, 3, 39 Advisories ........................................................................................................ 6 AFN ....................................................................................................... 1, 3, 40 Alert Inhibiting ................................................................................................ 12 ARINC .......................................................................... 1, 80, 81, 126, 129, 130 ATC ........................................................................................................... 1, 34 ATC Database ............................................................................................... 39 ATIS ................................................................................................ 24, 26, 126 ATS ............................................................................................................. 1, 3 ATSU ............................................................................................................... 8 B BLOCK Altitudes ........................................................................................... 43 C Call Sign ........................................................................................................ 39 CALL SIGN .................................................................................................... 23 CDU ................................................................................................................ 4 COMM CONTROL ........................................................................................ 77 Configurable Options ..................................................................................... 23 CPDLC ................................................................................................ 3, 40, 57 Current Time ................................................................................................... 5 D DATA REQUIRED ........................................................................................... 5 D-ATIS........................................................................................................... 24 Direct-To ........................................................................................................ 53 DSP ............................................................ 1, 5, 73, 75, 78, 79, 81, 82, 93, 127 E Emergency .................................................................................................... 35 Error Message ............................................................................................... 10 Error Messages ............................................................................................. 10 23-20-06.02 December 2011 139 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual F FANS ........................................................................................................... 1, 3 FMS ................................................................................................................. 1 FPCDU ........................................................................................................ 100 Geographic Database .................................................................................... 81 G I IFR/MVFR.................................................................................................... 105 L Log On ........................................................................................................... 39 LSK .................................................................................................................. 4 MCDU .............................................................................................................. 4 M N NDA ............................................................................................................... 41 Negotiation .................................................................................................... 57 Offset ............................................................................................................. 55 OOOI ............................................................................................................. 95 O P POS ............................................................................................................... 69 Remarks ........................................................................................................ 31 RPTS ............................................................................................................. 64 R SatCom ............................................................................................... 1, 23, 83 S 140 23-20-06.02 December 2011 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual SELCAL........................................................................................................... 6 SEND .............................................................................................................. 5 T Tail Number ................................................................................................... 23 TRCA/DO-258A ............................................................................................... 1 TRCA/DO-A622 ............................................................................................... 1 TWIP ............................................................................................................. 25 Unverified .................................................................................................... 131 U V VDR ............................................................................................................. 131 Verified ........................................................................................................ 131 VHF ................................................................................................................. 1 VHF NOCOMM ............................................................................................... 7 23-20-06.02 December 2011 141 UniLink UL-800/801 FANS SCN 30.X Operators Manual 3260 East Universal Way Tucson, AZ 85756-5097 USA

 

 

EXHIBIT G 1 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES REGARDING UL-801 MANUALS 1.1 Operator's Manual The UL-801 Operator's Manual describes user interaction with the DLM module portion of the product. There is no direct user control over the VDR module. Only the DLM module controls the VDR module in a UL-801. 1.2 Installation Manual Only limited portions of the Installation Manual are applicable to the UL-801's VDR module. These are identified below. Description and Operation Section 1 M VHF Management Equipment Specifications - Section 1 E VHF Antenna Specifications Installation and Wiring - Section 2L UL-801 to UNS-1E : Sheet 2 of 2 Installation and Wiring - Section 2M UL-801 to UNS-1Esp : Sheet 2 of 2 Installation and Wiring - Section 2N UL-801 to UNS-1Lw Installation and Wiring - Section 2O UL-801 to UNS-1Fw: Sheet 1 of 2 UL-801 Connector Pin Identification - Section 3C Bottom Plug Configuration Worksheets - Section 2 VHF Config Configuration Procedures - Section 3J VHF Configuration Maintenance, Checkout,and Troubleshooting -Section 1G VHF Communications

 

 

R UL-801 Installation Manual The information contained herein is subject to the Export Administration Regulation

(EAR), 15 C.F.R. Parts 730-774. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. This publication is available at www.uasc.com. 2011 UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 3260 East Universal Way Tucson, AZ 85756-5097

(520) 295-2300 (800) 321-5253 23-20-06 15 December 2011 UL-801 Installation Manual Record of Revisions Insertion Date Issue Date Rev No. Initials UASC Retain this record in front of the manual. Upon receipt of revision, insert and remove pages according to the List of Effective Pages. Then enter on this page the revision number, issue date, insertion date and your initials. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 1 UL-801 Installation Manual Record of Temporary Changes Change No. Page No. Issue Date Insertion Date &

Initials Removal Date/Initials/Reason Retain this record in the front of this manual. Upon receipt of a Temporary Change, insert pages into manual and enter the Temporary Change number, page number, issue date, insertion date and your initials. Also, record the removal of each temporary change. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 1 UL-801 Installation Manual Record of Temporary Changes (Continued) Change No. Page No. Issue Date Insertion Date &

Initials Removal Date/Initials/Reason Retain this record in the front of this manual. Upon receipt of a Temporary Change, insert pages into manual and enter the Temporary Change number, page number, issue date, insertion date and your initials. Also, record the removal of each temporary change. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 2 UL-801 Installation Manual List of Effective Pages Page 1 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Date 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 Subject Title Page Record of Revisions Record of Temporary Changes List of Effective Pages Table of Contents Introduction Description and Operation Subject FAA Approval Equipment Specifications Installation and Wiring Page 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 Date 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 1 UL-801 Installation Manual Page 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 Subject System Data Installation Date 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 Subject Maintenance, Checkout, and Troubleshooting Page 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 Date 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 2 UL-801 Installation Manual Date 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 15 Dec 2011 Subject Appendix 1 Appendix 2 Appendix 3 Page 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 A1-1 A1-2 A1-3 A1-4 A1-5 A2-1 A2-2 A2-3 A2-4 A2-5 A2-6 A2-7 A2-8 A2-9 A2-10 A2-11 A2-12 A2-13 A3-1 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 3 UL-801 Installation Manual Table of Contents Record of Revisions ............................................................................................................. 1 Record of Temporary Revisions ........................................................................................... 1 List of Effective Pages .......................................................................................................... 1 Table of Contents ................................................................................................................. 1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 1 1. Makeup and Use of This Manual ............................................................................... 1 A. Application ......................................................................................................... 1 B. Organization ...................................................................................................... 1 2. Abbreviations and Terminology ................................................................................. 1 3. Contact Information ................................................................................................... 1 Description and Operation .................................................................................................... 1 1. Description ................................................................................................................. 1 A. General ............................................................................................................... 2 B. Future Air Navigation System (FANS 1/A+) ........................................................ 3 C. Field-Loadable Software and Databases ........................................................... 4 D. Field-Loadable Software Interface ..................................................................... 5 E. UniLink Customer, ATC, and Geographic Databases ........................................ 5 F. UASC FMS Interface ......................................................................................... 7 G. Configuration Module ....................................................................................... 17 H. ARINC 429 Channels ...................................................................................... 17 I. RS-232/422 Serial Ports .................................................................................. 18 J. Discrete Inputs/Outputs ................................................................................... 19 K. Ethernet ........................................................................................................... 22 L. Transmission Media Management ................................................................... 22 M. VHF Management ............................................................................................ 23 N. SatCom-based Airborne Telephony (TEL) ....................................................... 24 O. SatCom-based ARINC 741 (SAT) ................................................................... 26 P. ACARS Message Processing .......................................................................... 27 Q. Advisory Alerts, Device Status, and Error Messages ....................................... 29 R. COCKPIT Voice Recorder (CVR) .................................................................... 29 S. Printers ............................................................................................................ 30 T. Transmission Media Interfaces Configuration Option ................................... 31 U. Text Message Processing ............................................................................... 31 V. Media Advisory Reporting Option .................................................................... 31 W. Automatic Position Reporting Option ............................................................... 31 X. OOOI Reporting/History Option ....................................................................... 31 Y. Flight Leg Transition ........................................................................................ 32 Z. Meteorological Data Reproting Option ............................................................. 32 AA. ARINC 741 using Iridium or Inmarsat .............................................................. 32 2. Operation ................................................................................................................. 32 CONTENTS 15 December 2011 Page 1 UL-801 Installation Manual FAA Approval .................................................................................................................... 101 1. General ................................................................................................................... 101 A. Applicable TSOs .............................................................................................. 101 B. TSO Deviations ................................................................................................ 101 C. Equipment Classes .......................................................................................... 102 D. Reference Documents ..................................................................................... 102 E. Other References ............................................................................................. 103 2. Software Criticality .................................................................................................. 105 3. Instructions for Continued Airworthiness ................................................................ 106 A. Airworthiness Limitations ................................................................................. 107 B. Compliance ...................................................................................................... 107 4. Environmental Qualification Forms ......................................................................... 108 5. Sample Airplane Flight Manual Supplement ........................................................... 112 Equipment Specifications .................................................................................................. 201 1. UniLink Equipment Specifications .......................................................................... 201 A. UniLink Part Number Matrix ............................................................................. 201 B. UniLink Installation Kit ...................................................................................... 202 C. Power Specifications ........................................................................................ 202 D. Equipment Weights .......................................................................................... 202 E. VHF Antenna Specifications ............................................................................ 202 F. Electronic Part Marking .................................................................................... 203 G. Equipment Drawings ........................................................................................ 204 H. Signal Specifications ........................................................................................ 207 I. HS-429-1 Bus UniLink ................................................................................... 211 J. Configurable LRUs ........................................................................................... 212 Installation and Wiring ....................................................................................................... 301 1. Installation Considerations for UniLink Mounting .................................................... 301 A. UniLink Mounting ............................................................................................. 301 2. Wiring Diagrams ..................................................................................................... 301 A. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1C .................................................................... 302 B. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1C+ .................................................................. 304 C. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1E .................................................................... 306 D. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Csp ................................................................ 308 E. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Esp................................................................. 310 F. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1D .................................................................... 312 G. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1D+ .................................................................. 314 H. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1F .................................................................... 316 I. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1K .................................................................... 318 J. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1K+ .................................................................. 320 K. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1L ..................................................................... 322 L. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Ew .................................................................. 323 M. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Espw .............................................................. 325 N. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Lw .................................................................. 327 O. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Fw .................................................................. 329 P. UL-801 FANS Discretes (WAAS FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later) ................ 331 Q. UL-801 to EFI-890R High Resolution ............................................................ 332 Page 2 CONTENTS 15 December 2011 UL-801 Installation Manual R. UL-801 to MFD-640 High Resolution (MFD SCN 1011.4.8 or later) ............. 333 S. UL-801 to Remote CDU (RCDU) - Low Resolution ......................................... 334 T. UL-801 to MFD-640 Low Resolution (MFD SCN 1011.4.7 or earlier) ........... 335 U. UL-801 to CVR/CVFDR ................................................................................... 336 V. UL-801 to DTU-100 ......................................................................................... 337 W. UL-801 to SSDTU ........................................................................................... 337 X. UL-801 to Portable DTU-100 ........................................................................... 338 Y. UL-801 to Portable SSDTU ............................................................................. 338 Z. UL-801 to Airborne-based Telephony SatCom Systems ............................... 339 AA. UL-801 to ARINC740/744/744A Printer ......................................................... 341 BB. UL-801 to PC Printer ..................................................................................... 342 CC. UL-801 to Generic Parallel Printer ................................................................. 342 3. UL-801 Connector Pin Identification ...................................................................... 343 A. Top Plug .......................................................................................................... 343 B. Middle Plug ..................................................................................................... 345 C. Bottom Plug ..................................................................................................... 346 4. UL-801 Connectors ................................................................................................ 347 System Data Installation ................................................................................................... 401 1. International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) Aircraft Type Designators ........... 401 2. Configuration Worksheets ..................................................................................... 405 A. Customer/Aircraft Information.......................................................................... 406 B. System Configuration Menu (Sys Config 1/4) ................................................. 406 C. SYS CONFIG 2/4 ............................................................................................ 424 D. SYS CONFIG 3/4 ............................................................................................ 426 3. Configuration Procedures ...................................................................................... 428 A. Starting the FMS ............................................................................................. 428 B. FANS Block Data Transmission ...................................................................... 431 C. Storing UniLink Options ................................................................................... 432 D. Configuration Edit Mode .................................................................................. 433 E. Aircraft Configuration ....................................................................................... 435 F. Clearances ...................................................................................................... 436 G. Alerts ............................................................................................................... 437 H. System Configuration 3/4 ................................................................................ 438 I. I/O Configuration ............................................................................................. 439 J. VHF Configuration ........................................................................................... 446 K. Satellite (SAT) Configuration ........................................................................... 447 L. Priority Configuration ....................................................................................... 448 M. Telephony (TEL) Configuration ....................................................................... 449 N. Position Report Configuration.......................................................................... 450 O. Configuration Review ...................................................................................... 451 Maintenance, Checkout, and Troubleshooting ................................................................. 501 1. UniLink Ground Checkout Procedures .................................................................. 501 A. Post Installation Test ....................................................................................... 501 B. Return to Service ............................................................................................. 501 C. UniLink to FMS/MCDU Communications ........................................................ 501 D. Version Check ................................................................................................. 502 Page 3 CONTENTS 15 December 2011 UL-801 Installation Manual E. Device Status ................................................................................................... 502 F. UniLink to Display Processor RS-422 Communications................................... 502 G. UL-801 VHF Communications ......................................................................... 503 H. OOOI Sensor Test ........................................................................................... 503 I. Printer Test ...................................................................................................... 504 J. Checking the UL-801 FANS ALERTS Output Discretes .................................. 504 K. Checking the UL-801 Self-Test (Optional) ....................................................... 504 L. Checking the UL-801 Weather Graphics using a SatCom-based Telephony System ........................................................................................... 504 M. Checking the UL-801 ARINC 741 SatCom (SAT) ............................................ 505 2. Error Messages ...................................................................................................... 506 A. Pop-up Window Error Messages ..................................................................... 506 B. General Error Messages .................................................................................. 507 C. Configuration Error Messages ......................................................................... 512 D. Hidden Error/Status Messages ........................................................................ 519 Appendix 1 ...................................................................................................................... A1-1 1. Acronyms, Abbreviations, and Terms ................................................................... A1-1 Appendix 2 ...................................................................................................................... A2-1 1. UniLink Menus and Submenus without FANS ................................................... A2-1 A. UniLink Menu 1/2 ........................................................................................... A2-1 B. UniLink Menu 2/2 ........................................................................................... A2-3 C. Maintenance Menu ........................................................................................ A2-4 D. Configuration Menu ........................................................................................ A2-5 2. UniLink Menus and Submenus with FANS ........................................................ A2-6 A. UniLink Menu 1/2 ........................................................................................... A2-6 B. Maintenance Menu ...................................................................................... A2-10 C. Ops Menu .................................................................................................... A2-12 Appendix 3 ...................................................................................................................... A3-1 1. Datalink Service Providers ................................................................................... A3-1 CONTENTS 15 December 2011 Page 4 UL-801 Installation Manual Introduction 1. Makeup and Use of This Manual A. Application This manual provides installation information pertaining to the UL-801. B. Organization This manual provides information about:

Description of the components of the UL-801 Environmental qualification forms UniLink equipment specifications Installation and wiring requirements Worksheets and procedures for installing system data including configuring the UL-801 Configuration Module 2. Abbreviations and Terminology This manual contains no abbreviations or terms that have varying interpretations throughout the industry. Refer to Appendix 1 for a list of acronyms, abbreviations, and terms that are used throughout this manual. The front panel of the Control Display Unit/Multi-function Control Display Unit

(CDU/MCDU), part of the FMS, contains an array of push buttons or keys that are used by the crew to operate the system. Instructions in this manual refer to specific keys by name. We bracket the legend on the key in the text. Examples: [ENTER], [A]. Line Select Keys (LSK) are referred to by numerical order (top to bottom) and side. Text appearing on the display may be included. Example: RETURN [5R]. 3. Contact Information Please submit comments, suggestions, errors or other concerns about this manual to our Technical Publications Department at techpubs@uasc.com. To order copies or request changes in address and distribution information, contact info@uasc.com. For technical questions, please contact customersupport@uasc.com 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 1 UL-801 Installation Manual Description and Operation 1. Description The UL-801 Airborne Datalink provides an air-to-ground two-way digital datalink that meets the need for specific air-to-ground communications. UniLink communicates with multiple ground-based Datalink Service Providers (DSP) using a VHF radio and/or SatCom telephony-based system. The UL-801 contains an internal VHF Data Radio (VDR). NOTE: Both DSP and DLSP are used as acronyms for Datalink Service Providers. The Datalink system consists minimally of an FMS, a CDU/MCDU, the UL-801, a transmission medium, such as a VDR or SatCom, and a configuration module. The UL-801 supports connections with up to three FMSs and one remote CDU, and connections to a VDR; and peripheral devices, such as UASC multifunction displays (MFDs) (including the MFD-640 and Electronic Flight Instrument-890R (EFI-890R) displays) and a printer. This Installation Manual applies to both FANS-enabled and non-FANS-enabled UniLink systems unless otherwise noted. UniLink capabilities include:

Future Air Navigation System (FANS) Controller-Pilot Datalink Communications (CPDLC) messaging Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Contract (ADS-C) CVR/CVFDR Output for datalink recording OOOI (Out-Off-On-In) reporting Automatic position reporting Fight planning route uplinks Aircraft triggered events Clearances/Requests Pre-departure Oceanic Pushback Expected Taxi Textual and graphical color weather maps or depictions in both low and high resolution formats Digital Automatic Terminal Information System (D-ATIS, which is sometimes referred to as ATIS) Terminal Weather Information for Pilots (TWIP) Free Text messaging Special Status reports (for example, delays, ETA updates, and diversions). 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 1 UL-801 Installation Manual The communication links used to exchange data are Very High Frequency (VHF), including:

The legacy Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting system (ACARS) Next-generation VHF digital link (VDL) Mode 2 Satellite Communications (SatCom). The UL-801 is designed to be interfaced with, and controlled through, a variety of Universal Avionics Control Display Units (CDUs) or Multi-function Control Display Units (MCDUs) that are integrated with a Universal Avionics Flight Management System (FMS). The UL-801 can also be controlled via an MCDU with ARINC 702 FMS or 743/743A GNSS. Uplink text messages are displayed on Universals CDU/MCDUs. Color graphical weather maps may be displayed on Universals CDUs, MCDUs, Multi-Function Displays (MFD), and Flat Panel Integrated Display (FPID), as well as UASCs EFI-890Rs. High resolution graphics ports support up to two high-resolution display devices, such as a capable EFI-890R ND and/or an MFD-640. UniLink is capable of simultaneously transmitting and or receiving messages on more than one transmission link at a time (VHF and SatCom, which includes SAT and TEL). Messages may be generated on the ground and sent to the aircraft (uplink message) or messages can be generated from the aircraft and sent to the ground (downlink message). Downlink messages are generated by the crew, internally by the UniLink, or any one of the peripheral units may generate a message to be passed on to the UniLink for transmission. When UniLink receives an uplink message, it determines if the message should be processed internally or be sent to a peripheral device specified by a message sub-label. Messages can be predefined as ARINC Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting System (ACARS) messages or UniLink supported messages, such as specialized weather requests or graphical weather maps, or text messages routed to a printer. The communications link connects the UniLink-equipped aircraft directly to a DSP. This provides a general purpose communications link between the aircraft and ground computers utilizing such first party service providers such as ARINC, SITA, and/or AVICOM. It is the users decision which DSP is selected. The decision may also be based on the second-party DSP to which the user subscribes. In order to aid in potential incident/accident investigations, UniLink supports the transmission of datalink records to an ARINC Characteristic 757 Cockpit Voice Recorder

(CVR) and a Cockpit Voice Flight Data Recorder (CVFDR). A. General The UL-801 provides two-way datalink for air-to-ground communications which allows communication with a DSP for a variety of available services. In order for UniLink to be utilized, a DSP subscription is required. Each DSP may not support all UniLink services. Contact your DSP for a list of supported services. A list of available UniLink DSPs can be found in Appendix 3. UniLink communicates via one or more communication systems: VHF and/or Satellite SatCom systems. It supports an RS-232 serial or ARINC 429 (740, 744/744A) cockpit printer to print various uplink messages, such as a textual weather report. The UniLink also connects to a DTU/SSDTU to allow future software and database updates. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 2 UL-801 Installation Manual SatCom weather graphic uplinks via circuit mode data and text weather uplinks via Short Burst Data (SBD) or packet data mode may or may not be available, based on your selected DSP and the SatCom equipment installed. In addition, some functions/features may only be available through specific communications systems as described in the following table. Supported Applications1 Communication System2 AOC Text, and Text, Weather, and D-ATIS ACARS Air Traffic Services excluding FANS Flight Information Services (FIS)3 ATC FANS 1/A+

Weather Graphics4 Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes4 No Yes4 No Yes VHF (VDL Mode 2 and POA) Yes SatCom (UASC Aero-I) No SatCom (UASC Aero-M) Yes Iridium SatCom ARINC 741 No Iridium SatCom RS-232 Yes Inmarsat SatCom ARINC 741 Inmarsat SatCom RS-232 No 1. Check with the DSP for applicable supported applications. 2. Communication Systems must meet DO-178B Level D to be used for FANS applications. 3. The following Flight Information Services are available thru the internal VHF radio or a capable and approved Packet Mode Data or Short Burst Data SatCom system. Contact your DSP and SatCom manufacturer for more information. Pre-departure clearance Oceanic clearance D-ATIS TWIP Pushback clearance Expected taxi clearance No No Yes No Yes No Yes 4. Check with the Iridium or Inmarsat SatCom manufacturer for current FANS approvals. 5. Graphical weather information is available only when the UniLink is interfaced to a circuit mode data SatCom system via the RS-232 connection and supported by the DSP. The older tip and ring circuit mode data interface that was available on all previous UniLink models, UL-60X and UL-70X, has been removed. B. Future Air Navigation System (FANS 1/A+) UniLink system functionality is greatly enhanced by a Future Air Navigation System

(FANS) 1/A+ implementation, which is intended to improve safety of flight, enhance efficiency, and increase air traffic capacity by replacing voice transmissions between crews and ATC with datalink messages during flight in oceanic and remote areas that have no or limited radar coverage. Voice transmissions will continue to be used as a reversionary means of communication. UniLink provides a FANS-1/A+ implementation as defined in RTCA/DO-258A and A622. FANS-1/A+ features include AFN, ADS, and CPDLC text data transmissions. At least one UASC FMS must be installed and operating with SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later for the UniLink FANS-1/A+ implementation. The FMS must be configured to enable FANS data transmission and must be configured to transmit to UniLink over the UNS HS-429-1 bus. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 3 UL-801 Installation Manual FANS-1 is the original version of FANS developed by Boeing and FANS-A is the corresponding version developed by Airbus. Both of these versions are interoperable with worldwide ATC facilities and use the Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting System (ACARS) network. UniLinks FANS-1/A+ implementation is designated as such because it is functionally equivalent to, and combines many of the best features of both Boeings FANS-1 and Airbus FANS-A implementations. Future Air Navigation System (FANS) is principally comprised of three applications:

Air Traffic Services ATS Facilities Notification (AFN) AFN allows the aircraft and an ATS provider on the ground to exchange addresses, as well as information about which FANS applications they support. Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Contract (ADS-C) ADS-C allows multiple ATS providers to command position reports and other situational data at regular intervals or in response to events specified by the ATS provider, such as a change in altitude or lateral deviation. ADS-C requires no crew interaction. Controller-Pilot Datalink Communications (CPDLC) CPDLC provides capabilities to substitute for traditional voice communications for routine communications between a pilot and an air traffic controller. CPDLC messages can be used to request and grant clearances, to inform the ground of the aircrafts position and situation, and to provide instructions to the crew, such as Climb To Reach FL390 By 2200 or Proceed Direct To TUNTO. Field-Loadable Software and Databases The UniLink application software, Customer, ATC, and Geographic databases are loadable in the field or at an authorized Universal Avionics dealer. During the software loading process, automatic and manual version number verification procedures are performed to ensure the compatibility of the software and database. A separate manual, 23-20-08, provides the Field Loading procedures. Detection of Corrupted or Partially Loaded Software All loadable software and databases contain a 32-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC). The data-loading software function calculates a CRC upon receipt of a file and compares it to the CRC included with the loaded data file thus rejecting any files whose contents have changed during the loading process. Determination of the Effects of Loading the Inappropriate Software The system has been designed to guard against inappropriate software or database loading based on version numbering. Loadable application software only functions with versions of the hardware and boot software that supports the version type of software loaded. If an incompatibility is detected during power-up checks, the system is placed into a state in which no normal functions can occur. Only appropriate loadable databases and applications will function with compatible versions of the main application software. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 4 C. UL-801 Installation Manual Hardware/Software Compatibility The hardware versions are made available to the application software and are verified for compatibility during power-up checks and during application software loading. Restricted Access to the Field-Loading Function The field-loading function is only enabled when the aircraft is on the ground and after a password has been entered successfully. UniLink Databases The UniLink databases, consist of multiple database components including the Aeronautical Operational Control (AOC) and Air Traffic Control (ATC) databases (required for FANS operations) components, contains the definitions of nearly all user-interface screens, nearly all uplink and downlink messages, a flight database that defines how data is formatted and stored, and event triggers used for responses to system events. Database integrity is verified by means of a 32-bit CRC at loading and during UniLink initialization. Field-Loadable Software Interface UniLink provides an interface to load the following databases and application software via the UASC Data Transfer Unit (DTU-100) or UASC Solid State Data Transfer Unit

(SSDTU). Access to the software and database loading functions are password protected and the aircraft must be on the ground. The UASC DTU physical interface is 10BaseT Ethernet. The UniLink hardware contains a 10/100BaseT Ethernet port. Datalink application software VDR application software Customer database, which includes the AOC database ATC database Geographic database UniLink provides user-interface screens that allow the user to command and monitor the loading progression. D. E. UniLink Customer, ATC, and Geographic Databases The Field Loadable Software database system provides flexibility in response to the changing communications, navigation, and surveillance/air traffic management environment for current and future regulations. The Customer Database (CDB)-driven user interface and message set can be customized by UASC to match airline or business operators requirements. Each database is described below. All UniLink systems include three databases: the Customer Database, the Air Traffic Control

(ATC) Database, and the Geographic Database, and contains the definitions of the following:

User interface screens Line Select Key functions Message definitions for uplink and downlink messages A flight database, which defines how data is formatted and stored Event triggers used for OOOI event reporting and other responses to system events 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 5 UL-801 Installation Manual The Customer Database (CDB)-driven user interface and message set can be customized to match airline or business operators operational requirements. Each database is described below. Customer Database Contains screen and message definitions for Aeronautical Operational Communications

(AOC) and Air Traffic Services (ATS) applications. Contains user definitions for uplink and downlink messaging, and a flight database that defines how data is formatted and stored, and event triggers used for responses to system events. A 32-bit CRC is employed to confirm database integrity at loading, initialization, and during flight. The customer database also has a version number that is checked upon loading for compatibility with the application software. If the customer database CRC check fails, UniLink annunciates the error and provides a screen for reloading the customer database. NOTE: The loading of the customer database erases the ATC database from UniLink memory. Following a load of the customer database, the ATC database must be reloaded. Air Traffic Control (ATC) Database Contains screen and message definitions for ATC applications, including the Future Air Navigation Systems (FANS). The system provides flexibility in response to the changing communications, navigation, and surveillance/air traffic management environment for current and future regulations. This database is used to define the UniLink ATC screens and message sets and is very similar in function and purpose as the customer database. A 32-bit CRC is employed to confirm database integrity at loading, initialization, and during flight. The ATC database also has a version number that is checked upon loading for compatibility with the application software and the customer database. If the ATC database CRC check fails, UniLink annunciates the error and allows the user to continue to access the functions defined by the customer database. NOTE: Loading the ATC database does not affect the currently loaded customer database or Geographic database. Geographic Database Contains aircraft communications addressing and reporting system (ACARS) ground station locations and corresponding ACARS VHF frequency information. The geographic database has a 32-bit CRC that is verified upon database loading. It also has a version number that determines its compatibility with the application software. If the geographic database CRC check fails, UniLink annunciates the error and prevents the user from operating UniLink with a corrupted database. NOTE: The Customer, ATC, and Geographic databases can be installed by UASC and can also be field-loaded using a UASC DTU-100 or SSDTU. It is recommended that this connection be installed as updates to these databases may be required from time to time. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 6 F. UASC FMS Interface UL-801 Installation Manual The UniLink provides concurrent user interface access for up to three UASC Flight Management Systems. The ARINC 429 interface uses the ARINC 739 protocol for display control and ARINC 619 bit oriented file transfer protocol for file exchange between the devices. Each UASC FMS provides a high-speed ARINC 429 channel as inputs to UniLink. The specific channel will be specified by the configuration module, based on aircraft wiring. Any of the general purpose ARINC 429 output buses can be configured as output bus to the FMS. However, ARINC TX port #1 is hard set to low speed and is required by the number 1 FMS. UniLink provides an RS-422 proprietary graphics display bus interface between the unit and each UASC CDU for low resolution graphics. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 7 UL-801 Installation Manual

(1) UniLink interface capabilities SATCOM-BASED AIRBORNE TELEPHONY VHF ANTENNA RS-232 A741 AIRBORNE TELEPHONE SYSTEMS IRIDIUM/INMARSAT SATCOM A741 A739 MCDU A739 MCDU A739 MCDU 10 DISCRETE INPUT DEVICES OPEN/

GROUND 14 DISCRETE OUTPUT DEVICES OPEN/

GROUND UNILINK UL-801 CONFIGURATION MODULE ETHERNET SOLID STATE DATA TRANSFER UNIT (SSDTU) *

A740/744/744A PRINTER A429 SERIAL PRINTER RS-232 I/Os DISCRETE: 10 IN/14 OUT A429:

16 IN/8 OUT RS-232/422: 6 IN/6 OUT A604 CMC A429 ETHERNET: 3 10/100 BASE-T ARINC A429 A429 UNIVERSAL AVIONICS FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS SUPPORTS UP TO 3 UASC FMSs OR ARINC 702A FMC STANDARD RS-422 GRAPHIC SUPPORT FOR UP TO 4 DISPLAYS RS-422 GRAPHIC SUPPORT FOR TWO DISPLAYS RS-422 EFI-890R HI-RES NAV DISPLAY MFD-640 HI-RES NAV DISPLAY A429 A429 A429 D ATA RECORDING DATA INPUT ONE A743 GPS RECEIVER OR A743A GNSS SENSOR DIGITAL ADC

* DTU-100 MAY ALSO BE USED A757 CVFDR/CVR 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 8 UL-801 Installation Manual

(2) UL-801 to UNS-1E/UNS-1C+ Block Diagram non FANS-enabled UNS-1E/UNS-1C+ #1 UNS-1E/UNS-1C+ #2 UNIVERSAL UNIVERSAL DA NA VN DT LI PR FU F PE TU MEN NE A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0BA OFF ON/

MS ENT ARINC 429 LS ARINC 429 HS ARINC 429 HS DA NA VN DT LI PR FU F PE TU MEN NE A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0BA OFF ON/

MS ENT RS-422 VHF ANTENNA UL-801 CONFIGURATION MODULE AIRCRAFT PRINTER:

ARINC 740. ARINC 744, OR SERIAL RS-232 ARINC 741 SATCOM-BASED AIRBORNE TELEPHONY SSDTU*

UNIVERSAL

* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS. CVR/CVFDR 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 9 UL-801 Installation Manual

(3) UL-801 to UNS-1Esp/UNS-1Csp+ Block Diagram non FANS-enabled UNS-1Esp/

UNS-1Csp+ #1 UNS-1Esp/

UNS-1Csp+ #2 UNIVERSAL UNIVERSAL DA NA VN DT LI PR FU F PE TU MEN NE A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0BA OFF ON/

MS ENT ARINC 429 LS ARINC 429 HS ARINC 429 HS DA NA VN DT LI PR FU F PE TU MEN NE A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z VHF ANTENNA UL-801 CONFIGURATION MODULE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0BA OFF ON/

MS ENT RS-422 AIRCRAFT PRINTER:

ARINC 740. ARINC 744, OR SERIAL RS-232 ARINC 741 SATCOM-BASED AIRBORNE TELEPHONY SSDTU*

UNIVERSAL

* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS. CVR/CVFDR 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 10 UL-801 Installation Manual

(4) UL-801 to UNS-1F/UNS-1D+ Block Diagram non FANS-enabled UNIVERSAL 4/5" FPCDU 4/5" FPCDU UNIVERSAL DA NA VN DT LI PR FU F PE TU MEN NE A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0BA OFF ON/

MS ENT DA NA VN DT LI PR FU F PE TU MEN NE A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0BA OFF ON/

MS ENT NCU #1 UNS-1F/UNS-1D+

NCU #2 UNS-1F/UNS-1D+

UNI UNI ARINC 429 LS ARINC 429 HS ARINC 429 HS RS-422 VHF ANTENNA UL-801 CONFIGURATION MODULE AIRCRAFT PRINTER:

ARINC 740. ARINC 744, OR SERIAL RS-232 ARINC 741 SATCOM-BASED AIRBORNE TELEPHONY SSDTU*

UNIVERSAL

* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS. CVR/CVFDR 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 11 UL-801 Installation Manual

(5) UNIVERSAL UL-801 to UNS-1L/UNS-1K+ Block Diagram non FANS-enabled UNIVERSAL MSG DAT FUE TUN PRE NEX PWR DIM C A H O V W B D I J K P Q R Y X NA DT FP VNA LI MENU PER 3 6 9 1 2 5 4 7 8 0 BACK MSG DAT FUE TUN PRE NEX PWR DIM C A H O V W B D I J K P Q R Y X F G N T U E L M S Z ENTE NA DT FP VNA LI MENU PER 3 6 9 1 2 5 4 7 8 0 BACK F G N T U E L M S Z ENTE 4 FPCDU NCU #1 UNS-1L/UNS-1K+

4 FPCDU NCU #2 UNS-1L/UNS-1K+

UNI UNI ARINC 429 LS ARINC 429 HS ARINC 429 HS VHF ANTENNA UL-801 CONFIGURATION MODULE AIRCRAFT PRINTER:

ARINC 740. ARINC 744, OR SERIAL SATCOM-BASED AIRBORNE TELEPHONY SYSTEM RS-232 ARINC 741 SSDTU*

UNIVERSAL

* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS. CVR/CVFDR 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 12 UL-801 Installation Manual

(6) UL-801 to UNS-1Ew Block Diagram - FANS-enabled (FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5 and later) UNS-1Ew #1 UNS-1Ew #2 UNIVERSAL UNIVERSAL DA NA VN DT LI PR FU F PE TU MEN NE A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0BA OFF ON/

MS ENT ARINC 429 LS ARINC 429 HS ARINC 429 HS DA NA VN DT LI PR FU F PE TU MEN NE A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0BA OFF ON/

MS ENT RS-422 FANS 1 UL-801 AIRCRAFT PRINTER:

ARINC 740. ARINC 744, OR SERIAL CONFIGURATION MODULE VHF ANTENNA RS-232 ARINC 741 SATCOM-BASED AIRBORNE TELEPHONY A R I N C 7 5 7 SSDTU*

UNIVERSAL CVR/CVFDR

* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS. 1 VISUAL, AURAL ALERTING, AND DATALINK RECORDING ARE REQUIRED FOR FANS. 1 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 13 UL-801 Installation Manual

(7) UL-801 to UNS-1Espw Block Diagram - FANS-enabled (FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5 and later) UNS-1Espw #1 UNS-1Espw #2 UNIVERSAL UNIVERSAL DA NA VN DT LI PR FU F PE TU MEN NE A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0BA OFF ON/

MS ENT ARINC 429 LS ARINC 429 HS ARINC 429 HS DA NA VN DT LI PR FU F PE TU MEN NE A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0BA OFF ON/

MS ENT RS-422 FANS 1 UL-801 CONFIGURATION MODULE AIRCRAFT PRINTER:

ARINC 740. ARINC 744, OR SERIAL VHF ANTENNA A R I N C 7 5 7 RS-232 ARINC 741 SATCOM-BASED AIRBORNE TELEPHONY SSDTU*

UNIVERSAL CVR/CVFDR

* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS. 1 VISUAL, AURAL ALERTING, AND DATALINK RECORDING ARE REQUIRED FOR FANS. 1 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 14 UL-801 Installation Manual

(8) UL-801 to UNS-1Fw Block Diagram - FANS-enabled (FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5 and later) UNIVERSAL 4/5" FPCDU 4/5" FPCDU UNIVERSAL DA NA VN DT LI PR FU F PE TU MEN NE A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0BA OFF ON/

MS ENT NCU #1 UNS-1Fw 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0BA OFF ON/

MS ENT DA NA VN DT LI PR FU F PE TU MEN NE A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z NCU #2 UNS-1Fw UNI UNI ARINC 429 LS ARINC 429 HS ARINC 429 HS RS-422 FANS 1 UL-801 CONFIGURATION MODULE AIRCRAFT PRINTER:

ARINC 740. ARINC 744, OR SERIAL VHF ANTENNA A R I N C 7 5 7 RS-232 ARINC 741 SATCOM-BASED AIRBORNE TELEPHONY SSDTU*

UNIVERSAL CVR/CVFDR

* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS. 1 VISUAL, AURAL ALERTING, AND DATALINK RECORDING ARE REQUIRED FOR FANS. 1 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 15 UL-801 Installation Manual

(9) UL-801 to UNS-1Lw Block Diagram - FANS-enabled (FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5 and later) UNIVERSAL UNIVERSAL MSG DAT FUE TUN PRE NEX PWR DIM C A H O V W B D I J K R P Q X Y NA DT FP VNA LI MENU PER 3 6 9 1 2 5 4 8 7 0 BACK F G N T U E L M S Z ENTE 4/5" FPCDU NCU #1 UNS-1Lw NA DT FP VNA LI MENU PER 3 6 9 1 2 5 4 8 7 0 BACK C A H O V W B D I J K R P Q X Y F G N T U E L M S Z ENTE 4/5" FPCDU MSG DAT FUE TUN PRE NEX PWR DIM NCU #2 UNS-1Lw UNI UNI ARINC 429 LS ARINC 429 HS ARINC 429 HS FANS 1 UL-801 CONFIGURATION MODULE AIRCRAFT PRINTER:

ARINC 740. ARINC 744, OR SERIAL VHF ANTENNA A R I N C 7 5 7 RS-232 ARINC 741 SATCOM-BASED AIRBORNE TELEPHONY SYSTEM SSDTU*

UNIVERSAL CVR/CVFDR

* THE DTU-100 MAY BE USED BUT IS NOT RECOMMENDED IN NEW INSTALLATIONS. 1 VISUAL, AURAL ALERTING, AND DATALINK RECORDING ARE REQUIRED FOR FANS. 1 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 16 G. Configuration Module UL-801 Installation Manual The configuration module, an electrically erasable, programmable read-only memory

(EEPROM) device, is mounted on the rear of the mounting tray and connected via a dedicated interface to the UniLink. The configuration module stores information specific to the installation. The user can view and retrieve the aircraft configuration through specially designed pages that can be accessed through the keypad on the CDU or MCDU. The UniLink retrieves the configuration data during each power up cycle. Modifications to the configuration are possible only on the ground and are restricted through software interlocks. H. ARINC 429 Channels UniLink provides sixteen ARINC 429 receivers and eight ARINC 429 transmitters.

(1) ARINC 429 Receivers The sixteen ARINC 429 receivers can be independently configured for supported ARINC devices. The receiver bus speed (high or low) is determined by the ARINC device selected during configuration. ARINC 429 Transmitters ARINC 429 transmitter, Port #1, is set to low speed by default. The remaining seven ARINC 429 transmitters can be independently configured for bus speed (high or low). Multiple ARINC devices of the same bus speed can be connected in parallel by each transmitter configuration selection. Do not exceed 15 receive devices on one ARINC transmitter port.

(2) Device UASC FMS/CDU 1 UASC FMS/CDU 2 UASC FMS/CDU 3 739 MCDU 1 739 MCDU 2 739 MCDU 3 702 FMS 1 702 FMS 2 702 FMS 3 740/744/744A Printer 741 SDU Voice Tune Bus Vibro-Meter CMC 604 CMC 750 VDR DHC8 IOP 1 DHC8 IOP 2 UniLink TX Speed (NOTE 1) LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW LOW or HIGH LOW or HIGH LOW or HIGH LOW LOW NOTE 6 LOW LOW LOW NOTE 6 HIGH Not Applicable Not Applicable UniLink RX Speed HIGH HIGH HIGH LOW LOW LOW NOTE 2 NOTE 2 NOTE 2 LOW LOW Not Applicable HIGH LOW HIGH LOW LOW 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 17 UL-801 Installation Manual UniLink TX Speed (NOTE 1) LOW or HIGH Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable LOW or HIGH HIGH Device Test Device (NOTE 3) ARINC 743A GNSS Receiver DADC1 DADC2 Generic 429 Device (1 4) 757 CVR HIGH NOTE 1: Device TX speed supported by UniLink. NOTE 2: The customer database specifies the data speed of this configurable device. NOTE 3: The test device is not used in aircraft installations. NOTE 4: References to an ARINC 743A GNSS receiver also include ARINC 743 Global Positioning System (GPS) receivers. UniLink automatically detects the transmission speed (high/low) of the GNSS or GPS and configures the interface accordingly. UniLink RX Speed HIGH HIGH or LOW (NOTE 4) HIGH or LOW (NOTE 5) HIGH or LOW (NOTE 5) NOTE 2 Not Applicable configures the interface accordingly. NOTE 5: UniLink automatically detects the transmission speed (high/low) of the Digital ADC and NOTE 6: Does not apply to UL-801. RS-232/422 Serial Ports UniLink provides six general purpose RS-232/422 transmitters and six general purpose RS-232/422 receivers. These ports are available to perform as six full duplex channels. The ports are capable of operating up to a 19.2 kilobaud rate. The serial port type selection

(RS-232 or RS-422) is determined by the type of serial device selected during configuration. UniLink RS-422 serial ports support the interface between the UniLink and various combinations of CDU/MCDU display processors (DPs), flat-panel multifunction displays

(MFDs), and EFI-890R displays to accomplish display of uplinked graphic images. UniLink can be connected to up to three CDUs and one remote CDU/MCDU via ARINC 739 protocol over an ARINC 429 physical layer providing UniLink with control of the CDU/MCDU text display. The user selects graphics to acquire and display from text menus rendered by UniLink on the CDU/MCDU via this interface. EFI-890R and high-resolution MFD (SCN 1011.4.8) displays are connected to UniLink via an RS-422. UniLink supports two high-resolution connections. If the device assigned to a serial port is a low-resolution display, UniLink sets up that port as an RS-422 port at a baud rate specified by configuration item CDU/MFD Baud Rate, options 9801 BPS or 19.2 KBS. Other devices supported by UniLink RS-232/422 serial ports include a serial printer and SatCom telephony functions 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 18 I. UL-801 Installation Manual J. Discrete Inputs/Outputs UniLink provides 10 general purpose discrete input connections and 14 general purpose discrete output connections. Discrete Inputs 5 VDC 3.3 VDC DISCRETE INPUT NOTE:

THE TRANSITION VOLTAGE VALUE IS 3.8 VDC. THE ABOVE CIRCUIT IS INTERNAL TO UNLINK. Basic UniLink Discrete Input Configurable Discrete Inputs The discrete input signal types and active states (in other words, whether the signal state is active when the input is open or connected to a ground) are configurable. The following discrete input types are selectable from the UniLink Discrete Input Configuration menu:

Park Brake Set Active State Ground Open Strut Comp Active State Ground Open Park Brake Set Options Active Park Brake Set Park Brake Set Inactive Park Brake Released Park Brake Released Strut Comp Options Active Strut Compressed Strut Compressed Inactive Strut Not Compressed Strut Not Compressed 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 19 UL-801 Installation Manual Door n Closed Active State Ground Open Door n Closed Options Active Door n is closed Door n is closed Inactive Door n is open Door n is open NOTE:

If more than one door discrete input is wired and configured, the inputs are logically ANDed together by UniLink to determine approximately when "all doors are closed". Discrete Outputs UniLink provides 14 discrete outputs. Each discrete output is capable of current sinking up to 500mA, to drive relays, lights, and trigger a variety of aural warning generators. V CC ENABLE IN N THERMAL LIMIT 12 VDC

<<1 NOTE:

THE ABOVE CIRCUIT IS INTERNAL TO UNLINK. Basic UniLink Discrete Output DISCRETE OUTPUT Configurable Discrete Outputs The discrete output signal types and active states (in other words, whether the signal state is active when the input is open or ground) are configurable. FANS Visual (when FANS is enabled) Active State Ground

(Recommended Configuration) FANS Visual Active Inactive FANS ATC annunciator on FANS ATC annunciator off Open FANS ATC annunciator off FANS ATC annunciator on NOTE:

The ATC Annunciator power is connected to the aircraft 28 VDC. 1. 2. This annunciator is used to alert the crew of an incoming FANS ATC message. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 20 UL-801 Installation Manual FANS Aural (when FANS is enabled) Active State Ground

(Recommended Configuration) FANS Aural Active Inactive FANS alerter on FANS ATC annunciator off Open FANS alerter off FANS ATC annunciator on The aural alerting devices must be connected to the aircraft 28 VDC power. NOTE:

CPDLC Connect Active State Ground Open CPDLC Connect Active Inactive CPDLC connection active No CPDLC connection No CPDLC connection CPDLC connection active Use of this discrete is optional. NOTE:

New Message Active State Ground Open New Message n Active New/unread message/graphic received No new/unread messages Inactive No new/unread messages New/unread message/graphic received This discrete is intended to drive a visual annunciator. Not associated with FANS advisories. NOTE:

Chime Active State Ground Open Chime n Active New/unread message/graphic received No new/unread messages Inactive No new/unread messages New/unread message/graphic received This discrete is intended to drive an aural annunciator. NOTE:

Media NOCOMM VHF NOCOMM/SAT NOCOMM/TEL NOCOMM Active State Ground Open Active Inactive Media link failed Media link established/idle Media link established/idle Media link failed NOTE:

These discretes are intended to drive visual annunciators. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 21 K. Ethernet UL-801 Installation Manual The UASC DTU-100/SSDTU physical interface is 10BaseT Ethernet. The UniLink hardware contains a 10/100BaseT Ethernet port. All UniLink interfaces to the UASC DTU-100 can be directly applied to the UASC SSDTU without any modifications to the UniLink. Transmission Media Management UniLink is capable of managing multiple links (VHF, TEL, and SAT) so that simultaneous transmission and receipt of messages is possible on several different links. UniLink provides individual management of the VDR radio and satellite communications equipment. VHF Digital Link (VDL) Mode 2 Capability The internal VDR is capable of supporting both the D8PSK modulation of the VDL Mode 2 channel and the current ACARS MSK modulation of the POA ACARS channel (which is used when the aircraft is outside of the VDL Mode 2 coverage area) or directed by the DSP. POA, in conjunction with VDL Mode 2, supports the Future Air Navigation System (FANS) applications that include ATS Facilities Notification (AFN), Controller-Pilot Datalink Communications (CPDLC), and Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Contract (ADS-C). The aircrafts 24-bit International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) address is required for VDL Mode 2 communications. This address is obtained from the selected DSP and is entered during the configuration process and is stored in the configuration module. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 22 L. M. VHF Management UL-801 Installation Manual The UniLink contains an internal VHF radio for its data communication. UniLink will only attempt to transmit if the radio has successfully tuned to the selected frequency. VHF Management requires that UniLink perform the following tasks in order to manage the VHF air-ground link:

Acquire a frequency - UniLink acquires a frequency by the Automatic selection method or a frequency is provided by Autotune or manual crew selection/entry or recall from previously established frequency from Non Volatile Memory at power up. Establish a frequency - UniLink establishes the acquired frequency by transmitting a downlink block and receiving a necessary Positive Acknowledgment response. Maintain the frequency - UniLink maintains the established frequency until signal loss on the frequency or until subsequent new frequency selection or entry. VHF Media Status COMM/IDLE The UniLink VHF Communication Status is displayed on the COMM STATUS page and is explained by the table below. Reason Communications have been established with the ground and datalink messages can be transmitted over VHF. No data is currently being transmitted. A message is currently in the process of being transmitted over VHF and UniLink is waiting for acknowledgement from the ground. UniLink has not selected a frequency for tuning due to invalid FMS lat/long or no radio type UniLink is automatically selecting a frequency for tuning in current region with enabled DSP. NOCOMM/SCANNING NOCOMM/NO FREQ COMM/SENDING NOCOMM/CONNECTING UniLink has sent communication to the ground and is awaiting a reply. NOCOMM/NO DSP NOCOMM/VOICE All DSPs have been manually selected OFF. The VDR is in VOICE mode. NOTE: Does not apply to UL-801 with internal VDR. VDR inoperative. VDR is reporting a fault. NOCOMM/VDR INOP NOCOMM/VDR FAULT NOCOMM/VDR UNAVAIL UniLink has not set the VDRs protocol state. NOCOMM/MONITORING UniLink has not detected a viable VDL Mode 2 ground station. NOCOMM/SUSPEND VHF communications have been suspended by the crew. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 23 UL-801 Installation Manual N. SatCom-based Airborne Telephony (TEL) A dedicated standard telephone modem is designed into UniLink. This modem is used to transfer data between a supported ground station and the aircraft subsystems. For example, the airborne telephone modem is initially used for uploading messages, text weather, and graphical weather data from a DSP via a dial-up connection. UniLink manages only one RS-232 port for this use. SatCom-based Airborne Telephony is supported by Iridium and Inmarsat systems that include an integral air phone modem which UniLink accesses via an RS-232 interface. The airborne telephony modem uploads messages, text weather, and graphical weather from a DSP. It is important to note that the UniLink does not support the MagnaStar Digital Airborne Telephone System and the UASC Aero-I. There is no UniLink tip and ring interface as was the case with previous UL-60X/70X products. However, the legacy use of the word TEL, which is used to abbreviate telephony, remains unchanged and continues to indicate the use of a configured RS-232 UniLink port in support of such systems. If TEL is configured to be used in the priority rotation, the request is then routed to an available SatCom system via a configured RS-232 port. The available options for RS-232-capable air phone configurations are UASC T-T Aero-M or Iridium. The Iridium selection supports a variety of RS-232 available Iridium SatCom products. The UniLink Telephony Communications Status is displayed on the COMM STATUS page and is explained in the following table. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 24 UL-801 Installation Manual Up to four low-resolution display devices can be connected to a single low-resolution bus and one high-resolution device each can be connected to two high-resolution graphic ports. TEL Media Status COMM/MDM TIMEOUT COMM/DIALING COMM/CONNECTING COMM/IDLE COMM/CONNECTED COMM/PLEASE WAIT NOCOMM/SUSPENDED Reason UniLink has dialed the phone but a timeout occurred prior to a connection being established. NOTE: Sequential, excessive timeouts will result in the NOCOMM/AUTO DELAY message displaying. UniLink has provided the phone with the dial string command and is waiting for the phone to answer. The ground has answered the phone and UniLink is communicating with the DSP. The phone is hung up and no attempt is currently being made to use it and SatCom (TEL) is not suspended or waiting to retry. The phone line is connected and messages can or are currently being transferred. TEL SUSPEND has been manually activated. UniLink is in the process of shutting down the connection. SatCom (TEL) has been suspended, either by the crew or automatically due to excessive failed attempts. NOCOMM/AUTO DELAY UniLink is waiting for the configurable AUTO-DELAY timer to expire before trying again NOCOMM/CONFIG FAIL While CONNECTING with the ground server, a message is received saying NOCOMM/INIT FAIL NOCOMM/DIALING the configuration sent by UniLink is invalid. The SatCom (TEL) system is permanently shut down. Cycling UniLink power is required to exit this state. The SatCom (TEL) system is not available for operation. One or both of the following configuration items are invalid: Aircraft Registration Number, or Phone Access Number. UniLink exited out of the 5-minute delay and is in the process of making another connection attempt. NOCOMM/PLEASE WAIT TEL SUSPEND has been manually activated while a connection is in progress. UniLink is in the process of shutting down the connection. NOCOMM/MDM TIMEOUT UniLink exited out of the 5-minute delay and while in the process of making another connection attempt the UniLink modem has timed out. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 25 O. SatCom-based ARINC 741 (SAT) UL-801 Installation Manual UniLink interfaces with an ARINC 741-capable SatCom system, such as the Universal/Thrane & Thrane Aero-I SDU and others, via a low speed ARINC 429 interface. Packet Mode ACARS data (Data 2) is sent to the SDU for forwarding to the ACARS gateway on the ground through the Ground Earth Station (GES) and vice versa. NOTE: The UASC Aero-I SatCom system is not approved for FANS messaging. The UniLink SAT Communication Status is displayed on the COMM STATUS page and is explained in the following table. SatCom Media Status COMM/IDLE COMM/SENDING NOCOMM/SDU UNAVAIL NOTE: SDU is the Satellite Data Unit. Reason SatCom (SAT) communication has been established and datalink messages can be transmitted over SatCom. No data is currently being transmitted. A message is currently in the process of being transmitted. UniLink is waiting for acknowledgement from the ground. The SatComs system SDU is reporting that it is unavailable. UniLink does not detect the SDU. NOCOMM/SDU INOP NOCOMM/AUTO DELAY UniLink is waiting before trying to establish a SatCom (SAT) link again. Retries have been exhausted, and Auto Return to Comm configuration NOCOMM/TIMEOUT setting is disabled. A manual Link Test must be performed, or an uplink received for the medium to return to COMM. NOCOMM/CONNECTING A SatCom (SAT) link is in the process of being established. NOCOMM/SUSPENDED COMM/IDLE SatCom (SAT) link has been suspended by the crew. SatCom (SAT) communication has been established and datalink messages can be transmitted over SatCom. No data is currently being transmitted. A message is currently in the process of being transmitted. UniLink is waiting for acknowledgement from the ground. The SatComs system SDU is reporting that it is unavailable. COMM/SENDING NOCOMM/SDU UNAVAIL NOTE: SDU is the Satellite Data Unit. UniLink does not detect the SDU. NOCOMM/SDU INOP NOCOMM/AUTO DELAY UniLink is waiting before trying to establish a SatCom (SAT) link again. Retries have been exhausted, and Auto Return to Comm configuration NOCOMM/TIMEOUT setting is disabled. A manual Link Test must be performed, or an uplink received for the medium to return to COMM. NOCOMM/CONNECTING A SatCom (SAT) link is in the process of being established. NOCOMM/SUSPENDED SatCom (SAT) link has been suspended by the crew. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 26 UL-801 Installation Manual Graphical Weather Depiction UniLink provides configurable graphic ports which can be configured to interface with a total of six graphics buses. Graphical weather information is available only when the UniLink is interfaced to a SatCom system via the RS-232 connection and supported by the DSP. The tip and ring data interface, available on previous UniLink models, is no longer required and therefore has been removed. The graphics capability has been improved by the addition of two high resolution output ports. Graphics may be displayed in high resolution (Hi-Res) for units that are capable of displaying high resolution graphics, such as the EFI-890R in the Navigation Display (ND) position or an MFD-640 with SCN 1011.4.8 or later installed. Example Graphic These two high resolution RS-422 ports may be configured to support two dedicated EFI-890R displays (all EFI-890Rs are capable of high resolution display while all CDU/MCDUs display in low resolution). In the event that both a low resolution and a high resolution graphic is requested, the UniLink automatically requests and uplinks two formatted images reflecting the same data during the same call:

One formatted to support the display of images on the low resolution output One formatted to support high resolution images that will result in a larger, higher quality image Graphics Display Configuration Options The Graphics Display Configuration Options include low resolution graphics transmission to CDUs, remote CDUs, MCDUs, MFDs; and high resolution graphics to high resolution EFI-890R displays or an MFD-640 with SCN 1011.4.8 or later installed. P. ACARS Message Processing UniLink provides services in the Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting System (ACARS). There are two types of ACARS data communications, ground-to-air via uplink messages and air-to-ground via downlink messages, both of which are supported by SatCom or VHF. Messages sent from one aircraft to another can only be accomplished through the use of user-defined messages via the ground network. Direct communication from aircraft to aircraft is not available. Uplink messages are generated by Airline Ground Host Centers or an equivalent service provider, ATC facilities or a Datalink Service Provider

(DSP) such as ARINC or SITA. Uplink messages not generated by a DSP are passed to a 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 27 UL-801 Installation Manual

(2)

(3) DSP which then sends the uplink messages to a designated UniLink system or aircraft. The message is then processed by UniLink or, when the message is meant for a peripheral unit, is passed on to the appropriate peripheral unit.

(1) ACARS Uplink Message Receiving When UniLink receives an uplink message from the ground system, it performs a Block Check Sequence (BCS) error check. If the BCS message is valid, UniLink accepts the message and generates a positive acknowledgment for transmission to the ground. If the uplink message contains an error, UniLink generates a negative technical acknowledgment. Upon receipt of the negative technical acknowledgment, the ground system should retransmit the uplink message. ACARS Uplink Message Log UniLink maintains an uplink message log capable of storing at least 40 AOC uplink messages. UniLink stores only those uplink messages that are defined in the database as requiring storage in the log. UniLink allows users to delete or print specific messages from the message log. When the message log is full and a new message requiring storage is received, UniLink will delete the oldest read message in the log. When the log is full of messages that have not been read and a new message requiring storage is received, UniLink will delete the oldest message. ACARS Downlink Message Origination There are several actions that can generate a downlink. The crew may do so via the CDU/MCDU and route the message to the UniLink for transmission, or UniLink may automatically generate a downlink as a response to an event having occurred, such as weight off wheels or an automatic position report. ACARS Downlink Message Queue Once a downlink message is encoded, it is queued until the message can be transmitted to the ground. UniLink is capable of maintaining at least 70 messages in the transmission queue. UniLink allows users to delete or print specific messages from the message log. ACARS Downlink Message Transmission When a valid communication link exists, UniLink transmits the message having the highest priority. If more than one message shares the highest priority then UniLink selects the oldest from that group of messages. Upon receipt of the downlinked message, the DSP performs a BCS error check and, if the BCS is valid, it routes it to the proper destination. The ground system also generates a positive technical acknowledgment for the message and transmits it to the aircraft. Upon receipt of a positive technical acknowledgment, UniLink considers the message successfully transmitted.

(4)

(5) 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 28 Q. Advisory Alerts, Device Status, and Error Messages UL-801 Installation Manual UniLink generates advisory alerts annunciating normal and non-normal conditions that require crew action. Selecting the advisory alert displays the UniLink page on which the corresponding information is displayed or from which a required action may be performed. Examples of advisories are: NEW MSG, VHF VOICE, NOCOMM, and NEW WX MAP. UniLink provides real-time status information for other LRUs UniLink interfaces with via the DEVICE STATUS page. When configured, devices such as FMSs, internal VHF radio, 741 SatCom-based system, printer, etc. show as OK or INOP. INOP is displayed when communication between both devices has failed. If a particular device is not configured, UniLink displays NO CONFIG as the device status. Additionally, the state of various input sensors including all analog discretes is displayed via the SENSOR STATUS page. These displays are useful for initial system installation and trouble-shooting in the field UniLink generates error messages to alert the crew of non-normal conditions. Generally, a NEW ERROR MSG advisory appears, which when selected will display the error message title and additional details if applicable. A log of error messages appears on the ERROR LOG page. Examples of error messages are:

CONFIGURATION WARNING POWER ON BIT FAILURE VHF CHANNEL CONGESTION Additionally, UniLink generates pop-up windows for normal and non-normal alert information that may require more timely crew awareness. Examples of pop-up window messages are:

QUEUE FULL PRINT JOB COMPLETE R. Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) Replacing voice communications between crews and air traffic control (ATC) with datalink messages is intended to improve safety, enhance efficiency, and increase air traffic capacity. This is one of the main features in the UniLink. The UL-801 provides a configurable ARINC transmit port to support the recording of datalink messages on a compatible ARINC 757Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR/CVFDR). The CVR/CVFDR records all messages that are sent to it by the UniLink. Messages are provided to the CVR/CVFDR on an ARINC 429 data bus. This port may be configured for high or low speed based on the recorders speed requirement. When an ARINC transmit port is connected to a UASC CVR/CVFDR, the ARINC transmit port must be configured as follows:

PORT SPEED:

HIGH PORT DEVICES: CVR 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 29 UL-801 Installation Manual UniLink supports transmission of datalink message recordings to any ARINC Characteristic 757 CVR/CVFDR. The following information is sent to the CVR/CVFDR as part of the recording process:

Uplinks to the aircraft Downlinks from the aircraft The time the message is displayed to the crew The crew's response to the message UniLink status data Any peripheral data that is addressed to the CVR Records sent to the CVR may contain the following information:

The message priority (if any) The display status of the message Time stamps of the message Other information required to identify the message. The following examples describe ways that UniLink processes such data. Example 1: Uplink to the Crew (Weather Graphic Received) In the event that an uplink intended for display to the crew is received (Weather Graphic), UniLink transmits a record to the CVR/CVFDR. When UniLink receives the graphic uplink, UniLink displays the graphic. Example 2: Downlink from the Crew (Crew-Commanded Downlink) In the event that the crew generates or commands a downlink (a command to send a downlink is initiated by the crew from CDU/MCDU), UniLink transmits a record to the CVR/CVFD or UniLink queues a downlink. UniLink transmits another record once the message successfully sends or if a message fails to send. Printers UniLink supports an interface to an ARINC 740/744/744A or a RS-232 serial printer. UniLink only supports one printer in a configuration. If both ARINC and RS-232 serial printers are configured, UniLink only uses the ARINC 740/744/744A printer. UniLink supports printing of text data only. The maximum file size supported by UniLink is 16 KB, including any header and footer. If a print file is larger than 16 KB, UniLink discards the print file and sends a message to the Status log. NOTE: The file size limit was derived to provide a design guideline for reserving memory for print jobs. The maximum file size from an ACARS uplink is about 3 KB and the maximum Williamsburg file size supported by UniLink is 6,320 bytes. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 30 S. UL-801 Installation Manual T. U. Transmission Media Interfaces - Configuration Option SatCom is supported with a configurable interface to an A741 SDU for text-based messages. Telephony is supported with a configurable RS-232 interface to a UASC T-T Aero-M or Iridium systems for both text-based messages and graphical weather maps. MagnaStar and UASC Aero-I tip/ring telephony interfaces are not supported. VHF communications are supported with a configurable ARINC interface to an external A750 VDR for text-based messages. Text Message Processing UniLink supports Aeronautical Operational Communications (AOC) flexible messaging and FANS message handling. UniLink also supports both uplink and downlink messages from peripheral systems. UniLink supports Air Traffic Services ATS and AOC text messages, downlink graphical weather requests, and uplink graphical weather images stored and displayed in one or more message logs. Uplink and downlink message integrity checks are performed by means of a 32-bit CRC calculation. Message alerting functions include configurable output discretes for visual and aural alerting and digital outputs to various LRUs. Message alert inhibiting is configurable and is provided during critical flight phases (takeoff and landing) and is based on flight parameters including ground speed, altitude, and FMS approach mode. V. Media Advisory Reporting Option If enabled, UniLink sends the Media Advisory message to update the DSP regarding the status and availability of datalink media, such as VHF, TEL, or SAT. It is useful for the DSP to know the available datalink media when preparing a message for transmission to UniLink. Upon request by the host processor, the DSP may forward this information to other DSPs. Crew interaction is not required. W. Automatic Position Reporting Option The Automatic Position Reporting Option includes configurable on-ground and in-air automatic position reporting selections. UniLink provides the ability to temporarily disable/enable the automatic position reporting function and modify the reporting interval via the UniLink POS REPORT page. The Automatic Position Reporting messages may be customized by the user and may conform to the format in ARINC Characteristic 702A. The user will be able to delay transmission of Automatic Position Report messages for a configured amount of time after the OFF event to reduce missed transmissions due to signal blockage during take off. X. OOOI Reporting/History Option The OOOI Reporting/History Option includes Out, Off, On, In (OOOI) downlink messaging and history maintenance stored in UniLinks non-volatile memory. Configurable input parameters (door, brake, strut, ground speed) can be received from multiple sources based on the specific installation. Its recommended that OOOI be enabled if ARINC is selected as a DSP. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 31 UL-801 Installation Manual Y. Flight Leg Transition The Flight Leg Transition feature is provided to reduce the crew workload (such as initializing the Origin of the next flight leg to the Destination of the flight leg that was just completed). It is also used as a means of automatically logging data from a flight leg that was just completed if that data may be needed for future reference, such as OOOI times and fuel. Z. Meteorological Data Reporting Option The Meteorological Data Reporting Option includes processing of uplink configuration settings and automatic downlink messaging. Meteorological data items include atmospheric temperature, pressure, and wind speeds collected at various durations throughout the flight. Crew interaction is not needed. AA. ARINC 741 using Iridium or Inmarsat UniLink provides a standard interface to ARINC 741-capable SatCom-based airborne telephony systems. The UniLink meets DO-178B level C software requirements necessary for all FANS messaging. The bearer systems such as Inmarsat and Iridium SatCom Systems must meet DO-178B level D requirements. Check with the selected SatCom manufacturer for further details regarding this important issue. 2. Operation The UniLink is operated by controls provided by the FMS CDU/MCDU. Refer to the UniLink Operators Manual, 23-20-06.01, for UniLink Operating Procedures. If FANS is enabled, the report number for the UniLink FANS Operations Manual is 23-20-

06.02. This manual must be obtained separately. The Operators Manual introduces the CDU/MCDU, explains the CDU/MCDU operating philosophy, and provides a detailed explanation of the keyboard keys, Line Select Keys

(LSK), and their associated functions. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 32 UL-801 Installation Manual FAA Approval 1. General Installation approval of the UniLink system is being accomplished under a variety of STCs and Forms 337. For a new installation to be eligible for approval, it will be necessary to apply to the FAA for an STC or to utilize an existing STC or Form 337. This manual contains information directing the follow-on TC or STC applicant to include specific maintenance instructions in the Aircraft Maintenance Manual or ICA when the Field Loadable Software process is expected to be used as called out in FAA Order 8110.49 Section 5-4. ACARS/graphics datalink functionality is NOT approved under TSO-C160. Universal Avionics Systems Corporation received U.S. Federal Communication Commission Grant of Equipment Authorization on TBD, in accordance with FCC Rule Part 87, with the following transmitter specifications:

Mode A 2 Output Power

(Minimum) 16 Watts Frequency Tolerance 30 PPM Channel Spacing 25 kHZ 15 Watts 5 PPM 25 kHZ Frequency Range 118.000 to 136.975 MHz 118.000 to 136.975 MHz Emission Designator 13K0A2D 14K0G1D A. Applicable TSOs TSO-C160 Refer to the TSO Deviations section. B. TSO Deviations TSO-C160 Section 3.f Environmental Qualification The FAA granted a deviation to use the environmental conditions specified in RTCA/DO-160F in lieu of DO-160E. TSO-C160 Section 4.a.(1) and 4.a.(2) Marking The FAA granted deviations to allow the parts to marked using the model designation system as referenced in 14 CFR 21.619(b) Amdt. 21-92 in accordance with 14 CFR 21.616(d) Amdt.21-92 and 45.15b, Amdt. 45-26. Section 4.a.(1) Marking: Authorization to mark the LRUs with the Model Designation in order to capture both the hardware part number and software control number

(SCN). Section 4.a.(2) Marking: Authorization to not mark the LRUs with the date of manufacture. Each part will be marked with a unique serial number. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 101 UL-801 Installation Manual C. Equipment Classes Equipment Classes UL-801, SCN 30:

F VDL Mode 2 receiver used in a 25-kHz channel separation environment 7 VDL Mode 2 transmitter used in a 25-kHz channel separation environment, intended to operate with a range of 200 nautical miles Equipment Architecture Classes UL-801, SCN 30:

W (CMU) Y (VDR) D. Reference Documents

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) TSO-C160 (11-Jan-2008): VDL Mode 2 Communications Equipment DO-281A (08-Nov-2005): Minimum Operational Performance Standards for Aircraft VDL Mode 2 Physical, Link, and Network Layer (MPS for TSO-C160) AC 20-140A (07-Apr-2010): Guidelines for Design Approval of Aircraft Data Communications Systems AC 20-160 (21-Feb-2008): Onboard Recording of Controller Pilot Data Link Communication in Crash Survivable Memory DO-186B (08-Nov-2005): Minimum Operational Performance Standards for Airborne Radio Communications Equipment Operating Within the Radio Frequency Range 117.975 137.000 MHz DO-258A (07-Apr-2005): Interoperability Requirements for ATS Applications Using ARINC 622 Data Communications (FANS 1/A Interoperability Standard) RTCA/DO-160F (06-Dec-2007): Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne Equipment RTCA/DO-178B (01-Dec-1992): Software Considerations in Airborne Systems and Equipment Certification RTCA/DO-254 (19-Apr-2000): Design Assurance Guidance for Airborne Electronic Hardware

(10) RTCA/DO-306/ED-122 (11-Oct-2007): Safety and Performance Standards for Air Traffic Data Link Services in Oceanic and Remote Airspace (Oceanic SPR Standard)

(11) ARINC 618-6 (Jun-2006): Air/Ground Character-Oriented Protocol Specification

(12) ARINC 623-3 (Apr-2005): Character-Oriented Air Traffic Service (ATS) Applications

(13) ARINC 631-5 (Dec-2008): VHF Digital Link (VDL) Mode 2 Implementation Provisions

(14) ARINC 741P2-10 (09-Feb-2009): Aviation Satellite Communication System Part 2 System Design and Equipment Functional Description (Section 4.7 ACARS MU/CMU

- SATCOM Interface) 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 102 UL-801 Installation Manual

(15) ED-85A (Dec-2003): Data Link Application System Document (DLASD) for the

"Departure Clearance" Data-Link Service

(16) ED-89A (Dec-2003): Data-Link Application System Document (DLASD) for the

"ATIS" Data-Link Service

(17) ED-106A (Mar-2005): Data-Link Application System Document (DLASD) for the Oceanic Clearance Data-Link Service

(18) GOLD (14-Jun-2010): Global Operational Data Link Document (GOLD)

(19) AC 120-70A (29-Dec-2005): Operational Authorization Process for use of Data Link Communication System ICAO Doc 9613 (01-Jan-2008): Performance-based Navigation (PBN) Manual

(20)

(21) RTCA/DO-290/ED-120; Change 1 and Change 2 (29-Apr-2004): Safety and Performance Requirements Standard for Air Traffic Data Link Services in Continental Airspace (Continental SPR Standard)

(22) ED-154 (Jul-2008): Future Air Navigation System 1/A - Aeronautical Telecommunication Network Interoperability Standard E. Other References TSO Functions

(1) VDL Mode 2 - Ref: TSO-C160, DO-281A, ARINC 631 Supports the requirements contained in TSO-C160 and MPS DO-281A. The UL-801 is equipment class F (VDL Mode 2 receiver used in a 25-kHz channel separation environment) and 7 (VDL Mode 2 transmitter used in a 25-kHz channel separation environment, intended to operate with a range of 200 nautical miles) and architecture class W (CMU) and Y (VDR). The UL-800 is architecture class W (VDR). TSO Supporting Functions

(1)

(2)

(3) Data Loading of Software and Databases - Ref: ARINC 758, SRD Application-level functionality may be field-modified by the transfer from portable media (disk or flash memory) of the UniLink and VDR software programs as well as databases that define the cockpit presentation, air/ground message types and formats, as well as the geographic location of VHF ground stations. Config Module Interface - Ref: ARINC 758, SRD An aircraft "personality module" is integrated with the UniLink to hold configuration data unique to the aircraft installation. This includes the physical connections as well as customer-specific operational preferences. BIT/Maintenance and Status Reporting - Ref: ARINC 758 Built-in-test and continuous health monitoring functions detect health of both internal components (memory, I/O devices, S/W validity, etc.) as well as external systems. Maintenance and Status reporting provides periodic output of the status of other connected aircraft peripherals. Errors are presented to the cockpit and logged internally for service and troubleshooting. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 103

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9) UL-801 Installation Manual VDL Mode A - Ref: ARINC 618, DO-186B VDL Mode A refers to the analog communication protocols exercised by the VHF data radio (VDR) and supported by the UniLink to exchange ACARS messages with any appropriately equipped ground system. This mode is equivalent to the plain old ACARS (POA) function of historical CMUs. SatCom Communication Interface - Ref: ARINC 618, ARINC 619 Satellite-based communication is available to the UniLink through a digital interface to an external satellite data unit (SDU). The SatCom interface provides an alternative media to VHF for the transmission of ACARS messages supporting FANS 1/A+, ACARS ATS, and AOC applications. Customer preferences usually prioritize the use of SatCom communications lower than VHF communications resulting in this function generally being used in Remote or Oceanic regions. ACARS - Ref: ARINC 618 The Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting System (ACARS) is a data link protocol and message structure which allows communication of character-

oriented data between aircraft systems and ground communication service provider systems. AOA - ACARS over AVLC Ref: ARINC 618 The AOA function transports ACARS messages using ACARS routing over VDL Mode 2 Aviation VHF Link Control (AVLC) - the data link layer. AOA provides a more efficient, digital exchange of air/ground ACARS messages than VDL Mode A. ACARS Air Traffic Services (for example, D-ATIS, PDC, OC) (TSO indirect) -

Ref: ARINC 622, ARINC 623 The ACARS ATS function is the exchange of text-based Air Traffic Services information between the flight crew and ATS ground host processing systems. These services include: Automatic Terminal Information Services (ATIS), Oceanic Clearances (OC), Pre-Departure Clearances (PDC), Terminal Weather Information for Pilots (TWIP), Pushback Clearances, and Expected Taxi Clearances. Airline Operations Control (AOC for example, text weather, weight, and balance) -

Ref: ARINC 620 The AOC function is the exchange of text-based information between the flight crew/aircraft systems and the operators AOC processing systems (for example, dispatch, maintenance, or meteorological services) throughout all phases of flight

(pre-flight, enroute, and post flight). Data included in the messages can be drawn from other aircraft systems (such as I/O concentrator buses or FMS units) or can be entered by the flight crew via a control and display unit.

(10) Datalink Message Recording - Ref: ARINC 758, ARINC 619 Intending to improve safety, enhance efficiency, and increase air traffic capacity, the trend of replacing voice communications between flight crews and air traffic control

(ATC) with datalink messages is becoming more prevalent. In order to aid in potential incident/accident investigations, UniLink supports transmission of datalink messaging records to an ARINC Characteristic 757 cockpit voice recorder (CVR). Records presented to the CVR include messages exchanged between the UniLink and 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 104 UL-801 Installation Manual CSPs and between the UniLink and peripheral devices, datalink-based crew actions, and other datalink events. Non-TSO Functions

(1) Telephony Communication Interface - Ref: SRD The telephony communication interface provides an alternate media for the limited transfer of operators AOC messages and weather graphics between the aircraft and the ground. The telephony interface uses industry standard protocols for access to an airborne telephone modem that is part of an on-board satellite communication system. Telephony messaging is supported through separate air-air/air-ground channels from other SATCOM ACARS ATS and FANS 1/A+ message functions. FANS 1/A+ Ops Credit for FANS - Ref: DO-258A, GOLD, ARINC 622 UniLink system functionality is greatly enhanced by offering a FANS-1/A +

implementation, which is intended to improve safety of flight, enhance efficiency, and increase capacity by replacing routine voice transmissions between flight crews and ATC with datalink messages during flight in oceanic and remote areas that have no or limited radar coverage. FANS operational credit can be applied for following UniLink installation airworthiness approval for aircraft that are properly equipped.

(2)

(3) Weather Graphics - Ref: SRD Graphical weather images can be requested by the crew and transferred by UniLink from the ground via the Telephony Communication Interface and presented on compatible display units (UASC only) in the cockpit. This facility is supported by ground AOC facilities complying with UASC-proprietary protocols and message formats. The images presented are intended for non-essential use. 2. Software Criticality SCN 10.X Main UniLink Bootloader Software Main UniLink Bootloader software version SCN 10.X is categorized as DO-178B Level D

(Minor). Level D software is defined by DO-178B as software whose anomalous behavior, as shown by the system safety assessment process, would cause or contribute to a failure of system function resulting in a minor failure condition for the aircraft. VDR Bootloader SCN 10.X The VDR boot software is partitioned from the VDR application and will be developed to Level D. The VDR boot software is stored in a flash memory device separate from that of the application software. Once the application software is invoked, the boot software is deactivated. VDR Transmit Monitor SCN 10.X The VDR transmit monitor software is partitioned from the VDR boot and application software and will be developed to Level C. The VDR transmit monitor software is stored and executes on a separate microcontroller residing on a different physical circuit card from that that hosts the VDR boot and application functions. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 105 UL-801 Installation Manual SCN 30.X Application Software Application software version SCN 30.X is categorized as DO-178B Level C (Major). Level C software is defined by DO-178B as software whose anomalous behavior, as shown by the system safety assessment process, would cause or contribute to a failure of system function resulting in a major failure condition for the aircraft. SCN 10.X VHF Data Radio Application Software VHF Data Radio Application software version SCN 10.X is categorized as DO-178C Level C (Major). Level C software is defined by DO-178B as software whose anomalous behavior, as shown by the system safety assessment process, would cause or contribute to a failure of system function resulting in a major failure condition for the aircraft. Instructions for Continuous Airworthiness, FAR 23.1529, 25.1529, 27.1529 and 29.1529 Our statement in compliance with FAR 23.1529, 25.1529, 27.1529 and 29.1529 follows:

Maintenance Requirements and Instructions for Continuous Airworthiness SYSTEM:

Universal Avionics Systems Corporation UniLink System Modification of an aircraft by this Supplemental Type Certificate or Form 337 obligates the aircraft operator to include the maintenance information provided by this document in the operators Aircraft Maintenance Manual and the operators Aircraft Scheduled Maintenance Program.

(1) Maintenance Manual information for the UniLink (system description, removal,

(2) installation, testing, etc.) is contained in Universal Avionics Systems Corporations

(UASC) Installation Manual 23-20-06. Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) part numbers and other necessary part numbers contained in the installation data package should be placed in the aircraft operators appropriate aircraft Illustrated Parts Catalog (IPC). Refer to Equipment Specifications, F. Electronic Part Marking, of this manual for additional parts marking information.

(4)

(3) Wiring diagram information contained in the aircraft installations data package should be placed into the aircraft operators appropriate aircraft Wiring Diagram Manuals. Installation specific electrical drawings, mechanical drawings and miscellaneous documents are listed on the data package Master Drawing List. The LRUs location and access requirements are as defined by the installer. Revision to this document will be accomplished via Service Bulletins and/or Installation Manual revision. The system performs full self-test BITE at each power on and any failures are annunciated to the crew.

(5)

(6)

(7) 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 106 3. UL-801 Installation Manual A. Airworthiness Limitations Scheduled Maintenance Program Scheduled Maintenance Program tasks to be added to the aircraft operators appropriate aircraft maintenance program are as follows:

(1)

(2) Recommended Periodic Scheduled Servicing Tasks:

None Required Recommended Periodic Scheduled Preventative Maintenance Tests/Checks to None Required determine System Condition and/or Latent Failures:

None Required Recommended Periodic Inspections:

None Required Recommended Periodic Structural Inspections:

Recommended Replacement Interval:

None Required

(3)

(4)

(5) Unscheduled Maintenance Program Unscheduled maintenance may include upgrade of the program software contained in the UniLink, upgrade of the Field Loadable software, or other modifications. If the UniLink is removed and the software changed, the configuration settings should be checked and amended as necessary in accordance with the instructions contained in applicable manuals. B. Compliance Universal Avionics has published two compliance reports for the UL-80X systems. These reports describe installation requirements that must be considered as part of the installation airworthiness approval. Contact Universal Avionics Product Support to receive the latest revisions of these reports. RPRT-2012-1005, AC 20-140A Compliance Report for the UL-80X UniLink LRU with Software SCN 30.X RPRT-2012-1007, UniLink UL-80X With Software SCN 30.X Compliance Summary Report 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 107 UL-801 Installation Manual 4. Environmental Qualification Forms The environmental categories under which the UniLink is approved (Reference RTCA DO 160F) are listed on the following Environmental Qualification Forms. ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORM NOMENCLATURE PART NO. TSO NUMBER MANUFACTURER Conditions Temperature and Altitude UniLink UL-801 10801-XX TSO-C160 Universal Avionics Systems Corporation 3260 East Universal Way Tucson, AZ 85756-5097 DO-160F Section # Category Description of Conducted Tests Inside or outside pressure vessel 55C to +70C Maximum altitude70,000 feet For the E1 levels that, per RTCA/DO-160F, are declared by the manufacturer, the corresponding levels for A2 are used. A2 E1 4 In-Flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Temperature Variation Humidity Operational Shocks and Crash Safety Vibration Explosion Atmosphere Waterproofness Fluids Susceptibility Sand and Dust Fungus Resistance X B A There is no fan on this product. Equipment in non-temperature controlled area of airplane. 5 degrees/minute Standard humidity B, E Equipment in fixed-wing and helicopters tested for operational shock and safety. S H W X X X Test category SStandard Equipment Hincluding hermetically sealed, contains hot spot surfaces and non-spark producing. Environment 2atmosphere where flammable mixture exist only because of spillage or leakage. Equipment subjected to falling water in course of normal airplane operations. Not testedFluid contamination not commonly encountered. Not testedNot subject to blowing sand and dust. Not testedEquipment not exposed to severe fungus contamination. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 108 UL-801 Installation Manual DO-160F Section # Category Description of Conducted Tests 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 X Z Z A Z ZC R M Not testedEquipment not subjected to salt atmosphere. Actual class will be measured. (The distance required to cause a compass needle deflection of one degree is measured and must be less than 0.3 meter to be considered compliant with Category Z.) DC generator systems with or without a battery. Not designated to transmit under emergency electrical system conditions. Equipment installed where high degree of protection against voltage spikes is required. Equipment intended for operation where interference free operation is required on an aircraft whose primary power is constant frequency or DC. HIRF conditions are part of normal environment. A3 G33 J33 Pin test performed to level A3; shielded cable bundle test performed to level J33; unshielded cable bundle test performed to level G33. NOTE: The pin test was performed to level A3 except for the Ethernet signal pins which were tested to Level A2. X X A X Conditions Salt Fog Magnetic Effect Power Input Voltage Spike Audio Frequency Conducted Susceptibility Induced Signal Susceptibility Radio Frequency Susceptibility (Radiated and Conducted) Emission of Radio Frequency Energy Lightning Induced Transient Susceptibility Lightning Direct Effects Icing Electrostatic Discharge Flammability 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 109 NOMENCLATURE PART NO. TSO NUMBER MANUFACTURER Conditions Temperature and Altitude UL-801 Installation Manual ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORM Configuration Module 108009 TSO-C160 Universal Avionics Systems Corporation 3260 East Universal Way Tucson, AZ 85756-5097 DO-160F Section # Category Description of Conducted Tests Inside or outside pressure vessel 55C to +70C Maximum altitude70,000 feet For the E1 levels that, per RTCA/DO-160F, are declared by the manufacturer, the corresponding levels for A2 are used. A2 E1 4 In-Flight Loss of Cooling 4.5.4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Temperature Variation Humidity Operational Shocks and Crash Safety Vibration Explosion Atmosphere Waterproofness Fluids Susceptibility Sand and Dust Fungus Resistance Salt Fog X B A There is no fan on this product. Equipment in non-temperature controlled area of airplane. 5 degrees/minute Standard humidity B, E Equipment in fixed-wing and helicopters tested for operational shock and safety. S H W X X X X Test category SStandard Equipment Hincluding hermetically sealed, contains hot spot surfaces and non-spark producing. Environment 2atmosphere where flammable mixture exist only because of spillage or leakage. Equipment subjected to falling water in course of normal airplane operations. Not testedFluid contamination not commonly encountered. Not testedNot subject to blowing sand and dust. Not testedEquipment not exposed to severe fungus contamination. Not testedEquipment not subjected to salt atmosphere. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 110 UL-801 Installation Manual DO-160F Section # Category Description of Conducted Tests 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Z Z A Z ZC R M Actual class will be measured. (The distance required to cause a compass needle deflection of one degree is measured and must be less than 0.3 meter to be considered compliant with Category Z.) DC generator systems with or without a battery. Not designated to transmit under emergency electrical system conditions. Equipment installed where high degree of protection against voltage spikes is required. Equipment intended for operation where interference free operation is required on an aircraft whose primary power is constant frequency or DC. HIRF conditions are part of normal environment. A3 G33 J33 Pin test performed to level A3; shielded cable bundle test performed to level J33; unshielded cable bundle test performed to level G33. X X A X Conditions Magnetic Effect Power Input Voltage Spike Audio Frequency Conducted Susceptibility Induced Signal Susceptibility Radio Frequency Susceptibility (Radiated and Conducted) Emission of Radio Frequency Energy Lightning Induced Transient Susceptibility Lightning Direct Effects Icing Electrostatic Discharge Flammability 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 111 UL-801 Installation Manual 5. Sample Airplane Flight Manual Supplement Prepare an Airplane Flight Manual Supplement using the following sample as a guide. NOTE:

Comments in angle brackets, < >, and italics are explanatory only and should not appear in the final supplement.

<Name of Applicant> AFM Supplement for <Aircraft Model>

<Address>

Supplement No.

{SAMPLE}

FAA APPROVED FOR AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT AIRCRAFT MAKE: __________________________________ AIRCRAFT MODEL: ________________________________ AIRCRAFT REG: ___________________________________ AIRCRAFT S/N: ___________________________________ This supplement must be attached to the FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual when the airplane is modified by the installation of a Universal Avionics Systems Corporation (UASC) UniLink System, in accordance with STC ____________________________, (or Form 337). The information contained herein supplements or supersedes the basic manual only in those areas listed herein. For limitations, procedures, and performance information not contained in this supplement, consult the appropriate basic Airplane Flight Manual. FAA Approved:

<Name>

<Title>

FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION

<Name of Aircraft Certification Office>

<Address>

FAA Approved Date:

Page 1 of y 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 112 UL-801 Installation Manual REVISION HISTORY Sheet 1-.. Rev N/C Description Original Document Approved Date:_________________ ______________________

(Name)

(Title) FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION

(Name of Aircraft Certification Office)

(Address) 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 113 UL-801 Installation Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS Section 1 2 3 4 5 Title General Limitations Emergency and Abnormal Procedures Normal Procedures Performance Data Page 4 5 8 9 12 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 114 UL-801 Installation Manual Section 1 - General A. Installation Description

<The following is a sample of how the introduction could read. Fully describe all interfaces with the UniLink.>

The Universal Avionics Systems Corporation UniLink installation is interfaced with up to three UASC Flight Management Systems. The UniLink contains software 30.X. Section 2 - Limitations A. Operators Manual B. The UniLink Operators Manual, report number 23-20-06.01, must be available to the flight crew when UniLink is to be used during flight. <If FANS is enabled, this report number is 23-20-06.02.>. Limitations When a UniLink CDU/MCDU message display screen is labeled Unverified or AOC, the Aircraft Communications and Reporting System (ACARS) is unable to ensure that message content was not corrupted during transmission. Unverified messages must be restricted to those that do not create an unsafe condition if:

(1)

(2)

(3) The message is not received. The message is delivered to the wrong recipient. The message content may be frequently corrupted. NOTE: Unverified message contents should be treated as advisory only. Section 3 - Emergency and Abnormal Procedures No change to FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual. Page x of y 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 115 UL-801 Installation Manual Section 4 - Normal Procedures Normal operating procedures are outlined in the UniLink Operators Manual, report number 23-20-06.01. <If FANS is enabled, this report number is 23-20-06.02.>. Section 5 Performance Data No change to FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 116 UL-801 Installation Manual Equipment Specifications 1. UniLink Equipment Specifications A. UniLink Part Number Matrix 10801 -

XX Basic Part Number Hardware Variant 00 = Baseline 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 201 UL-801 Installation Manual B. UniLink Installation Kit

(1) Installation Kit P/N K12030-1 Quantity 1 6 1 2 2 Part Number 13636-93601-2 or 93601-2 Description Rack, ARINC 600, 1 MCU (Barry Controls) MS24693C4 1219 MS51957-20 MS21083C04 Screw, Recessed, Cres, 100 CSK, 4-40 x 3/8 Rack Connector Screw, 4-40 x 7/8, Cres (for configuration module) Nut, 4-40, Cres, Self Lock (for configuration module) NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used for the listed items in the installation kits. C. Power Specifications The UniLink will continue to operate with a 19.0V power input. Component Model Part No. Current/Power

(Amps @ VDC)/Watts 22.0V Min 27.5V Nominal 32.0V Max STBY TX STBY TX STBY Inrush Current

(Amps @ VDC) 22.0V Min 27.5V Nominal 32.0V Max UL-801 10801-XX 1A;

22.0W 3.5A typical

@ 77W 7A maximum

@ 154W 0.9A;

24.8W 3.5A typical

@ 96W 7A maximum

@ 192W 0.7A;

22.4W TX 3.5A typical @

maximum

@ 224W 112W 2.5A @

<100ms 7A 2.5A @

<100ms 2.5A @

<100ms NOTE: The UL-801 is designed to operate using a 5A circuit breaker. The UL-801 VDR Transmit Message Duty Cycle is < 750ms. D. Equipment Weights Component UL-801 UniLink Equipment Rack Connector Configuration Module Weight Approximately 4.5 Lbs. 11.5 Oz. 5.6 Oz. 0.5 Oz. E. VHF Antenna Specifications Antenna Specifications Coax Cable Attenuation Impedance Frequency Range Power Rating

< 3 dB 50 Ohms 118.000 136.975 15W - 35W 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 202 UL-801 Installation Manual F. Electronic Part Marking UniLink supports Electronic Part Marking and is in compliance with FAA Order Number 8110.49 which allows verification of the installed part number and software versions by accessing pages on the connected display device such as a CDU or MCDU. The UniLink nameplate, as shown below, makes reference to the Installation Manual (IM) where such information can be found. Per FAA Order number 8110.49, there should be a process in place to ensure that maintenance personnel record loaded Field Loadable Software (FLS) part number in the necessary maintenance logs. When new software is loaded into the unit, it is the maintenance personnels responsibility to ensure that the software part number has been logged and verified before the unit/aircraft is returned to service. Changes to software part number, version, and/or operational characteristics should be reflected in the Operators Manual, Aircraft Flight Manual, Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement, and/or any other appropriate document. R AIRBORNE DATALINK UL-800 P/N 10800-00 SOFTWARE VERIFICATION AND VALIDATION DO - 178B LEVEL C SCN ELECTRONIC MARKING SEE IM 23-20-05 TSO-C160 (Dev) EQUIPMENT CLASS SEE IM 23-20-05 MANUFACTURED BY TUCSON AZ 85756 U.S.A. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 203 UL-801 Installation Manual G. Equipment Drawings

(1) UL-801 (P/N 10801-XX) Outline Drawing

. 1 2

. 5 1

) 3

. 8

(

) 5

.

(

. 1 1

. 1 G C G C

. 1 6

. 7 G C

) 2

. 4

(

2

%

5 S B L 4 5

. 4

:

1 0 8 0 1 T H G I E W

. 1 S Y E K N O I T A Z I R A L O P R O T C E N N O C 0 0 6 C N I

. R A 8 0

#

N O I T I E D O C S O P 2 O T 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 204 UL-801 Installation Manual

(2) Rack Drawing (P/N 13636-93601-2)

, 0 5 2

. 2 9 4 1

. 7 7 1

. 2 0 0

. 0 0 0

. 9 I A D 5 0 0

. 0 0 9 3 0

. 3 2

. 1 K S C 0 0 1 x S E C A L P 2 0 2 7 2 1

. 0 2 2 2 1

. R A E R X O R P P A I T N U F O

) F E R

(

R O T C E N N O C

, I A D 5 0 0

. 0 0 3 2

. 0 5 6 9

. 1 5 4 5

. 0 0 2 0

. 6 0 0

. 7 T N O R F

, I R E N A T E R

) 4

-

8 0 1 4 1 S M

(

K S C 0 0 1 x S E C A L P 6 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 205 UL-801 Installation Manual

(3) Configuration Module (P/N 108009)

.875"

.282"

1.200"

(4) Configuration Module Installation Detail 108009 CONFIGURATION MODULE CONNECTOR UL801 RACK CONNECTOR KEYING ARINC 600 #08 POLARIZATION

(BLACK SEGMENT INDICATES RACK POST) 4-40 SCREWS AND NUTS NOTE: The darkened portion of the rack connector above indicates the extended part of the key;

the light portion indicates the key hole. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 206 H. Signal Specifications UL-801 Installation Manual Digital Inputs

(a)

(1) Label FMS ARINC 429 Broadcast Data Description Format 102 Selected Altitude 116 Cross-track Distance 147 Magnetic Variation 150 UTC 203 Pressure Altitude 204 Baro-Corrected Altitude 205 Mach 206 Indicated Air Speed True Air Speed 210 212 Altitude Rate 213 Static Air Temperature 231 Actual Navigation Performance WPT 233 Selected Cross-track 251 Along Track Distance to 252 Estimated Time to Waypoint 260 Date 270 Status 272 Active Leg Attributes 310 Present Latitude 311 Present Longitude 312 Ground Speed 313 True Track Angle 314 True Heading 315 Wind Speed 316 True Wind Angle 320 Magnetic Heading BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BCD BCD BNR BNR BCD DSC DSC BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR UNS HS429-1 TX Rate

(ms) 200 100 1000 1000 100 100 500 500

(NOTE 2) 100 100 500 500 500 1000 500 1000 100 100 100 100 100 1000 100 1000 1000 100

(NOTE 1) ARINC 429 HS TX Rate

(ms) N/A 100 500 1000 1000 500 N/A N/A 500 N/A 1000 500 N/A 500 Notes Crew selected via CP. Cross-track distance is relative to SXTK TX rate ARINC 429 HS bus = 100 ms. N/A N/A ADC dependent. Baro-corrected altitude is output if available. N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Crew selected offset from the flight plan. N/A 500 500 500 N/A 100 100 500 500 100 500 500 100 N/A N/A N/A Contains flight phase data. N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

(NOTE 2) N/A 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 207 UL-801 Installation Manual Label Description Format 325 Roll Angle 370 WGS-84/GNSS Height 371 Equipment ID BNR BNR DSC UNS HS429-1 TX Rate

(ms) 100

(NOTE 1) Notes ARINC 429 HS TX Rate

(ms) 100

(NOTE 2) N/A 1000 1000 N/A 1000 N/A NOTE: 1. When in DEMO mode, the label is not transmitted. 2. Label is output during DEMO mode when IRS ATT OUTPUTS is set active. When IRS ATT OUTPUTS is set inactive, these labels are inhibited during DEMO mode.

(b) 702A FMS ARINC 429 Broadcast Data Description Label 203 Pressure Altitude 210 True Air Speed 213 Static Air Temperature 314 True Heading 315 Wind Speed 316 True Wind Angle

(c) ARINC 741 SDU Broadcast Data Label 270 Status Description Format Transmission Rate (ms) BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR 1000 500 1000 100 500 500 Format Transmission Rate (ms) DSC 1000

(d) ARINC 740/744A Printer Broadcast Data Label 350 Description Printer Status Format Transmission Rate (ms) DSC 1000

(e) DHC8-S400 IOP Bus #1 and IOP Bus #2 Broadcast Data ARINC 429 Description Label 107 Selected Flap Position 164 Radio Altimeter 1 164 Radio Altimeter 2 176 Left Engine Fuel Temperature 176 Right Engine Fuel Temperature 204 Baro Alt 1 (cor) 204 Baro Alt 2 (cor) 205 Mach Number 1 205 Mach Number 2 206 Calib Airspeed 1 206 Calib Airspeed 2 Format BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR Source FCU RA 1 RA 2 FMU 1 (IOP 1) FMU 2 (IOP 2) ADU 1 ADU 2 ADU 1 ADU 2 ADU 1 ADU 2 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 208 UL-801 Installation Manual Format Description BNR True Airspeed 1 (TAS) BNR True Airspeed 2 (TAS) BNR Total Air Temp 1 BNR Total Air Temp 2 BNR Altitude Rate 1 BNR Altitude Rate 2 BNR Static Air Temp 1 (SAT) BNR Static Air Temp 2 (SAT) BNR Left Fuel Flow BNR Right Fuel Flow BNR Left Gas Gen Speed (NL) BNR Right Gas Gen Speed (NL) BNR Left Gas Gen Speed (NH) BNR Right Gas Gen Speed (NH) BNR Total Fuel Qty Lbs BNR Left Tank Fuel Qty Lbs BNR Right Tank Fuel Qty Lbs BNR IOP 1 Discrete Word 1 BNR IOP 2 Discrete Word 2 BNR Left Engine Oil Temp BNR Right Engine Oil Temp BNR Left Eng Oil Pressure BNR Right Eng Oil Pressure BNR Roll Altitude 1 BNR Roll Altitude 2 BNR Left Engine Torque BNR Right Engine Torque BNR Left ITT BNR Right ITT BNR Left Propeller BNR Right Propeller Label 210 210 211 211 212 212 213 213 244 244 245 245 246 246 247 256 256 270 270 316 316 317 317 325 325 336 336 345 345 346 346 Source ADU 1 ADU 2 ADU 1 ADU 2 ADU 1 ADU 2 ADU 1 ADU 2 Left Fuel Flow Meter Right Fuel Flow Meter FADEC 1 (A/B) FADEC 2 (A/B) FADEC 1 (A/B) FADEC 2 (A/B) FQC FQC FQC IOP 1 IOP 2 FADEC 1 (A/B) FADEC 2 (A/B) Left Eng Oil Pres Meter (IOP 1) Right Eng Oil Pres Meter (IOP 2) AHRS 1 AHRS 2 FADEC 1 (A/B) FADEC 2 (A/B) FADEC 1 (A/B) FADEC 2 (A/B) FADEC 1 (A/B) FADEC 2 (A/B)

(f) ARINC 739A MCDU Broadcast Data Label 172 270 377 Description System Identification Word MCDU Status Word #1 MCDU Identifier Word Format DSC DSC DSC Transmission Rate (ms) 1000 1000 1000 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 209 UL-801 Installation Manual

(g) ARINC 743 GNSS Broadcast Data Label 076 103 110 111 112 150 165 260 273 Description GNSS Altitude GNSS Track Angle GNSS Latitude GNSS Longitude GNSS Ground Speed UTC Time Vertical Velocity Date GNSS Sensor Status

(h) 604 CMC ARINC 429 Broadcast data Label 270 Status Description Format BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BCD DSC Format DSC

(2) Digital Outputs

(a) Standard UniLink Broadcast Data ARINC 429 Label 172 214 216 270 276 350 351 Description System Identification Word ICAO Aircraft Address Word #1 ICAO Aircraft Address Word #2 Status Word #1 Status Word #2 Maintenance Word #1 Maintenance Word #2 Format DSC DSC DSC DSC DSC DSC DSC Transmission Rate (ms) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Transmission Rate (ms) 1000 Transmission Rate (ms) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 210 UL-801 Installation Manual I. HS-429-1 Bus UniLink NOTE: Although there are HS-429-1 labels available for GLS, TAWS, and Vision-1, only the labels for UniLink are shown in the following table. Label Definition 150 Greenwich Mean Time 204 213 Barometric Altitude (429 GAMA) Static Air Temperature Format BNR BNR BNR Poll Word (ENQ) from MDF Full Data Word Partial Data Word Protocol Word Solo Word Start of Transmission End of Transmission Time to Go (429 GAMA) 234 234 Clear to Send Word (CTS) from MDF 234 Synchronization Word (SYN) from MDF 234 Button-Push Word (BPW) from MDF 234 ACK Word from User System from MDF 234 NAK Word from User System from MDF 235 235 235 235 235 235 252 260 Date 261 GPS Discrete Word 1 (429 GAMA) 310 311 312 Ground Speed 315 Wind Speed 316 340 341 True Wind Speed Present Position Fine Latitude Present Position Fine Longitude Present Position Latitude Present Position Longitude BNR BCD DSC BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR BNR TX Rate 1000 ms 100 ms 100 ms 500 ms As required 1000 ms and as required 500 ms 1000 ms 1000 ms 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 1000 ms 1000 ms 100 ms 100 ms Update Rate 100 ms 500 ms 1 per sec. 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 211 UL-801 Installation Manual J. Configurable LRUs Item Configurable LRU Qty Supported by UL-80X (I/O Type) Input Data Equipment A743 GPS/A743A GNSS DHC8 IOP Digital ADC UASC FMS/CDU A702 FMS 604 CMC VM CMC Generic Device Display Equipment UASC A739A MCDU Standard A739A MCDU EFI-890R MFD-640 CDU Remote CDU/MCDU (UASC) Transmission Media Internal VHF Radio (VDR) (UL-801 only) A750 VDR (UL-800 only) A741 SDU Telephony 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 (A429) 2 (A429) 2 (A429) 3 (A429) 3 (A429) 1 (A429) 1 (A429) 1 (A429) 3 (A429) 3 (A429) 2 (RS-422) 1 (RS-422) 3 (RS-422) 2 (RS-422) 1 (A429) 1 (NA) 1 (A429) 1 (RS-232) NOTE 1: The ADC interface is used as a supplement to FANS required air data that was not supplied by the FMS such as Mach Number and IAS. The ADC interface can still be used to supplement this FMS data in the case the data from the FMS may be invalid or NCD. NOTE 2: A maximum of six total display devices can be configured at a time, one high-resolution device on each of two high-res ports and up to four low-resolution devices on the low-res port. An RCDU has a separate display processor from the master CDU/MCDU that it is connected to. NOTE 3: The diagnostic RS-232 port is a dedicated connection and is not a configurable item of the general purpose RS-232/422 serial channels. NOTE 4: The AirCell ground-based cellular network has been decommissioned by AirCell.

"Iridium/AirCell" equipment will continue to be supported; the "AirCell" only equipment support has been removed. NOTE 5: UL-80X does not support tip/ring telephony devices (Magnastar, UASC T T Aero-I, AirCell only). Serial telephony devices are supported (Iridium, UASC T T Aero-M). 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 212 UL-801 Installation Manual Installation and Wiring 1. A. UniLink Mounting Installation Considerations for UniLink Mounting The UniLink may be installed inside or outside of the pressure vessel. The UniLink must not be mounted next to excessive heat producing equipment or in such a way as to impede normal convection cooling and it must not be mounted with its rear connector up. The UniLink may be mounted in any rotational direction in an upright position. The UniLink rack must be grounded to the airframe by use of proper bonding methods. This provides a positive grounding of the rack to which data shields may be connected. 2. Wiring Diagrams The following wiring diagrams show connections between the UL-801 and other avionics equipment used in typical installations. Refer to the appropriate FMS technical manual for additional required wiring. These diagrams include our suggested choices for configurable discretes and communications ports but the choice is left up to the discretion of the installer. Mark the configuration worksheets to show your actual installation. Configuration worksheets are found in the System Data Installation section of this manual. NOTE: The FMS must have SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later in order to utilize FANS. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 301

#1 UNS-1C

(P/N 1017-XX-2XX) A B A B A B A B ARINC 429 RX 4 HS ARINC 429 TX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX

#2 UNS-1C

(P/N 1017-XX-2XX) A B A B A B A B ARINC 429 RX 4 HS ARINC 429 TX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX 1 1 t r Z X 1 1 t r Z X P1 P2 P1 P2 UL-801 Installation Manual A. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1C

(1) Sheet 1 of 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) ARINC 429 TX #1 (FMS 1) ARINC 429 RX #1 (FMS 1) 3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX #3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX #3 ARINC 429 TX #2 (FMS 2) ARINC 429 RX #2 (FMS 2) 3 A B A B A B A B A B A B

----CONTINUED----

MP TP MP 1A 1B 1C 1D 9A 9B 9C 9D 2A 2B 2C 2D 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 302 UL-801 Installation Manual

(2) Sheet 2 of 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801XX)

----CONTINUED----

VHF ANTENNA

+28 VDC POWER POWER GND CHASSIS GND CONFIG MODULE DATA CLK

+5 VDC DATA I/O GND DISCRETE INPUT #3 5 DISCRETE INPUT #4 BP TP MP 20 20 20 16 24 24 24 24 5 2 4 3 11C 11D 12C 12D 12B 12C VHF ANTENNA 5A

+28 VDC CONFIGURATION MODULE (P/N 108009) 2 YELLOW RED BLUE BROWN PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 6 NOTE:

ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 1 2 3 4 5 6 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS. CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK. IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE. UNS1C, P/N 1017XX2XX, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY DATA). UNS1C, P/N 1017XX1XX, SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT DISPLAYS ONLY. DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 INPUT DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 303 B. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1C+

UL-801 Installation Manual

(1) Sheet 1 of 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) ARINC 429 TX #1 (FMS 1) ARINC 429 RX #1 (FMS 1) 3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX #3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX #3 ARINC 429 TX #2 (FMS 2) ARINC 429 RX #2 (FMS 2) 3 A B A B A B A B A B A B MP TP MP 1A 1B 1C 1D 9A 9B 9C 9D 2A 2B 2C 2D

----CONTINUED----

#1 UNS-1C+

(P/N 10172-XX-2XX) A B A B A B A B ARINC 429 RX 4 HS ARINC 429 TX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX

#2 UNS-1C+

(P/N 10172-XX-2XX) A B A B A B A B ARINC 429 RX 4 HS ARINC 429 TX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX P1 P2 1 1 t r Z X 1 1 P1 P2 t r Z X 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 304 UL-801 Installation Manual

(2) Sheet 2 of 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX)

----CONTINUED----

VHF ANTENNA

+28 VDC POWER POWER GND CHASSIS GND CONFIG MODULE DATA CLK

+5 VDC DATA I/O GND DISCRETE INPUT #3 5 DISCRETE INPUT #4 20 20 20 16 24 24 24 24 BP TP MP 5 2 4 3 11C 11D 12C 12D 12B 12C VHF ANTENNA 5A

+28 VDC CONFIGURATION MODULE (P/N 108009) 2 YELLOW RED BLUE BROWN PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 6 NOTE:

ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 1 2 3 4 5 6 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS. CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK. IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE. UNS1C+, P/N 10172XX2XX, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY DATA). UNS1C+, P/N 10172XX1XX, SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT DISPLAYS ONLY. DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 INPUT DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 305 UL-801 Installation Manual C. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1E

(1) Sheet 1 of 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) ARINC 429 TX #1 (FMS 1) ARINC 429 RX #1 (FMS 1) 3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX #3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX #3 ARINC 429 TX #2 (FMS 2) ARINC 429 RX #2 (FMS 2) 3 A B A B A B A B A B A B MP TP MP 1A 1B 1C 1D 9A 9B 9C 9D 2A 2B 2C 2D

----CONTINUED----

#1 UNS-1E

(P/N 2017-XX-2XX) A B A B A B A B ARINC 429 RX 4 HS ARINC 429 TX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX

#2 UNS-1E

(P/N 2017-XX-2XX) A B A B A B A B ARINC 429 RX 4 HS ARINC 429 TX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX 1 1 t r Z X 1 1 t r Z X P1 P2 P1 P2 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 306 UL-801 Installation Manual

(2) Sheet 2 of 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX)

----CONTINUED----

VHF ANTENNA VHF ANTENNA

+28 VDC POWER POWER GND CHASSIS GND CONFIG MODULE DATA CLK

+5 VDC DATA I/O GND DISCRETE INPUT #3 5 DISCRETE INPUT #4 20 20 20 16 24 24 24 24 BP TP MP 5 2 4 3 11C 11D 12C 12D 12B 12C 5A

+28 VDC CONFIGURATION MODULE (P/N 108009) 2 YELLOW RED BLUE BROWN PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 6 NOTE:

ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 1 2 3 4 5 6 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS. CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK. IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE. UNS1E, P/N 2017XX2XX, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY DATA). UNS1E, P/N 2017XX1XX, SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT DISPLAYS ONLY. DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 307 UL-801 Installation Manual D. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Csp MP TP MP 1A 1B 1C 1D 9A 9B 9C 9D 2A 2B 2C 2D

(1) Sheet 1 of 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) ARINC 429 TX #1 (FMS 1) ARINC 429 RX #1 (FMS 1) 3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX #3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX #3 ARINC 429 TX #2 (FMS 2) ARINC 429 RX #2 (FMS 2) 3 A B A B A B A B A B A B

----CONTINUED----

#1 UNS-1Csp

(P/N 1019-XX-2XX) A B A B A B A B ARINC 429 RX 4 HS ARINC 429 TX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX

#2 UNS-1Csp

(P/N 1019-XX-2XX) A B A B A B A B ARINC 429 RX 4 HS ARINC 429 TX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX P2 P2 1 1 50 49 48 47 1 1 50 49 48 47 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 308 UL-801 Installation Manual

(2) Sheet 2 of 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX)

----CONTINUED----

VHF ANTENNA

+28 VDC POWER POWER GND CHASSIS GND 5 2 4 3 CONFIG MODULE DATA CLK

+5 VDC DATA I/O GND 11C 11D 12C 12D BP TP MP 20 20 16 24 24 24 24 VHF ANTENNA 5A

+28 VDC CONFIGURATION MODULE (P/N 108009) 2 YELLOW RED BLUE BROWN DISCRETE INPUT #3 12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 5 DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 6 NOTE:

ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 1 2 3 4 5 6 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS. CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK. IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE. UNS1Csp, P/N 1019XX2XX, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY DATA). UNS1Csp, P/N 1019XX1XX, SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT DISPLAYS ONLY. DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 309 UL-801 Installation Manual E. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1Esp

(1) Sheet 1 of 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) ARINC 429 TX #1 (FMS 1) ARINC 429 RX #1 (FMS 1) 3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX #3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX #3 ARINC 429 TX #2 (FMS 2) ARINC 429 RX #2 (FMS 2) 3 A B A B A B A B A B A B MP TP MP 1A 1B 1C 1D 9A 9B 9C 9D 2A 2B 2C 2D

----CONTINUED----

#1 UNS-1Esp

(P/N 2019-XX-2XX) A B A B A B A B ARINC 429 RX 4 HS ARINC 429 TX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX

#2 UNS-1Esp

(P/N 2019-XX-2XX) A B A B A B A B ARINC 429 RX 4 HS ARINC 429 TX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX P2 P2 1 1 50 49 48 47 1 1 50 49 48 47 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 310 UL-801 Installation Manual

(2) Sheet 2 of 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX)

----CONTINUED----

VHF ANTENNA

+28 VDC POWER POWER GND CHASSIS GND CONFIG MODULE DATA CLK

+5 VDC DATA I/O GND DISCRETE INPUT #3 5 DISCRETE INPUT #4 BP TP MP 20 20 20 16 24 24 24 24 5 2 4 3 11C 11D 12C 12D 12B 12C VHF ANTENNA 5A

+28 VDC CONFIGURATION MODULE (P/N 108009) 2 YELLOW RED BLUE BROWN PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 6 NOTE:

ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 1 2 3 4 5 6 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS. CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK. IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE. UNS1Esp, P/N 2019XX2XX, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY DATA). UNS1Esp, P/N 2019XX1XX, SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT DISPLAYS ONLY. DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 311 UL-801 Installation Manual F. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1D

(1) Sheet 1 of 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) VHF ANTENNA

+28 VDC POWER POWER GND CHASSIS GND CONFIG MODULE DATA CLK

+5 VDC DATA I/O GND 5 2 4 3 11C 11D 12C 12D BP TP MP 20 20 16 24 24 24 24 DISCRETE INPUT #3 12B 6 DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 2B 2C 2D MP A B A B A B A B ARINC 429 TX #1

(FMS 1) ARINC 429 RX #1

(FMS 1) 3 ARINC 429 TX #2

(FMS 2) ARINC 429 RX #2

(FMS 2) 3

----CONTINUED----

VHF ANTENNA 5A

+28 VDC CONFIGURATION MODULE (P/N 108009) YELLOW RED BLUE BROWN PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 7 1 1 1 1

#1 UNS-1D

(P/N 1192-X0-111XXX) A B A B ARINC 429 RX HS ARINC 429 TX

#2 UNS-1D

(P/N 1192-X0-111XXX) A B A B ARINC 429 RX HS ARINC 429 TX 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 312 UL-801 Installation Manual

(2) Sheet 2 of 2 - 4/5 FPCDU/MCDU UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX)

----CONTINUED----

TP RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX #3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX #3 A B A B 9A 9B 9C 9D NOTE:

ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 5 5

#1 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU

(P/N 1117-X-X1X, P/N 1018-X-X1X, P/N 1025-XX-XXX) P3 4 E F B C D P3 4 E F B C D A B A B RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX SHIELD GND

#2 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU

(P/N 1117-X-X1X, P/N 1018-X-X1X, P/N 1025-XX-XXX) A B A B RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX SHIELD GND 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS. CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK. IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE. THE P3 CONNECTOR IS AMPHENOL P/N MS27473T12F8SC AND IS INCLUDED IN THE APPROPRIATE UNS-1D INSTALLATION KIT. THE 5 FPCDU, P/N 1018-2-X10, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY DATA). OTHER 5 FPCDUs, P/N 1018-X-X00, SUPPORT UNILINK TEXT ONLY DISPLAYS. DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED. BOTH 4 AND 5 FPCDUs ARE WIRED IN THE SAME MANNER. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 313 UL-801 Installation Manual G. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1D+

(1) Sheet 1 of 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) VHF ANTENNA

+28 VDC POWER POWER GND CHASSIS GND CONFIG MODULE DATA CLK

+5 VDC DATA I/O GND DISCRETE INPUT #3 6 DISCRETE INPUT #4 A B A B A B A B ARINC 429 TX #1

(FMS 1) ARINC 429 RX #1

(FMS 1) 3 ARINC 429 TX #2

(FMS 2) ARINC 429 RX #2

(FMS 2) 3

----CONTINUED----

20 20 16 24 24 24 24 BP TP MP MP 5 2 4 3 11C 11D 12C 12D 12B 12C 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 2B 2C 2D VHF ANTENNA 5A

+28 VDC CONFIGURATION MODULE (P/N 108009) 2 YELLOW RED BLUE BROWN PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 7 3 1 1 1 1

#1 UNS-1D+

(P/N 11922-X0-111XXX) A ARINC 429 RX B A B HS ARINC 429 TX

#2 UNS-1D+

(P/N 11922-X0-111XXX) A B A B ARINC 429 RX HS ARINC 429 TX 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 314 UL-801 Installation Manual

(2) Sheet 2 of 2 - 4/5 FPCDU/MCDU UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX)

----CONTINUED----

TP P3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX #3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX #3 A B A B 9A 9B 9C 9D A B

#1 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU

(P/N 1117-X-X1X, P/N 1018-X-X1X, P/N 1025-XX-XXX) A B A B RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX SHIELD GND 4 E F B C D

#2 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU

(P/N 1117-X-X1X, P/N 1018-X-X1X, P/N 1025-XX-XXX) 4 P3 E F B C D A B A B RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX SHIELD GND 8 NOTE:

ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 5 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS. CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK. IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE. THE P3 CONNECTOR IS AMPHENOL P/N MS27473T12F8SC AND IS INCLUDED IN THE APPROPRIATE UNS-1D+ INSTALLATION KIT. THE 5 FPCDU, P/N 1018-2-X10, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY DATA). OTHER 5 FPCDUs, P/N 1018-X-X00, SUPPORT UNILINK TEXT ONLY DISPLAYS. DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED. BOTH 4 AND 5 FPCDUs ARE WIRED IN THE SAME MANNER. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 315 UL-801 Installation Manual H. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1F

(1) Sheet 1 of 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) VHF ANTENNA

+28 VDC POWER POWER GND CHASSIS GND CONFIG MODULE DATA CLK

+5 VDC DATA I/O GND 5 2 4 3 11C 11D 12C 12D BP TP MP 20 20 16 24 24 24 24 VHF ANTENNA 5A

+28 VDC CONFIGURATION MODULE

(P/N 108009) 2 YELLOW RED BLUE BROWN DISCRETE INPUT #3 12B 6 DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 7 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 2B 2C 2D MP A B A B A B A B ARINC 429 TX #1

(FMS 1) ARINC 429 RX #1

(FMS 1) 3 ARINC 429 TX #2

(FMS 2) ARINC 429 RX #2

(FMS 2) 3

----CONTINUED----

1 1 1 1

#1 UNS-1F

(P/N 2192-X0-111XXX) A ARINC 429 RX B A B HS ARINC 429 TX

#2 UNS-F

(P/N 2192-X0-111XXX) A B A B ARINC 429 RX HS ARINC 429 TX 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 316 UL-801 Installation Manual

(2) Sheet 2 of 2 - 4/5 FPCDU/MCDU UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX)

----CONTINUED----

TP P3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX #3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX #3 A B A B 9A 9B 9C 9D

#1 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU

(P/N 1117-X-X1X, P/N 1018-X-X1X, P/N 1025-XX-XXX) A B A B RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX SHIELD GND 4 E F B C D

#2 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU

(P/N 1117-X-X1X, P/N 1018-X-X1X, P/N 1025-XX-XXX) P3 4 E F B C D A B A B RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX SHIELD GND 8 NOTE:

ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 5 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS. CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK. IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE. THE P3 CONNECTOR IS AMPHENOL P/N MS27473T12F8SC AND IS INCLUDED IN THE APPROPRIATE UNS-1D+ INSTALLATION KIT. THE 5 FPCDU, P/N 1018-2-X10, SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY DATA). OTHER 5 FPCDUs, P/N 1018-X-X00, SUPPORT UNILINK TEXT ONLY DISPLAYS. DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED. BOTH 4 AND 5 FPCDUs ARE WIRED IN THE SAME MANNER. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 317 UL-801 Installation Manual I. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1K

(1) Sheet 1 of 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) VHF ANTENNA

+28 VDC INPUT POWER GND CHASSIS GND 5 2 4 3 CONFIG MODULE DATA CLK

+5 VDC DATA I/O GND 11C 11D 12C 12D BP TP MP 20 20 16 24 24 24 24 VHF ANTENNA 3

+28 VDC CONFIGURATION MODULE (P/N 10651) YELLLOW RED BLUE BROWN 2 DISCRETE INPUT #3 12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 5 DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 6 A B A B A B A B 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 2B 2C 2D MP ARINC 429 Tx #1

(FMS 1) ARINC 429 Rx #1

(FMS 1) 3 ARINC 429 Tx #2

(FMS 2) ARINC 429 Rx #2

(FMS 2) 3

----CONTINUED----

4 4

#1 UNS-1K

(P/N 1116-XX-111X) A B A B ARINC 429 Rx HS ARINC 429 Tx

#2 UNS-1K

(P/N 1116-XX-111X) A B A B ARINC 429 Rx HS ARINC 429 Tx 1 1 1 1 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 318 UL-801 Installation Manual

(2) Sheet 2 of 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX)

----CONTINUED----

TP RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX #3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX #3 A B A B 9A 9B 9C 9D P3 4

#1 4" FPCDU/MCDU

(P/N 1117-X-X1X) E F B C D A B A B RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX SHIELD GND P3 4

#2 4" FPCDU/MCDU

(P/N 1117-X-X1X) E F B C D A B A B RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX SHIELD GND NOTE:

ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 1 2 3 4 5 6 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS. CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK. IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE. THE P3 CONNECTOR IS AMPHENOL P/N MS27473T12F8SC AND IS INCLUDED IN THE APPROPRIATE UNS-1K INSTALLATION KIT. DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 319 UL-801 Installation Manual J. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1K+

(1) Sheet 1 of 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) VHF ANTENNA

+28 VDC POWER POWER GND CHASSIS GND 5 2 4 3 CONFIG MODULE DATA CLK

+5 VDC DATA I/O GND 11C 11D 12C 12D BP TP MP 20 20 16 24 24 24 24 VHF ANTENNA 5A

+28 VDC CONFIGURATION MODULE (P/N 108009) 2 YELLLOW RED BLUE BROWN DISCRETE INPUT #3 12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 5 DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 6 A B A B A B A B 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 2B 2C 2D MP ARINC 429 TX #1

(FMS 1) ARINC 429 RX #1

(FMS 1) 3 ARINC 429 TX #2

(FMS 2) ARINC 429 RX #2

(FMS 2) 3

----CONTINUED----

4 4

#1 UNS-1K+

(P/N 11162-XX-111X) A B A B ARINC 429 RX HS ARINC 429 TX

#2 UNS-1K+

(P/N 11162-XX-111X) A B A B ARINC 429 RX HS ARINC 429 TX 1 1 1 1 NOTE:

ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 1 2 3 4 5 6 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS. CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK. IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE. UNS1K+ SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT ONLY (NO GRAPHICS). DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 320 UL-801 Installation Manual

(2) Sheet 2 of 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX)

----CONTINUED----

TP RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX #3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX #3 A B A B 9A 9B 9C 9D NOTE:

ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. P3 4

#1 4" FPCDU/MCDU

(P/N 1117-X-X1X) E F B C D 4 E F B C D P3 A B A B RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX SHIELD GND

#2 4" FPCDU/MCDU

(P/N 1117-X-X1X) A B A B RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX SHIELD GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS. CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK. IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE. THE P3 CONNECTOR IS AMPHENOL P/N MS27473T12F8SC AND IS INCLUDED IN THE APPROPRIATE UNS-1K INSTALLATION KIT. DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 321 UL-801 Installation Manual K. UL-801 without FANS to UNS-1L UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) VHF ANTENNA

+28 VDC POWER POWER GND CHASSIS GND 5 2 4 3 CONFIG MODULE DATA CLK

+5 VDC DATA I/O GND 11C 11D 12C 12D BP TP MP 20 20 16 24 24 24 24 VHF ANTENNA 5A

+28 VDC CONFIGURATION MODULE (P/N 108009) YELLLOW RED BLUE BROWN 2 DISCRETE INPUT #3 12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 5 DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 6 ARINC 429 TX #1

(FMS 1) ARINC 429 RX #1

(FMS 1) 3 ARINC 429 TX #2

(FMS 2) ARINC 429 RX #2

(FMS 2) 3 A B A B A B A B 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 2B 2C 2D MP 4 4

#1 UNS-1L

(P/N 2116-XX-111X) A B A B ARINC 429 RX HS ARINC 429 TX

#2 UNS-1L

(P/N 2116-XX-111X) A B A B ARINC 429 RX HS ARINC 429 TX 1 1 1 1 NOTE:

ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 1 2 3 4 5 6 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS. CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK. IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE. UNS1L SUPPORTS UNILINK TEXT ONLY (NO GRAPHICS). DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 322 UL-801 Installation Manual L. UL-801 to UNS-1Ew

(1) Sheet 1 of 2 NOTE: The FMS must be SCN 1005.5/1100.5 or later to support FANS. UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) ARINC 429 TX #1 (FMS 1) ARINC 429 RX #1 (FMS 1) 3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX #3 4 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX #3 ARINC 429 TX #2 (FMS 2) ARINC 429 RX #2 (FMS 2) 3 A B A B A B A B A B A B 7 8 DISCRETE OUTPUT DISCRETE OUTPUT 10 DISCRETE OUTPUT

----CONTINUED----

MP TP MP 1A 1B 1C 1D 9A 9B 9C 9D 2A 2B 2C 2D 6 6 6

#1 UNS-1Ew

(P/N 3017-XX-2XX) A B A B A B A B ARINC 429 RX 2 HS ARINC 429 TX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX

#2 UNS-1Ew

(P/N 3017-XX-2XX) A B A B A B A B ARINC 429 RX 2 HS ARINC 429 TX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX 1 1 t r Z W 1 1 t r Z W P1 P2 P1 P2 5

+28 VDC 9 11 CPDLC CNECT 15 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 323 UL-801 Installation Manual

(2) Sheet 2 of 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX)

----CONTINUED----

VHF ANTENNA

+28 VDC POWER POWER GND CHASSIS GND CONFIG MODULE DATA CLK

+5 VDC DATA I/O GND DISCRETE INPUT #3 13 DISCRETE INPUT #4 20 20 20 16 24 24 24 24 BP TP MP 5 2 4 3 11C 11D 12C 12D 12B 12C VHF ANTENNA 5A

+28 VDC CONFIGURATION MODULE (P/N 108009) 12 YELLOW RED BLUE BROWN PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 14 NOTES:

ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. THE FMS MUST BE SCN 1000.5/1100.5 OR LATER TO SUPPORT FANS. 1 2 3 4 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS. UNS1Ew SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS USING RS-422 DISPLAY DATA. IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D IN LIEU OF MP2C AND MP2D SHOWN ABOVE. CONFIGURE: SERIAL LOW RESOLUTION DISPLAY. 5 WHITE ATC LETTERING RECOMMENDED. USE ANNUNCIATOR P/N EATON 582-10 A0 B0 C3 F4 L5 N1 (D) P12,12 ATC OR EQUIVALENT. 6 7 8 9 ANY AVAILABLE DISCRETE OUTPUT PIN MAY BE USED. CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS VISUAL. CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS AURAL. CONNECT TO AN AURAL ALERTING DEVICE OR AN AURAL WARNING GENERATOR. USE SONALERT P/N SCE028LD2TT1B OR EQUIVALENT. 10 OPTIONAL: CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR CPDLC CNECT (CONNECT). 11 OPTIONAL: CPDLC CNECT ANNUNCIATOR. LABEL AS REQUIRED. 12 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK. 13 DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND. 14 IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED. 15 WIRING WITHIN THE DASHED LINES APPLIES ONLY WITH FANS ENABLED. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 324 UL-801 Installation Manual M. UL-801 to UNS-1Espw

(1) Sheet 1 of 2 NOTE: The FMS must be SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later to support FANS. UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) ARINC 429 TX #1 (FMS 1) ARINC 429 RX #1 (FMS 1) 3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX #3 15 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX #3 ARINC 429 TX #2 (FMS 2) ARINC 429 RX #2 (FMS 2) 3 A B A B A B A B A B A B 6 7 9 DISCRETE OUTPUT DISCRETE OUTPUT DISCRETE OUTPUT

----CONTINUED----

MP TP MP 1A 1B 1C 1D 9A 9B 9C 9D 2A 2B 2C 2D 5 5 5

#1 UNS-1Espw

(P/N 3019-XX-2XX) A B A B A B A B ARINC 429 RX 2 HS ARINC 429 TX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX

#2 UNS-1Espw

(P/N 3019-XX-2XX) A B A B A B A B ARINC 429 RX 2 HS ARINC 429 TX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX P2 P2 1 1 50 49 48 47 1 1 50 49 48 47 4

+28 VDC 8 10 CPDLC CNECT 14 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 325 UL-801 Installation Manual

(2) Sheet 2 of 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX)

----CONTINUED----

VHF ANTENNA

+28 VDC POWER POWER GND CHASSIS GND CONFIG MODULE DATA CLK

+5 VDC DATA I/O GND DISCRETE INPUT #3 12 DISCRETE INPUT #4 20 20 20 16 24 24 24 24 BP TP MP 5 2 4 3 11C 11D 12C 12D 12B 12C VHF ANTENNA 5A

+28 VDC CONFIGURATION MODULE (P/N 108009) 11 YELLOW RED BLUE BROWN PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 13 NOTES:

ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. THE FMS MUST BE SCN 1000.5/1100.5 OR LATER TO SUPPORT FANS. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS. UNS1Espw SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS USING RS-422 DISPLAY DATA. IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D INSTEAD OF THE WIRING (MP2C & MP2D) SHOWN ABOVE. WHITE ATC LETTERING RECOMMENDED. USE ANNUNCIATOR P/N EATON 582-10 A0 B0 C3 F4 L5 N1 (D) P12,12 ATC OR EQUIVALENT. ANY AVAILABLE DISCRETE OUTPUT PIN MAY BE USED. CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS VISUAL. CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS AURAL. CONNECT TO AN AURAL ALERTING DEVICE OR AN AURAL WARNING GENERATOR. USE SONALERT P/N SCE028LD2TT1B OR EQUIVALENT. OPTIONAL: CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR CPDLC CNECT (CONNECT). OPTIONAL: CPDLC CNECT ANNUNCIATOR. LABEL AS REQUIRED. CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK. DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED. WIRING WITHIN THE DASHED LINES APPLIES ONLY WITH FANS ENABLED. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 326 UL-801 Installation Manual N. UL-801 to UNS-1Lw NOTE: The FMS must be SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later to support FANS. UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) CONFIG MODULE DATA CLK

+5 VDC DATA I/O GND 11C 11D 12C 12D 24 24 24 24 TP MP CONFIGURATION MODULE (P/N 108009) YELLLOW RED BLUE BROWN 1 DISCRETE INPUT #3 12B PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 2 DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 3 ARINC 429 TX #1

(FMS 1) ARINC 429 RX #1

(FMS 1) 6 ARINC 429 TX #2

(FMS 2) ARINC 429 RX #2

(FMS 2) 6 A B A B A B A B VHF ANTENNA

+28 VDC POWER POWER GND CHASSIS GND 9 DISCRETE OUTPUT 10 DISCRETE OUTPUT 12 DISCRETE OUTPUT 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 2B 2C 2D 5 2 4 3 8 8 8 4 4

#1 UNS-1Lw

(P/N 3116-XX-111X) A B A B ARINC 429 RX HS ARINC 429 TX

#2 UNS-1Lw

(P/N 3116-XX-111X) A B A B ARINC 429 RX HS ARINC 429 TX 5 5 5 5 VHF ANTENNA 5A

+28 VDC BP 20 20 16 7

+28 VDC 11 14 13 CPDLC CNECT NOTES:

ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. THE FMS MUST BE SCN 1000.5/1100.5 OR LATER TO SUPPORT FANS. 1 2 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK. DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND. NOTES ARE CONTINED ON THE NEXT PAGE. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 327 NOTES continued UL-801 Installation Manual 3 4 5 6 IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED. UNS1Lw SUPPORTS BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS USING RS-422 DISPLAY DATA. REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS. IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D IN LIEU OF MP2C AND MP2D SHOWN ABOVE. 7 WHITE ATC LETTERING RECOMMENDED. USE ANNUNCIATOR P/N EATON 582-10 A0 B0 C3 F4 L5 N1 (D) P12,12 ATC OR EQUIVALENT. 8 9 ANY AVAILABLE DISCRETE OUTPUT PIN MAY BE USED. CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS VISUAL. 10 CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS AURAL. CONNECT TO AN AURAL ALERTING DEVICE OR AN AURAL WARNING GENERATOR. USE SONALERT P/N SCE028LD2TT1B OR EQUIVALENT. 11 12 OPTIONAL: CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR CPDLC CNECT (CONNECT). 13 OPTIONAL: CPDLC CNECT ANNUNCIATOR. LABEL AS REQUIRED. 14 WIRING WITHIN THE DASHED LINES APPLIES ONLY WITH FANS ENABLED. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 328 UL-801 Installation Manual O. UL-801 with FANS to UNS-1Fw

(1) Sheet 1 of 2 NOTE: The FMS must be SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later to support FANS. UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) CONFIG MODULE DATA CLK

+5 VDC DATA I/O GND 11C 11D 12C 12D 24 24 24 24 TP MP YELLOW RED BLUE BROWN CONFIGURATION MODULE

(P/N 108009) 1 DISCRETE INPUT #3 12B 2 DISCRETE INPUT #4 12C PARKING BRAKE SET = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) DOOR n OPEN = GND or OPEN

(OPTIONAL, AS REQUIRED) 3 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 2B 2C 2D 5 2 4 3 7 7 7 ARINC 429 TX #1

(FMS 1) ARINC 429 RX #1

(FMS 1) 5 ARINC 429 TX #2

(FMS 2) ARINC 429 RX #2

(FMS 2) 5 A B A B A B A B VHF ANTENNA

+28 VDC POWER POWER GND CHASSIS GND 8 9 DISCRETE OUTPUT DISCRETE OUTPUT 11 DISCRETE OUTPUT

----CONTINUED----

#1 UNS-1Fw 2192-X0-111XXX ARINC 429 RX HS ARINC 429 TX

#2 UNS-Fw 2192-X0-111XXX ARINC 429 RX HS ARINC 429 TX A B A B A B A B 4 4 4 4 VHF ANTENNA 5A

+28 VDC BP 20 20 16 6

+28 VDC 10 12 CPDLC CNECT 15 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 329 UL-801 Installation Manual

(2) Sheet 2 of 2 - 4/5 FPCDU/MCDU UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX)

----CONTINUED----

TP RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX #3 16 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX #3 A B A B 9A 9B 9C 9D NOTES:

ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. THE FMS MUST BE SCN 1000.5/1100.5 OR LATER TO SUPPORT FANS. 1 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED ON THE REAR OF THE UL801 RACK. 2 DISCRETE INPUT ACTIVE STATE IS CONFIGURABLE TO EITHER OPEN OR GROUND.

#1 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU

(P/N 1117-X-X1X, P/N 1018-X-X1X, P/N 1025-XX-XXX) P3 E F B C D E F B C D P3 13 14 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX A B A B SHIELD GND

#2 4"/5 FPCDU/MCDU

(P/N 1117-X-X1X, P/N 1018-X-X1X, P/N 1025-XX-XXX) 13 14 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX A B A B SHIELD GND 3 IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT DOOR 1 OPEN DISCRETE BE USED IF ONLY ONE DOOR DISCRETE IS TO BE CONFIGURED. 4 REFER TO APPLICABLE TECHNICAL MANUAL FOR PORT CONFIGURATIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENTS. IF FMS #1 IS NOT INTERFACED TO THE UL801, THEN CONNECT FMS #2 TO MP1C AND MP1D IN LIEU OF MP2C AND MP2D SHOWN ABOVE. 5 6 WHITE ATC LETTERING RECOMMENDED. USE ANNUNCIATOR P/N EATON 582-10 A0 B0 C3 F4 L5 N1 (D) P12,12 ATC OR EQUIVALENT. 7 8 9 ANY AVAILABLE DISCRETE OUTPUT PIN MAY BE USED. CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS VISUAL. CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS AURAL. 10 CONNECT TO AN AURAL ALERTING DEVICE OR AN AURAL WARNING GENERATOR. USE SONALERT P/N SCE028LD2TT1B OR EQUIVALENT. 11 OPTIONAL: CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR CPDLC CNECT (CONNECT). 12 OPTIONAL: CPDLC CNECT ANNUNCIATOR. LABEL AS REQUIRED. BOTH THE 4 AND 5 FPCDUs, P/Ns 1117-2-X1X AND 1018-2-X1X, SUPPORT BOTH UNILINK TEXT AND WEATHER GRAPHICS (RS-422 DISPLAY DATA). OTHER 4 AND 5 FPCDUs, P/Ns 1117-X-X00 AND 1018-X-X00, SUPPORT UNILINK TEXT ONLY. BOTH 4 AND 5 FPCDUs ARE WIRED IN THE SAME MANNER. WIRING WITHIN THE DASHED LINES APPLIES ONLY WITH FANS ENABLED. 13 14 15 16 CONFIGURE AS A LO-RES DISPLAY. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 330 P. UL-801 FANS Discretes (WAAS FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later) UL-801 Installation Manual UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) DISCRETE OUTPUT 1 DISCRETE OUTPUT 4 DISCRETE OUTPUT 6 2 2 2 3 P/N EATON 582-10 A0 B0 C3 F4 L5 N1 (D) P12,12 ATC ANNUNCIATOR 5 7 CPDLC CNECT NOTE: ALL WIRING IS TO BE 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS VISUAL. ANY AVAILABLE DISCRETE OUTPUT PIN MAY BE WHITE ATC LETTERING RECOMMENDED. CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR FANS CONNECT TO AN AURAL ALERTING DEVICE OR AN AURAL WARNING GENERATOR. OPTIONAL: CONFIGURE DISCRETE OUTPUT FOR CPDLC CNECT (CONNECT). OPTIONAL: CPDLC CNECT ANNUNCIATOR. LABEL AS REQUIRED. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 331 Q. UL-801 to EFI-890R High Resolution UL-801 Installation Manual UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX #4 1 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX #4 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX #5 3 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX #5 TP 7A 7B 7C 7D 6A 6B 6C 6D A B A B A B A B P1 16 27 4 47 46 P1 16 27 4 47 46 2

#1 NAV DISPLAY

(P/N 8904-XXXXX-XX) A B RS-422 RX RETURN/SHIELD A B RS-422 TX RETURN/SHIELD 2

#2 NAV DISPLAY

(P/N 8904-XXXXX-XX ) A B RS-422 RX RETURN/SHIELD A B RS-422 TX RETURN/SHIELD 1 2 3 4 SELECT ANY AVAILABLE RS-422 PORT AND CONFIGURE THE PORT FOR HI-RES DISPLAY 1. PORT #4 IS USED HERE AS AN EXAMPLE. EFI-890Rs ARE HIGH RESOLUTION DEVICES, ONE DEVICE MAXIMUM PER PORT. THEREFORE, THE UNILINK MUST BE CONFIGURED AS DEFINED BELOW. A MAXIMUM OF TWO HIGH-RESOLUTION DISPLAYS CAN BE INSTALLED AND CONFIGURED. SELECT ANY AVAILABLE RS-422 PORT AND CONFIGURE THE PORT FOR HI-RES DISPLAY 2. PORT #5 IS USED HERE AS AN EXAMPLE. USE ANY AVAILABLE RS-422 PORT. PORTS DEPICTED ARE FOR EXAMPLE. UNILINK CONFIGURATION I/O CONFIG:

SELECT SERIAL PORT 4 PORT 5 SELECT HI-RES DISPLAY 1 SELECT HI-RES DISPLAY 2 GRAPHICS CONFIGURATION CDU/MFD BAUD RATE CDU1 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON CDU2 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON SELECT 19.2 KBS SELECT CDU, HR1 SELECT CDU, HR2 EXAMPLE 1 CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, RCDU, HR1 CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, HR2 CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU EXAMPLE 2 CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, FPCDU, HR1 CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, HR2 CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON ANY ADDITIONAL SELECTIONS WILL RESULT IN AN ERROR MESSAGE. EFI-890R ND #1 CONFIGURATION MAIN MENU RS-422 RX CHANNEL MENU J1-16, J1-27(A,B) RX FUNCTION: UNILINK 700 PRIMARY 38.4 J1-16, J1-27(A,B) RX NUMBER: SYSTEM 1 RS-422 TX CHANNEL MENU J1-47, J1-46(A,B) TX FUNCTION: UNILINK 700 38.4 UNILINK NODE ID: 35 EFI-890R ND #2 CONFIGURATION MAIN MENU RS-422 RX CHANNEL MENU J1-16, J1-27(A,B) RX FUNCTION: UNILINK 700 PRIMARY 38.4 J1-16, J1-27(A,B) RX NUMBER: SYSTEM 1 RS-422 TX CHANNEL MENU J1-47, J1-46(A,B) TX FUNCTION: UNILINK 700 38.4 UNILINK NODE ID: 45 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 332 UL-801 Installation Manual R. UL-801 to MFD-640 High Resolution (MFD SCN 1011.4.8 or later) UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) RS-422 DISPLAY DATA TX #4 RS-422 DISPLAY DATA RX #4 TP A B A B 7A 7B 1 7C 7D MFD-640 P/N 6402-XXXXX-XX RS-422 RX #1 RS-422 TX #1 P1 58 57 1 47 46 A B A B RETURN/SHIELD NOTE: UNILINK HIGH RESOLUTION CONFGURATION SETTINGS REQUIRE MFD-640-SCN 1011.4.8 OR LATER. USE ANY AVAILABLE RS-422 PORT. PORTS DEPICTED ARE EXAMPLES. A MAXIMUM OF TWO HIGH-RESOLUTION DISPLAYS MAY BE USED. 1 THE UNILINK HIGH RESOLUTION MFD MUST BE CONFIGURED AS DEFINED BELOW. UNILINK CONFIGURATION I/O CONFIG:

SELECT SERIAL PORT 4 SELECT HI-RES DISPLAY 1 GRAPHICS CONFIGURATION CDU/MFD BAUD RATE SELECT 19.2 KBPS CDU1 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON SEE THE EXAMPLES BELOW CDU2 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON SEE THE EXAMPLES BELOW CDU3 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON SEE THE EXAMPLES BELOW EXAMPLE 1 CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, RCDU, HR1 CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, HR2 CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU EXAMPLE 2 CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, FPCDU, HR1 CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, HR2 CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON ANY ADDITIONAL SELECTIONS WILL RESULT IN AN ERROR MESSAGE. MFD-640 CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION MAIN MENU UNILINK NODE ID: 35 BAUD RATE: 38.4K RS-422 MENU J1-58, J1-57 RX FUNC: UNILINK PRIMARY RX NUMBER: SYSTEM 1 RS-422 TX CHANNEL MENU J1-47, J1-46 TX FUNC: UNILINK J1-58, 47, J1-57,46 SPEED: 38400 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 333 S. UL-801 to Remote CDU (RCDU) Low Resolution UL-801 Installation Manual UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) TP 2 RS-422 TX RS-422 RX A B A B J3 J3 J3 E F B C D E F B C D E F B C D E F B C D 4 or 5 FPCDU #1 4 or 5 FPCDU #2 4 or 5 FPCDU #3 A B A A B A A B A A B A RS-422 DISPLAY RX RS-422 DISPLAY TX B GROUND RS-422 DISPLAY RX RS-422 DISPLAY TX B GROUND RS-422 DISPLAY RX RS-422 DISPLAY TX B GROUND RCDU RS-422 DISPLAY RX RS-422 DISPLAY TX B GROUND CAUTION:

NOTES:

IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION. 1. 2 A MAXIMUM OF FOUR DISPLAY DEVICES MAY BE CONNECTED AND CONFIGURED. THE FPCDUs SHOWN ARE EXAMPLES ONLY. FMS CDUs OR ANY OTHER DISPLAY DEVICE IN ANY COMBINATION CAN ALSO BE USED. SELECT ANY AVAILABLE RS-422 PORT (PORT 4 RECOMMENDED) AND CONFIGURE FOR LOW RESOLUTION:

UNILINK CONFIGURATION I/O CONFIG:

SELECT AND CONFIGURE PORT AS LO-RES DISPLAY GRAPHICS CONFIGURATION CDU/MFD BAUD RATE CDU1 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON CDU2 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON CDU3 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON SELECT 19.2 KBPS SEE CONFIGURATION NOTE 1 SEE CONFIGURATION NOTE 2 SEE CONFIGURATION NOTE 3 CONFIGURATION NOTES 1. CONFIGURE RCDU HERE TO SHARE DATA WITH #1 CDU. 2. CONFIGURE RCDU HERE TO SHARE DATA WITH #2 CDU. 3. CONFIGURE RCDU HERE TO SHARE DATA WITH #3 CDU. EXAMPLE 1 CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, RCDU CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU EXAMPLE 2 CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, FPCDU CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, MFD-LR CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON ANY ADDITIONAL SELECTIONS WOULD EXCEED THE TOTAL OF FOUR DEVICES AND CREATE AN ERROR MESSAGE. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 334 UL-801 Installation Manual T. UL-801 to MFD-640 - Low Resolution (MFD-640 SCN 1011.4.7 or earlier) UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) TP 2 RS-422 TX RS-422 RX A B A B J3 J3 J3 E F B C D E F B C D E F B C D 3 4 or 5 FPCDU #1 4 or 5 FPCDU #2 A B A A B A A B A A B A RS-422 DISPLAY RX RS-422 DISPLAY TX B GROUND RS-422 DISPLAY RX RS-422 DISPLAY TX B GROUND RS-422 DISPLAY RX RS-422 DISPLAY TX B GROUND MFD-640 RS-422 DISPLAY RX RS-422 DISPLAY TX B GROUND 4 or 5 FPCDU #3 CAUTION:

NOTES:

IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION. 1. 2 3 A MAXIMUM OF FOUR DISPLAY DEVICES MAY BE CONNECTED AND CONFIGURED. THE FPCDUs SHOWN ARE EXAMPLES ONLY. FMS CDUs OR ANY OTHER DISPLAY DEVICE IN ANY COMBINATION CAN ALSO BE USED. SELECT ANY AVAILABLE RS-422 PORT (PORT 4 RECOMMENDED) AND CONFIGURE FOR LOW RESOLUTION:

REFER TO THE MFD-640 INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR PORT SELECTIONS. UNILINK CONFIGURATION I/O CONFIG:

SELECT SERIAL AND CONFIGURE PORT AS LO-RES DISPLAY GRAPHICS CONFIGURATION CDU/MFD BAUD RATE CDU1 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON CDU2 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON CDU3 GRAPHICS DISPLAY ON SELECT 19.2 KBPS SEE CONFIGURATION NOTE 1 SEE CONFIGURATION NOTE 2 SEE CONFIGURATION NOTE 3 CONFIGURATION NOTES 1. CONFIGURE MFD-LR HERE TO SHARE DATA WITH #1 CDU. 2. CONFIGURE MFD-LR HERE TO SHARE DATA WITH #2 CDU. 3. CONFIGURE MFD-LR HERE TO SHARE DATA WITH #3 CDU. EXAMPLE 1 CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, MFD-LR CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU EXAMPLE 2 CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, FPCDU CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, MFD-LR CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON MFD-640 CONFIGURATION CONFIGURATION MAIN MENU UNILINK NODE ID: 40 RS-422 MENU J1-58, J1-57 RX FUNC: UNILINK PRIMARY RX NUMBER: SYSTEM 1 RS-422 TX CHANNEL MENU J1-47, J1-46 TX FUNC: UNILINK J1-58, 47, J1-57,46 SPEED: 19200 ANY ADDITIONAL SELECTIONS WOULD EXCEED THE TOTAL OF FOUR DEVICES AND CREATE AN ERROR MESSAGE. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 335 U. UL-801 to CVR/CVFDR UL-801 Installation Manual UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) ARINC 429 TX HS OUTPUT TO CVR/CVFDR H B 3 3 1 2 CVR-120A, CVR-120R, CVFDR-145, CVFDR-145R 4 8 SPEED STRAP GND = HS 12 10 18 VALID GND = VALID DATALINK H L ARINC 429 RX CAUTION:

IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION. 1 2 3 PIN 48 (DATA LINK SPEED STRAP) SETS THE ARINC 429 RX PORT TO HIGH OR LOW SPEED. UNILINK TRANSMITS 429 HIGH SPEED AND THEREFORE MUST BE GROUNDED AS SHOWN. PIN 12 (VALID) DATA LINK VALID MUST BE GROUNDED AS SHOWN TO ENABLE DATA LINK RECORDING. IF THIS PIN IS GROUNDED WITH NO COMMUNICATION FROM A DATA LINK, A CVR FAIL (AMBER LED) WILL BE PRESENT ON THE COCKPIT CONTROL UNIT (CCU). CONNECT TO ANY AVALABLE ARINC TX PORT, CONFIGURE FOR HIGH SPEED, AND SET THE PORT TO CVR. RECEIVE PORTS ARE NOT REQUIRED AT THIS TIME. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 336 UL-801 Installation Manual V. UL-801 to DTU-100 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) TP ETHERNET TX ETHERNET RX

+

-

+

-

2 ETHERNET SHIELD 1 DTU-100

(P/N 1406-01-X)

+

-

+

-

ETHERNET RX CH 3 ETHERNET TX CH 3 ETHERNET SHIELD P2 J K L N P 3 1 2 3 ETHERNET CABLE PER ARINC 646 (10 BASE-T FOR AVIONICS USE). P/N ECS 392404 OR EQUIVALENT. THREE ETHERNET PORTS ARE AVAILABLE. REFER TO THE PIN ASSIGNMENT CHART IN THIS MANUAL. THERE ARE ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS AVAILABLE. REFER TO THE PIN ASSIGNMENT CHART OF THIS MANUAL. W. UL-801 to SSDTU 1 2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) TP ETHERNET TX ETHERNET RX

+

-

+

-

4 4 ETHERNET SHIELD SSDTU

(P/N 1408-00-X) ETHERNET RX CH3 3 ETHERNET TX CH3 1 6 2 7

+

-

+

-

13 SHIELD 3 NOTES:

1 2 3 4 USE ETHERNET CABLE ECS P/N 392404 OR THERMAX/CDT 956-426 OR EQUIVALENT. THE EXPOSED UNSHIELDED ETHERNET WIRE BETWEEN THE SHIELD AND THE CIRCULAR CONNECTOR SHOULD BE LESS THAN 0.5 INCHES LONG. THERE ARE ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS AVAILABLE. REFER TO THE PIN ASSIGNMENT CHART OF THE MANUAL. THREE ETHERNET PORTS ARE AVAILABLE. WIRING AND CONFIGURATION ARE UP TO THE DISCRETION OF THE INSTALLER. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 337 X. UL-801 to Portable DTU-100 UL-801 Installation Manual UL-801 P/N 10801-XX ETHERNET TX ETHERNET RX

+

-

+

-

3 ETHERNET SHIELD 2 BULKHEAD CONNECTOR 1 P2 PORTABLE DTU-100

(P/N 1407-01-1) J K L N P J K L N P J K L N P H L H L ETHERNET RX CH3 ETHERNET TX CH3 ETHERNET SHIELD CAUTION:

IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION. 1 2 3 THE DASHED LINES BETWEEN THE PORTABLE DTU AND P1 AND P2 CONNECTORS REPRESENTS A WIRING HARNESS THAT IS PART OF THE PORTABLE DTU. ETHERNET CABLE PER ARINC 626 (10 BASE-T AVIONICS USE) P/N ECS 392404 OR EQUIVALENT. THERE ARE ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS AVAILABLE. REFER TO THE PIN ASSIGNMENT CHART OF THIS MANUAL. Y. UL-801 to Portable SSDTU NOTE:

It is strongly recommended that customers using a DTU-100 upgrade to the SSDTU. UL-801 P/N 10801-XX ETHERNET TX ETHERNET RX

+

-

+

-

3 ETHERNET SHIELD 2 J2 BULKHEAD CONNECTOR 1 HARNESS

(P/N 81140821) P2 PORTABLE SSDTU

(P/N 1409-00-2) 1 6 2 7 1 6 2 7 13 13 1 6 2 7

+

-

+

-

ETHERNET RX CH3 ETHERNET TX CH1 4 13 SHIELD #3 CAUTION:

IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION. THE DASHED LINES BETWEEN THE PORTABLE DTU AND P1 AND P2 CONNECTORS REPRESENTS A WIRING HARNESS THAT IS PART OF THE PORTABLE SSDTU. USE ETHERNET CABLE ECS P/N 392404 OR THERMAX/CDT P/N 956-426 OR EQUIVALENT. THE EXPOSED UNSHIELDED ETHERNET WIRE BETWEEN THE SHIELD AND THE CIRCULAR CONNECTOR SHOULD BE LESS THAN 0.5 INCHES LONG. THERE ARE ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS AVAILABLE. REFER TO THE PIN ASSIGNMENT CHART OF THIS MANUAL. 1 2 3 4 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 338 UL-801 Installation Manual Z. UL-801 Airborne-based Telephony SatCom Systems

(1) UL-801 to Aero-M without FANS UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) RS-232 #1 MP TX RX GND 4A 4C 3A TT-3000 AERO-M

(P/N 403068A-UAT) TP 14 13 16 1 1 TXD RXD GND CAUTION:

IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION. NOTES:

1 SIGNAL NAMES ARE IDENTIFIED BY THE MANUFACTURER AND ARE NOT USED TO IMPLY SIGNAL DIRECTION.

(2) UL-801 to ARINC 741 Satellite Communication (SatCom) Packet Data without FANS TP BP TT-5000 AERO-I

(P/N 4050033A-UAT-XXX) CMU #1 & #2 OUTPUT PORT

(ARINC 429) CMU #2 INPUT PORT

(ARINC 429) A B A B 42 43 44 45 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) ARINC 429 RX PORT #6 SATCOM ARINC 429 TX PORT #3 SATCOM A B A B 13A 13B 15A 15B PRINTER

(IF APPLICABLE) CAUTION:

IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 339 UL-801 Installation Manual

(3) UL-801 to AirCell and Iridium Systems UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) RS-232 #1 MP TX RX GND 4A 4C 3A AIRCELL (AGT.02) IRIDIUM (ST3100) AIRCELL/IRIDIUM (AST3500) N a c TX RX GND RS-232 CAUTION:

IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.

(4) UL-801 Connection to AirCell Axxess ST4200/ST4020 Channel #1 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) RS-232 #1 MP 4A 4C 3A TX RX GND AIRCELL AXXESS ST4200/ST4020 - CHANNEL #1 AA Z J K RTS CTS RX TX GG GND RS-232 CAUTION:

IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION.

(5) UL-801 Connection to AirCell Axxess ST4200/ST4020 Channel #2 UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) RS-232 #1 MP 4A 4C 3A TX RX GND AIRCELL AXXESS ST4200/ST4020 - CHANNEL #2 X V DD W Y CTS RTS RX TX GND RS-232 CAUTION:

IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 340 UL-801 Installation Manual

(6) UL-801 Connections to International Communications Group (ICG) ICS-220A ICS-220A MP TP UL-801 P/N10801-00 ARINC 429 TX #3 ARINC 429 TX #6 15A 15B 1 13A 13B A B A B ARINC 429 BUS RX A RX B SHIELD TX A TX B SHIELD D4 D5 D6 D1 D2 D3 RS-232 TX RX GND D5 D6 D8 TP MP 4A 4C 3A TX RX GND RS-232 #1 1 CAUTION:

IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION. THESE PIN NUMBERS ARE RECOMMENDED. HOWEVER, THE WIRING AND CONFIGURATION ARE UP TO THE DISCRETION OF THE INSTALLER. 1 AA. UL-801 to ARINC 740/744/744A Printer UL801

(P/N 10801XX) TP ARINC 429 RECEIVE PORT #4 PRINTER A 14A B 14B ARINC 429 TRANSMIT PORT #3 PRINTER A 15A B 15B SATCOM IF APPLICABLE PRINTER ARINC 740 OR ARINC 744 1 1 A ARINC 429 TRANSMIT B A ARINC 429 RECEIVE B CAUTION:

IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION. ALL WIRES AWG 22 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. SEE THE PRINTER MANUFACTURER FOR PIN IDENTIFICATIONS. 1 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 341 UL-801 Installation Manual BB. UL-801 to PC Printer UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) RS-232 #2 TP MP TX RX 8A 8C GND 3A DB25 GENERIC SERIAL PRINTER 3 2 7 4 5 RECEIVE DATA TRANSMIT DATA SIGNAL GROUND RTS CTS CAUTION:

IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION. CC. UL-801 to Generic Parallel Printer UL-801

(P/N 10801-XX) RS-232 #2 TP MP TX RX 8A 8C GND 3A DB25 SERIAL SERIAL/PARALLEL CONVERTER

(B&B 232SPS2) 1 DB25 PARALLEL 2 3 7 TRANSMIT DATA RECEIVE DATA SIGNAL GROUND GENERIC PARALLEL PRINTER 1 SET THE DIP SWITCH ON THE 232SPS2 AS FOLLOWS (DEFAULT SETTING):

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF/ON OFF 9600 baud 9600 baud 9600 baud XON/

XOFF 8 Data Bits No Parity Dont Care Serial/

Parity CAUTION:

IT IS THE INSTALLER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY PIN NUMBERS ON EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURED BY OTHER THAN UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 342 UL-801 Installation Manual 3. UL-801 Connector Pin Identification A. Top Plug NOTE: Connector pin differences between the UL-701 and UL-801 top plug are shown in the shaded areas below. These differences are being presented for use when upgrading from UL-701 to UL-801. Pin 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 2B 2C 2D 3A 3B 3C 3D 4A 4B 4C 4D 5A 5B 5C 5D 6A 6B 6C 6D 7A 7B 7C 7D 8A 8B 8C 8D 9A 9B UL-801 Function UL-701 Function 10/100BT Ethernet (+) TX #1 10/100BT Ethernet (-) TX #1 10/100BT Ethernet RX (+) #1 10/100BT Ethernet RX (-) #1 ARINC 429 RX (A) #14 ARINC 429 RX (B) #14 ARINC 429 RX (A) #13 ARINC 429 RX (B) #13 10/100BT Ethernet TX (+) #2 Essential 10/100BT Ethernet TX (-) #2 Essential 10/100BT Ethernet RX (+) #2 Essential 10/100BT Ethernet RX (-) #2 Essential 10/100BT Ethernet TX (+) #3 Essential 10/100BT Ethernet TX (-) #3 Essential 10/100BT Ethernet RX (+) #3 Essential 10/100BT Ethernet RX #3 (-) Essential RS-422 (A)/RS-232 TX #6 RS-422 (B) TX #6 RS-422 (A)/RS-232 RX #6 RS-422 (B) RX #6 RS-422 (A)/RS-232 TX #5 RS-422 (B) TX #5 RS-422 (A) /RS-232 RX #5 RS-422 (B) RX #5 RS-422 (A)/RS-232 TX #4 RS-422 (B) TX #4 RS-422 (A)/RS-232 RX #4 RS-422 (B) RX #4 RS-422 (A)/RS-232 TX #2 RS-422 (B) TX #2 RS-422 (A)/RS-232 RX #2 RS-422 (B) RX #2 RS-422 (A)/RS-232 TX #3 RS-422 (B) TX #3 Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same RS-422/RS-232 (A) TX #8 RS-422 TX (B) #8 RS-422/RS-232 (A) RX #8 RS-422 RX (B) #8 RS-422/RS-232 (A) TX #7 RS-422 TX (B) #7 RS-422/RS-232 (A) RX#7 RS-422 RX (B) #7 Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 343 UL-801 Installation Manual Top Plug - continued Pin 9C 9D 10A 10B 10C 10D 11A 11B 11C 11D 12A 12B 12C 12D 13A 13B 13C 13D 14A 14B 14C 14D 15A 15B 15C 15D UL-801 Function UL-701 Function RS-422 (A)/RS-232 RX #3 RS-422 (B) RX #3 RS-232 TX RS-232 RX RS-232 GND Discrete Out #1 ARINC 429 (A) TX #4 ARINC 429 (B) TX #4 Config Mod Clock Config Mod Power ARINC 429 (A) RX #8 ARINC 429 (B) RX #8 Config Mod Data (I/O) Config Mod GND ARINC 429 (A) RX #6 ARINC 429 (B) RX #6 ARINC 429 (A) RX #7 ARINC 429 (B ) RX #7 ARINC 429 (A) RX #4 ARINC 429 (B) RX #4 ARINC 429 (A) RX #5 ARINC 429 (B) RX #5 ARINC 429 (A) TX #3 ARINC 429 (B) TX #3 ARINC 429 (A) RX #3 ARINC 429 (B) RX #3 Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 344 UL-801 Installation Manual B. Middle Plug NOTE: Connector pin differences between the UL-701 and UL-801 middle plug are shown in the shaded areas below. These differences are being presented for use when upgrading from UL-701 to UL-801. Pin 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 2B 2C 2D 3A 3B 3C 3D 4A 4B 4C 4D 5A 5B 5C 5D 6A 6B 6C 6D 7A 7B 7C 7D 8A 8B 8C 8D 9A 9B 9C UL-801 Function UL-701 Function ARINC 429 (A) TX #1 ARINC 429 (B) TX #1 ARINC 429 (A) RX #1 ARINC 429 (B) RX #1 ARINC 429 (A) TX #2 ARINC 429 (B) TX #2 ARINC 429 (A) RX #2 ARINC 429 (B) RX #2 RS-232 GND ARINC 429 (A) RX #12 ARINC 429 (B) RX #12 ARINC 429 (A) RX #11 RS-422 (A)/RS-232 TX #1 RS-422 (B) TX #1 RS-422 (A)/RS-232 RX #1 RS-422 (B) RX #1 Discrete Out #14 ARINC 429 (A) TX #5 ARINC 429 (B) TX #5 ARINC 429 (B) RX #11 Discrete Out #10 Discrete Out #11 Discrete Out #12 Discrete Out #13 Discrete Out #6 Discrete Out #7 Discrete Out #8 Discrete Out #9 Discrete Out #2 Discrete Out #3 Discrete Out #4 Discrete Out #5 ARINC 429 (A) TX #6 ARINC 429 (B) TX #6 ARINC 429 (A) TX #7 Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Discrete Out #15 Discrete Out #16 Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Discrete In #13 Discrete In #14 Discrete In #15 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 345 Middle Plug - continued UL-801 Installation Manual Pin 9D 10A 10B 10C 10D 11A 11B 11C 11D 12A 12B 12C 12D 13A 13B 13C 13D 14A 14B 14C 14D 15A 15B 15C 15D UL-801 Function ARINC 429 (B) TX #7 Discrete In #9 Discrete In #10 ARINC 429 (A) RX #15 ARINC 429 (B) RX #15 Discrete In #5 Discrete In #6 Discrete In #7 Discrete In #8 Discrete In #2 Discrete In #3 Discrete In #4 ARINC 429 (A) RX #10 ARINC 429 (A) RX #16 ARINC 429 (A) RX #9 ARINC 429 (B) RX #9 ARINC 429 (B) RX #10 ARINC 429 (B) RX #16 Spare Chassis GND Discrete In #1 ARINC 429 (A) TX #8 ARINC 429 (B) TX #8 Spare Spare UL-701 Function Discrete In #16 Same Same Discrete In #11 Discrete In #12 Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Same Telephone Ring (Modem I/F) Same Same Same Telephone Tip (Modem I/F) PTT Radio Gnd Rtn VHF-ACARS (VHF Radio) Same VHF Modem TX (+) VHF Modem TX (-) VHF Modem RX (+) VHF Modem RX (-) C. Bottom Plug Pin 1 2 3 4 5 UL-801 Function UL-701 Function Spare

+28 VDC Chassis GND Power GND VHF Antenna Same Same Same Same Same 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 346 UL-801 Installation Manual 4. UL-801 Connectors A CB D 1 5 1 5 D C B A 1 5 1 5 Top Plug 10 10 10 10 15 A CB 15 D A CB D 1 5 1 5 15 D C B 15 A D C B A 1 5 1 5 Middle Plug 10 10 10 10 15 A CB 15 D 15 D C B 15 A ARINC Key Code #08 Bottom Plug 1 3 2 4 5 1 3 2 4 5 UL-801 Connector Rack Connector NOTE: The darkened portion of the keying above indicates the extended part of the key;

the light portion indicates the key hole. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 347 UL-801 Installation Manual System Data Installation 1. International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) Aircraft Type Designators When installing system data during the configuration process, the ICAO aircraft type designator is used. The following tables contain examples of commonly used ICAO designators for various aircraft. Use ICAO Document 8643, found under Publications at http://www.icao.int/, to ascertain the correct designator for your aircraft. Manufacturer/Model ICAO Designator 90, A90 to E90 King Air 200, 1300 Super King Air 300 Super King Air B300 Super King Air 350 400 Beechjet 1900 (C-12J) 111 One-eleven ATR-42/72 A-300 A-310 AIRBUS ATR BAC BEECH BELL BOEING BRITISH AEROSPACE 212, 412 214ST 222, 230, 430 707 727 (C-22) 737-100/200 (CT-43) 737-300/400/500 747-100/200/300 (E-4, VC-25) 747SP 757 C135 BAC 111 One-eleven BAe-125-700/801 (C-29) BAe-125-1000 BAe-146, RJ BAe-4100 Jetstream 41 A300 A310 ATR BA111 BE9L BE20 BE30 B350 MU30 B190 B12 BSTP B222 B708 B727 B73A B73B B74A B74S B757 C135 BA11 H25B H25C BA46 JSTB 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 401 UL-801 Installation Manual Manufacturer/Model ICAO Designator CL-600/601/604 Challenger RJ Regional Jet F406 Caravan 2 441 Conquest, Conquest 2 500, 501 Citation, Citation 1/1SP 525 Citation Jet 526 Citation Jet 550, S550, 551, 552 Citation 2/S2/2SP/Bravo 560 Citation 5 650 Citation 3/6/7 Falcon 10, Mystere 10 Falcon 20, Mystere 20 Falcon 50, Mystere 20 Falcon 900, Mystere 900 Falcon 2000 CANADAIR CESSNA DASSAULT DEHAVILLAND CANADA DHC-6 Twin Otter DHC-7 Dash 7 DHC-8 Dash 8 DOUGLAS EMBRAER EUROCOPTER FOKKER 50 GRUMMAN GULFSTREAM AEROSPACE G-159 Gulfstream 1 G-1159 Gulfstream 2 Albatross AS-365/565 Dauphin BK-117 EMB-110/111 Bandeirante EMB-120 Brasilia EMB-145 EMB-140 Gulfstream 3/4/5 DC-8 DC-9 CL60 CARJ F406 C441 C500 C525 C526 C550 C560 C650 FA10 FA20 FA50 F900 F2TH DHC6 DHC7 DHC8 DC8 DC9 E110 E120 E145 E140 AS65 BK17 F50 G159 GULF U16 GULF 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 402 UL-801 Installation Manual Manufacturer/Model ICAO Designator IL96 C-130 L-1011 Tristar HS-124-400/600 HS-125-700 1123 Westwind 1124 Westwind 1125 Astra Galaxy HAWKER IAI ILYUSHIN LEARJET 31 35 45 55 60 LOCKHEED McDONNELL DOUGLAS MITSUBISHI PIPER RAYTHEON REIMS SIKORSKY S-70 S-76 DC-8 DC-9 DC-10 MD-81/82/83/87/88 MD-90 MU-300 Diamond F406 Caravan 2 PA-42 Cheyenne 3/400 90 King Air 200 Super King Air (C-12) 300 Super King Air B300 Super King Air 350 400 Beechjet 1900 Hawker 801 Hawker 1000 H25A H25B WW23 WW24 ASTR GLAX IL96 LJ31 LJ35 LJ45 LJ55 LJ60 C130 L101 DC8 DC9 DC10 MD80 MD90 MU30 PA42 BE9L BE20 BE30 B350 MU30 B190 H25B H25C F406 H60 S76 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 403 UL-801 Installation Manual Manufacturer/Model ICAO Designator Tu-154 TUPOLEV WESTLAND Puma T154 PUMA 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 404 UL-801 Installation Manual 2. Configuration Worksheets Universal Avionics Systems Corporation recommends that the following worksheets be completed in order to assist with configuring the UniLink Configuration Module. One set of worksheets should be filled out and a copy given to the customer. Fill in the blanks and check the appropriate boxes based on the wiring of the aircraft and its set of avionics components. Further, these worksheets may be submitted along with other approval paperwork. A copy of these worksheets should be filed along with the aircraft paper work for future reference. NOTE: A customer database is installed in each UniLink. You are hereby authorized to reproduce these worksheets as well as the configuration module programming procedures if desired. It is recommended that the current UniLink configuration be recorded prior to updating to a new UniLink software version. UniLink may not maintain previous configuration settings with a software upgrade. The default value for each option in the worksheets is underlined. Pressing the RETURN LSK returns you to the menu from which you started. UniLink input consists of one of the three following character types. Where necessary, each field on the worksheets designates which type to use. Types of character input allowed Alpha Shown as A on the worksheets. Numeric Shown as N on the worksheets. Alphanumeric Shown as AN on the worksheets. Alpha characters are the 26 characters of the alphabet. Numeric characters consist of the numbers 0 to 9. Alphanumeric characters are a combination of letters (including both upper and lower case) and numbers. Alphanumeric input can also contain punctuation marks, and mathematical and other conventional symbols (such as @, &, and *). 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 405 UL-801 Installation Manual A. Customer/Aircraft Information Customer Name:

Customer Address:

Aircraft Manufacturer:

Aircraft Model No.:

Aircraft Serial No.:

Configuration Date:

Technician:

_________________________________________________ _________________________________________________ _________________________________________________ _________________________________________________ _________________________________________________ _________________________________________________ _________________________________________________ _________________________________________________ _________________________________________________ B. System Configuration Menu (Sys Config 1/4) NOTE: Configuration options may be used only once. Any option that has been selected is removed from the option list. 1. I/O Config a) DISCRETE (DISC) IN Active state of BRAKE SET indicates the parking brake is locked. Active state of DOOR CLOSED indicates the configured door is closed. Active state of STRUT COMP (Strut Compressed) indicates the aircraft is on-

ground (weight on wheels). The TEST option is provided for development and engineering purposes only. DISC IN 1/4 DISC IN 1 Middle Plug 14D DISC IN 2 Middle Plug 12A DISC IN 3 Middle Plug 12B

TEST

BRAKE SET

STRUT COMP

GROUND

BRAKE SET

NOT USED

DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED ACTIVE STATE

NOT USED

DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED ACTIVE STATE

NOT USED

DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED ACTIVE STATE

OPEN

STRUT COMP

OPEN

STRUT COMP

GROUND

BRAKE SET

TEST

TEST

GROUND

OPEN 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 406 UL-801 Installation Manual Press NEXT. DISC IN 2/4 displays. DISC IN 4 Middle Plug 12C DISC IN 5 Middle Plug 11A DISC IN 6 Middle Plug 11B DISC IN 7 Middle Plug 11C DISC IN 8 Middle Plug 11D DISC IN 9 Middle Plug 10A DISC IN 10 Middle Plug 10B

TEST

BRAKE SET

STRUT COMP

GROUND

BRAKE SET

NOT USED

DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED ACTIVE STATE

NOT USED

DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED ACTIVE STATE

NOT USED

DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED ACTIVE STATE

OPEN

STRUT COMP

OPEN

STRUT COMP

GROUND

BRAKE SET

TEST

TEST

GROUND

OPEN Press NEXT. DISC IN 3/4 displays.

NOT USED

BRAKE SET

STRUT COMP

TEST

DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED ACTIVE STATE

NOT USED

OPEN

STRUT COMP

GROUND

BRAKE SET

TEST

DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED ACTIVE STATE

NOT USED

OPEN

STRUT COMP

GROUND

BRAKE SET

TEST

DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED ACTIVE STATE

GROUND

OPEN Press NEXT. DISC IN 4/4 displays.

NOT USED

BRAKE SET

STRUT COMP

TEST

DOOR 1 CLOSED DOOR 2 CLOSED DOOR 3 CLOSED DOOR 4 CLOSED ACTIVE STATE

GROUND

OPEN 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 407 UL-801 Installation Manual b) DISCRETE (DISC) OUT FANS VISUAL Output Active Open or Active Ground configurable. Use any available discrete output pin and configure accordingly. The FANS VISUAL output discrete activates the ATC annunciator and alerts the crew that an ATC advisory is active and the UniLink pages should be accessed to view further information. FANS AURAL configurable. Output Active Open or Active Ground configurable. Duration is Use any available discrete output pin and configure accordingly. The FANS AURAL output discrete activates the aural warning device and alerts the crew that an aural message has been received. CPDLC CNECT (Connect) Output Active Open or Active Ground configurable. Use any available discrete output pin and configure accordingly. The CPDLC CNECT output discrete activates an optional CPDLC CNECT annunciator while the UniLink is connected to the Current Data Authority

(CDA). If the CDA connection is disrupted or lost, the optional CPDLC CNECT annunciator deactivates. The New Message (NEW MSG) discretes are provided to drive visual indications of new/unread uplinks. Active state indicates a new/unread uplink exists. The CHIME discretes are provided to drive aural indications of new/unread uplinks. Active state indicates a new/unread uplink exists. VHF/SAT/TEL NOCOMM discretes are provided to drive visual indications media link states. Active state indicates a particular medium is in NOCOMM

(link not established). DISC OUT 1/5

CHIME 2

VOX ANNUN

NOT USED

VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM

CHIME 1

CPDLC CNECT ACTIVE STATE

NOT USED

VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM

CHIME 1

CPDLC CNECT ACTIVE STATE

GROUND

VOX ANNUN

GROUND

CHIME 2

NEW MSG 2

NEW MSG 1

TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL

FANS VISUAL

FANS AURAL

OPEN

NEW MSG 1

NEW MSG 2

TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL

FANS AURAL

FANS VISUAL

OPEN 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 408 DISC OUT 1 Top Plug 10D DISC OUT 2 Middle Plug 8A UL-801 Installation Manual DISC OUT 1/5 (Continued)

VOX ANNUN

NOT USED

VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM

CHIME 1

CPDLC CNECT ACTIVE STATE

GROUND

CHIME 2

NEW MSG 2

NEW MSG 1

TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL

FANS AURAL

FANS VISUAL

OPEN Press NEXT. DISC OUT 2/5 displays.

CHIME 2

VOX ANNUN

GROUND

VOX ANNUN

NOT USED

VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM

CHIME 1

CPDLC CNECT ACTIVE STATE

NOT USED

VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM

CHIME 1

CPDLC CNECT ACTIVE STATE

NOT USED

VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM

CHIME 1

CPDLC CNECT ACTIVE STATE

GROUND

VOX ANNUN

GROUND

CHIME 2

CHIME 2

NEW MSG 2

NEW MSG 1

TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL

FANS VISUAL

FANS AURAL

OPEN

NEW MSG 1

NEW MSG 2

TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL

FANS VISUAL

FANS AURAL

OPEN

NEW MSG 1

TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL

FANS VISUAL

FANS AURAL

NEW MSG 2

OPEN Press NEXT. DISC OUT 3/5 displays.

CHIME 2

VOX ANNUN

GROUND

VOX ANNUN

NOT USED

VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM

CHIME 1

CPDLC CNECT ACTIVE STATE

NOT USED

VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM

CHIME 1

CPDLC CNECT

NOT USED ACTIVE STATE

NOT USED

VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM

CHIME 1

CPDLC CNECT ACTIVE STATE

VOX ANNUN

GROUND

VOX ANNUN

GROUND

CHIME 2

CHIME 2

NEW MSG 1

TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL

FANS VISUAL

FANS AURAL

NEW MSG 2

OPEN

NEW MSG 1

TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL

FANS AURAL

FANS VISUAL

NEW MSG 2

NEW MSG 1

OPEN

NEW MSG 1

TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL

FANS VISUAL

FANS AURAL

NEW MSG 2

NEW MSG 2

OPEN 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 409 DISC OUT 3 Middle Plug 8B DISC OUT 4 Middle Plug 8C DISC OUT 5 Middle Plug 8D DISC OUT 6 Middle Plug 7A DISC OUT 7 Middle Plug 7B DISC OUT 8 Middle Plug 7C DISC OUT 9 Middle Plug 7D UL-801 Installation Manual Press NEXT. DISC OUT 4/5 displays. DISC OUT 10 Middle Plug 6A DISC OUT 11 Middle Plug 6B DISC OUT 12 Middle Plug 6C DISC OUT 13 Middle Plug 6D DISC OUT 14 Middle Plug 5A

CHIME 2

CHIME 2

VOX ANNUN

GROUND

VOX ANNUN

GROUND

VOX ANNUN

NOT USED

VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM

CHIME 1

CPDLC CNECT ACTIVE STATE

NOT USED

VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM

CHIME 1

CPDLC CNECT ACTIVE STATE

NOT USED

VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM

CHIME 1

CPDLC CNECT ACTIVE STATE

NOT USED

VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM

CHIME 1

CPDLC CNECT ACTIVE STATE

NOT USED

VHF NOCOMM SAT NOCOMM

CHIME 1

CPDLC CNECT ACTIVE STATE

GROUND

VOX ANNUN

GROUND

VOX ANNUN

GROUND

CHIME 2

CHIME 2

CHIME 2

NEW MSG 1

TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL

FANS VISUAL

FANS AURAL

NEW MSG 2

OPEN

NEW MSG 1

TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL

FANS VISUAL

FANS AURAL

NEW MSG 2

OPEN

NEW MSG 1

TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL

FANS VISUAL

FANS AURAL

NEW MSG 2

OPEN

NEW MSG 1

TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL

FANS VISUAL

FANS AURAL

NEW MSG 2

OPEN

NEW MSG 1

TEL NOCOMM VDR VOX SEL

FANS VISUAL

FANS AURAL

NEW MSG 2

OPEN 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 410 UL-801 Installation Manual c) ARINC RECEIVE Only one device/interface may configured on each ARINC receive port at a time. UniLink configures the receive port speed based on the device selected. The receive port speed for the following devices are configured for low speed: MCDU, Printer, A741 SDU, A604 CMC, IOP. The receive port speed for the following devices are configured based on the device definition contained within the CDB: A702 FMS, Generic 429 Device. UniLink automatically detects the transmission speed (high/low) of the following devices and configures the receive port speed accordingly:

A743A GNSS (including A743 GPS), DADC (Digital ADC). UniLink processes data labels received from A702 FMS and Generic 429 Device based on the device definition contained within the CDB. Devices configured on a receive port must also be configured on a transmit port except for the following receive-only devices: IOP, A743A GNSS (including A743 GPS), DADC. The TEST option is provided for development and engineering purposes only. ARINC RX 1/3

FMS/CDU1

FMS/CDU2

FMS/CDU3

MCDU1

MCDU2

MCDU3

FMS/CDU2

VM CMC

MCDU2

702 FMS3

ADC1

GENERIC3

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

DHC8 IOP2

702 FMS2

TEST

GENERIC2

NOT USED

FMS/CDU3

604 CMC

740 PRINT

MCDU3

DHC8 IOP1

743A GNSS

702 FMS1

ADC2

750 VDR

GENERIC1

GENERIC4 Generic1 - 4 identifies up to four optional, generic input devices which can be included in a customer database.

NOT USED

FMS/CDU1

740 PRINT

741 SDU

DHC8 IOP2

DHC8 IOP1

702 FMS2

702 FMS1

TEST

750 VDR

GENERIC1

GENERIC2

NOT USED

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

740 PRINT

DHC8 IOP1

DHC8 IOP2

702 FMS2

702 FMS1

TEST

750 VDR

GENERIC1

GENERIC2

FMS/CDU3

604 CMC

MCDU3

743A GNSS

ADC2

GENERIC4

FMS/CDU3

604 CMC

MCDU3

743A GNSS

ADC2

GENERIC4

FMS/CDU2

VM CMC

MCDU2

702 FMS3

ADC1

GENERIC3

FMS/CDU2

VM CMC

MCDU2

702 FMS3

ADC1

GENERIC3 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 411 PORT 1

(A) Middle Plug 1C

(B) Middle Plug 1D Only FMS/CDU1 is may be chosen for this port. PORT 2

(A) Middle Plug 2C

(B) Middle Plug 2D PORT 3

(A) Top Plug 15C

(B) Top Plug 15D PORT 4

(A) Top Plug 14A

(B) Top Plug 14B UL-801 Installation Manual ARINC RX 1/3 (CONTINUED)

NOT USED

740 PRINT

DHC8 IOP1

702 FMS1

750 VDR

GENERIC1

NOT USED

740 PRINT

DHC8 IOP1

702 FMS1

750 VDR

GENERIC1

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

DHC8 IOP2

702 FMS2

TEST

GENERIC2

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

DHC8 IOP2

702 FMS2

TEST

GENERIC2

FMS/CDU2

VM CMC

MCDU2

702 FMS3

ADC1

GENERIC3

FMS/CDU2

VM CMC

MCDU2

702 FMS3

ADC1

GENERIC3 Press NEXT. ARINC RX 2/3 displays.

NOT USED

740 PRINT

DHC8 IOP1

702 FMS1

750 VDR

GENERIC1

NOT USED

740 PRINT

DHC8 IOP1

702 FMS1

750 VDR

GENERIC1

NOT USED

740 PRINT

DHC8 IOP1

702 FMS1

750 VDR

GENERIC1

NOT USED

740 PRINT

DHC8 IOP1

702 FMS1

750 VDR

GENERIC1

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

DHC8 IOP2

702 FMS2

TEST

GENERIC2

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

DHC8 IOP2

702 FMS2

TEST

GENERIC2

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

DHC8 IOP2

702 FMS2

TEST

GENERIC2

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

DHC8 IOP2

702 FMS2

TEST

GENERIC2

FMS/CDU2

VM CMC

MCDU2

702 FMS3

ADC1

GENERIC3

FMS/CDU2

VM CMC

MCDU2

702 FMS3

ADC1

GENERIC3

FMS/CDU2

VM CMC

MCDU2

702 FMS3

ADC1

GENERIC3

FMS/CDU2

VM CMC

MCDU2

702 FMS3

ADC1

GENERIC3

FMS/CDU3

604 CMC

MCDU3

743A GNSS

ADC2

GENERIC4

FMS/CDU3

604 CMC

MCDU3

743A GNSS

ADC2

GENERIC4

FMS/CDU3

604 CMC

MCDU3

743A GNSS

ADC2

GENERIC4

FMS/CDU3

604 CMC

MCDU3

743A GNSS

ADC2

GENERIC4

FMS/CDU3

604 CMC

MCDU3

743A GNSS

ADC2

GENERIC4

FMS/CDU3

604 CMC

MCDU3

743A GNSS

ADC2

GENERIC4 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 412 PORT 5

(A) Top Plug 14C

(B) Top Plug 14D PORT 6

(A) Top Plug 13A

(B) Top Plug 13B PORT 7

(A) Top Plug 13C

(B) Top Plug 13D PORT 8

(A) Top Plug 12A

(B) Top Plug 12B PORT 9

(A) Middle Plug 13B

(B) Middle Plug 13C PORT 10

(A) Middle Plug 12D

(B) Middle Plug 13D UL-801 Installation Manual ARINC RX 2/3 (Continued)

NOT USED

740 PRINT

DHC8 IOP1

702 FMS1

750 VDR

GENERIC1

NOT USED

740 PRINT

DHC8 IOP1

702 FMS1

750 VDR

GENERIC1

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

DHC8 IOP2

702 FMS2

TEST

GENERIC2

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

DHC8 IOP2

702 FMS2

TEST

GENERIC2

FMS/CDU2

VM CMC

MCDU2

702 FMS3

ADC1

GENERIC3

FMS/CDU2

VM CMC

MCDU2

702 FMS3

ADC1

GENERIC3 Press NEXT. ARINC RX 3/3 displays.

NOT USED

740 PRINT

DHC8 IOP1

702 FMS1

750 VDR

GENERIC1

NOT USED

740 PRINT

DHC8 IOP1

702 FMS1

750 VDR

GENERIC1

NOT USED

740 PRINT

DHC8 IOP1

702 FMS1

750 VDR

GENERIC1

NOT USED

740 PRINT

DHC8 IOP1

702 FMS1

750 VDR

GENERIC1

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

DHC8 IOP2

702 FMS2

TEST

GENERIC2

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

DHC8 IOP2

702 FMS2

TEST

GENERIC2

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

DHC8 IOP2

702 FMS2

TEST

GENERIC2

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

DHC8 IOP2

702 FMS2

TEST

GENERIC2

FMS/CDU2

VM CMC

MCDU2

702 FMS3

ADC1

GENERIC3

FMS/CDU2

VM CMC

MCDU2

702 FMS3

ADC1

GENERIC3

FMS/CDU2

VM CMC

MCDU2

702 FMS3

ADC1

GENERIC3

FMS/CDU2

VM CMC

MCDU2

702 FMS3

ADC1

GENERIC3

FMS/CDU3

604 CMC

MCDU3

743A GNSS

ADC2

GENERIC4

FMS/CDU3

604 CMC

MCDU3

743A GNSS

ADC2

GENERIC4

FMS/CDU3

604 CMC

MCDU3

743A GNSS

ADC2

GENERIC4

FMS/CDU3

604 CMC

MCDU3

743A GNSS

ADC2

GENERIC4

FMS/CDU3

604 CMC

MCDU3

743A GNSS

ADC2

GENERIC4

FMS/CDU3

604 CMC

MCDU3

743A GNSS

ADC2

GENERIC4 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 413 PORT 11

(A) Middle Plug 3D

(B) Middle Plug 5D PORT 12

(A) Middle Plug 3B

(B) Middle Plug 3C PORT 13

(A) Top Plug 2C

(B) Top Plug 2D PORT 14

(A) Top Plug 2A

(B) Top Plug 2B PORT 15

(A) Middle Plug 10C

(B) Middle Plug 10D PORT 16

(A) Middle Plug 13A

(B) Middle Plug 14A UL-801 Installation Manual d) ARINC TRANSMIT NOTE: If any ARINC TX port is selected as 741 SDU, then SAT must be selected as the Normal or Alternate option in the PRIORITY (SYS CONFIG 1/4) option page. If an ARINC TX choice is displayed in small print and there is no arrow pointing to an LSK that selection is not available for use. VOX tune bus can only be configured for one port. ARINC TX 1/3 PORT 1

(A) Middle Plug 1A

(B) Middle Plug 1B NOTE: Only TX port with a default. PORT 1 SPEED PORT 2

(A) Middle Plug 2A

(B) Middle Plug 2B Ports 2-16 have no default settings. PORT 2 SPEED PORT 3

(A) Top Plug 15A

(B) Top Plug 15B PORT 3 SPEED PORT 4

(A) Top Plug 11A

(B) Top Plug 11B PORT 4 SPEED PORT 5

(A) Middle Plug 5B

(B) Middle Plug 5C PORT 5 SPEED

604 CMC

CVR only. DO NOT CONFIGURE.

FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3 740 PRINT

FMS/CDU1

VOX TUNE VM CMC

741 SDU

MCDU2

MCDU3

MCDU1

702 FMS1

702 FMS2 702 FMS3 750 VDR

TEST NOTE: Test is used by the Engineering Development

LOW NOTE: LOW is the only configurable option.

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

MCDU1

702 FMS1

TEST

LOW

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

MCDU1

702 FMS1

TEST

LOW

FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3 740 PRINT

VOX TUNE VM CMC

MCDU2

MCDU3

702 FMS2 702 FMS3 750 VDR

HIGH

FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3 740 PRINT

VOX TUNE VM CMC

MCDU2

MCDU3

702 FMS2 702 FMS3 750 VDR

HIGH

604 CMC

CVR

604 CMC

CVR Press NEXT. ARINC TX 2/3 displays.

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

MCDU1

702 FMS1

TEST

LOW

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

MCDU1

702 FMS1

TEST

LOW

604 CMC

CVR

FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3 740 PRINT

VOX TUNE VM CMC

MCDU2

MCDU3

702 FMS2 702 FMS3 750 VDR

HIGH

FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3 740 PRINT

VOX TUNE VM CMC

MCDU2

MCDU3

702 FMS2 702 FMS3 750 VDR

HIGH

604 CMC

CVR 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 414 UL-801 Installation Manual ARINC TX 2/3 (Continued)

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

MCDU1

702 FMS1

TEST

LOW

FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3 740 PRINT

VOX TUNE VM CMC

MCDU2

MCDU3

702 FMS2 702 FMS3 750 VDR

HIGH

604 CMC

CVR Press NEXT. ARINC TX 3/3 displays.

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

MCDU1

702 FMS1

TEST

LOW

FMS/CDU1

741 SDU

MCDU1

702 FMS1

TEST

LOW

604 CMC

CVR

FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3 740 PRINT

VOX TUNE VM CMC

MCDU2

MCDU3

702 FMS2 702 FMS3 750 VDR

HIGH

FMS/CDU2 FMS/CDU3 740 PRINT

VOX TUNE VM CMC

MCDU2

MCDU3

702 FMS2 702 FMS3 750 VDR

HIGH

604 CMC

CVR PORT 6

(A) Middle Plug 9A

(B) Middle Plug 9B PORT 6 SPEED PORT 7

(A) Middle Plug 9C

(B) Middle Plug 9D PORT 7 SPEED PORT 8

(A) Middle Plug 15A

(B) Middle Plug 15B PORT 8 SPEED e) SERIAL PORT 1 TX:

(+) Middle Plug 4A

()Middle Plug 4B RX:

(+)Middle Plug 4C

()Middle Plug 4D PORT 2 TX:

(+) Top Plug 8A

() Top Plug 8B RX:

(+) Top Plug 8C

() Top Plug 8D PORT 3 TX:

(+) Top Plug 9A

() Top Plug 9B RX:

(+) Top Plug 9C

() Top Plug 9D

NOT USED

VHF GND SIM

HI-RES DISPLAY 2 TEL SIM SERIAL 1/2

LO-RES DISPLAY AERO-M PRINTER

SAT GND SIM

IRIDIUM HI-RES DISPLAY 1

NOT USED

VHF GND SIM

HI-RES DISPLAY 2 TEL SIM

LO-RES DISPLAY AERO-M PRINTER

SAT GND SIM

IRIDIUM HI-RES DISPLAY 1

NOT USED

VHF GND SIM

HI-RES DISPLAY 2 TEL SIM

LO-RES DISPLAY AERO-M PRINTER

SAT GND SIM

IRIDIUM HI-RES DISPLAY 1 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 415 UL-801 Installation Manual Press NEXT. SERIAL 2/2 displays.

NOT USED

VHF GND SIM

HI-RES DISPLAY 2 TEL SIM

LO-RES DISPLAY AERO-M PRINTER

SAT GND SIM

IRIDIUM HI-RES DISPLAY 1

NOT USED

VHF GND SIM

HI-RES DISPLAY 2 TEL SIM

LO-RES DISPLAY AERO-M PRINTER

SAT GND SIM

IRIDIUM HI-RES DISPLAY 1

NOT USED

VHF GND SIM

HI-RES DISPLAY 2 TEL SIM

LO-RES DISPLAY AERO-M PRINTER

SAT GND SIM

IRIDIUM HI-RES DISPLAY 1 PORT 4 TX:

(+) Top Plug 7A

() Top Plug 7B RX:

(+) Top Plug 7C

() Top Plug 7D PORT 5 TX:

(+) Top Plug 6A

() Top Plug 6B RX:

(+) Top Plug 6C

() Top Plug 6D PORT 6 TX:

(+) Top Plug 5A

() Top Plug 5B RX:

(+) Top Plug 5C

() Top Plug 5D 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 416 UL-801 Installation Manual f) GRAPHICS Low Resolution Display Devices These devices include all CDUs, MCDUs, RCDUs, MFD-640 (with MFD SCN 1011.4.7 or earlier). A maximum total of four display devices may be used within any of the three CDU graphics ports. For example:

EXAMPLE 1 CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, RCDU CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU EXAMPLE 2 CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, FPCDU CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, MFD-LR CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON ANY ADDITIONAL SELECTIONS WILL RESULT IN AN ERROR MESSAGE. High Resolution Display Devices These devices include all EFI-890Rs and MFD-640 (with MFD SCN 1011.4.8 or later). Additionally, a maximum total of two high resolution display devices may be included within any of the three CDU graphics ports. For example:

EXAMPLE 1 CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, RCDU, HR1 CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, HR2 CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU EXAMPLE 2 CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, FPCDU, HR1 CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU, HR2 CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON ANY ADDITIONAL SELECTIONS WILL RESULT IN AN ERROR MESSAGE. CDU Graphics CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON Each display device selected here will display only what is displayed on CDU1. Additionally, each HR display device selected here will display the same graphic but in a high resolution format. CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON Each display device selected here will display only what is displayed on CDU2. Additionally, each HR display device selected here will display the same graphic but in a high resolution format. CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON Each display device selected here will display only what is displayed on CDU3. Additionally, each HR display device selected here will display the same graphic but in a high resolution format. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 417 UL-801 Installation Manual Graphics Setup CDU/MFD BAUD RATE CDU1 GRAPHICS DISP ON There are no defaults. CDU option(s) do not need to be selected if weather graphics are not used. LR = Low Resolution; HR = High Resolution RCDU = Remote CDU CDU2 GRAPHICS DISP ON CDU3 GRAPHICS DISP ON

9600 BPS 19.2 KBPS

CDU

HR2

RCDU MFD-LR HR1

CDU

HR2

CDU

HR2

RCDU MFD-LR HR1

RCDU MFD-LR HR1 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 418 2. VHF CONFIG RADIO TYPE

NONE

ARINC 750 VDR UL-801 Installation Manual VHF CONFIG 1/2

INTERNAL VDR Internal VDR must be selected if VHF is configured to other than NONE.

DISABLED

ENABLED CONTACT TIMER The contact timer verifies that the current VHF frequency is still usable when the channel has not had any uplink traffic received for a period of time. Enabling this option provides better media management performance. TRACKER TIMER The tracker timer provides flight following information to the DSP. This setting is enabled by default to provide better ACARS link management performance. PREFERRED DSP NOTE: Although the Preferred DSP is selected with this option, the ARINC, SITA, and AVICOM options may also be enabled/disabled using the listed options. For further coverage information, contact your DSP.

DISABLED

ENABLED

ARINC

NONE

SITA

AVICOM ARINC SITA AVICOM ENABLED MODE(S) MINIMUM SQP

(Minimum VHF Signal Quality) SQP THRESHOLD VOICE FREQ CONTROL

ENABLED

ENABLED

ENABLED

DISABLED

DISABLED

DISABLED Press NEXT. VHF CONFIG 2/2 displays.

POA/AOA

AOA ONLY

POA ONLY Range is 3 15; 4 Range is 3 15; 12

ENABLED 25KHZ ENABLED 8.33/25KHZ DISABLED VOICE FREQ CONTROL must be set to DISABLED for the UniLink 801. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 419 3. SAT CONFIG UL-801 Installation Manual SAT CONFIG

ENABLED TRACKER TIMER The tracker timer provides flight following information to the service provider once every four hours during SatCom medium inactivity. This setting should be enabled to provide better ACARS link management performance. This timer is applicable when UniLink is configured with an A741 SDU. If Iridium is configured as an AIRPHONE, the tracker timer is not active. AUTO RETURN If enabled, the UniLink attempts to re-establish the SatCom link every 10 minutes when in Satellite NOCOMM.

DISABLED

DISABLED

ENABLED 4. PRIORITY NOTE:

If Aero-I SAT (ARINC 741) Packet Data Service is utilized, one of the Normal/Alternate options must be set to SAT. Alternate Comm Priority, which is used for Position Reporting only, overrides Normal Comm Priority. COMM PRIORITY

NONE

NONE

NONE NORMAL (Priority ranking scheme for up to three downlink communications links.) 1ST 2ND 3RD ALTERNATE (Used for Position Reporting only.) 1ST 2ND 3RD NOTES:

NONE

NONE

NONE

VHF

VHF

VHF

SAT

SAT

SAT

VHF

VHF

VHF

SAT

SAT

SAT

TEL

TEL

TEL

TEL

TEL

TEL Database. Alternate priority is only applied to automatic position reports in the UASC Corporate Customer Customers are able to limit Auto Position reports to only use the VHF media, SAT media, TEL media or any two media. Likewise, users can choose to send Auto Position reports via all three media options. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 420 5. TEL CONFIG UL-801 Installation Manual TEL CONFIG 1/2 AIR PHONE Used for dial up modem calls only and uses an RS-232 serial port configured for IRIDIUM or AERO-M. It is primarily used for obtaining color weather maps but may also provide VHF backup.

NONE

IRIDIUM Baud rate selection applies to Iridium only. Select baud rate supported by the software version as follows:

Confirm the UniLink baud rate compatibility with the vendor and the selected DSP.

T-T AERO-M When interfacing with Aero-M, configure the Aero-M Data Port (via the Full Feature Handset only, P/N 405621A) for 9600 baud, Flow Control XON/XOFF, +++- Mode Enable, Results Code Enabled and ARQ Mode Enabled. Refer to the TT-3000 Aero-M Installation Manual. Baud rate must be one of the following:

2400 BPS

4800 BPS

9600 BPS Contact the air phone manufacturer for baud rate compatibility with UniLink. ACCESS NUMBER The number dialed by the selected AIR PHONE. Used to connect with the selected Datalink Service Providers MODEM bank. WX MAPS

(Weather Maps) If DISABLED is selected, it is required that NONE is selected in the AIR PHONE section. _________________________________ (Max 19 AN characters, 0-9, P,L, A) The default value is to leave this field blank. Contact Universal Weather and Aviation to obtain the Access Number. Contact your DSP for the access number shown on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page. A P may be entered to insert a pause, an L may be entered to insert #, or an A may be entered to insert * as required by the telephony network. Subscription service for UniLink may be obtained through Universal Weather and Aviation, Inc. at 1-801-231-5600.

ENABLED

DISABLED 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 421 UL-801 Installation Manual

ENABLED TEL CONFIG 1/2

DISABLED SUSP MSG

(Suspend Message) Enables or disables the invocation of the TEL SUSPEND message following a TEL SUSPEND event. Press NEXT. TEL CONFIG 2/2 displays. REDIAL PAUSE Redial Pause specifies the wait between telephony redial attempts from 5 to 60 seconds. DIAL ATTEMPTS Dial Attempts specifies the total number of dial attempts in a set from 1 to 6. AUTO-DELAY Auto-Delay specifies the time between sets of redial attempts from 1 to 9 minutes. _____ Seconds (5-60 seconds; 30SEC) _____ Attempts (1-6 attempts; 6) _____ Minutes (1-9 minutes; 5MIN) 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 422 UL-801 Installation Manual 6. POS REPORT These settings control the transmission of present position information while the aircraft is on the ground or in the air. These transmissions are sent to the DSP and may be used to provide flight following for aircraft tracking purposes. Transmission reporting time intervals

(INTV) may also be configured. The POS REPORT message is periodic and defaults to every 15 minutes. If the aircraft is configured for VHF, then SAT in the normal priority over the ocean SAT would be used for the position report downlinks which could potentially be costly. In this case the alternate priority would have only VHF which would prevent the downlink of automatic POS REPORT messages when VHF was in NO COMM (i.e. it wouldn't switch to trying SAT). AUTOMATIC REPORTING:

IN AIR ON GROUND IN AIR DEFAULT When ENABLED is selected, the transmission of in air position reporting is always turned on by default. When DISABLED is selected, the transmission of in air position reporting is always turned off by default. Automatic Position Reporting can be enabled or disabled by the air crew during flight if necessary. AIR INTV

(Air Interval) Air intervals can be modified during flight but always return to the values stored in the configuration at power up. GROUND INTV

(Ground Interval) POS REPORT

ENABLED

ENABLED

ENABLED

DISABLED

DISABLED

DISABLED _________ MINS (Max 2 N characters); 15MIN (1 99 is acceptable) _________ MINS (Max 2 N characters); 60MIN (1 99 is acceptable) Press NEXT. The SYS CONFIG 2/4 page displays. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 423 UL-801 Installation Manual C. SYS CONFIG 2/4 SYS CONFIG 2/4

DISABLED

ENABLED

ENABLED

ENABLED

DISABLED

DISABLED MEDIA ADVIS

(Media Advisory) MET DATA

(Meteorological Data) By enabling Met Data for Corporate and American Eagle versions, meteorological data messages are reported to the ground once a Met data message uplink is received from the ground. By enabling Met Data for the Air Nova version, meteorological data messages are reported upon enabling. An uplink is not required. FLIGHT NO. Enabling the Flight Number allows the entry and display of flight number data on the UniLink Main Menu. The INIT advisory logic will be active when Flight Number is enabled. INIT advisory logic will prompt the user to enter Flight No data on the MAIN menu page. OOOI DATA

(Out, Off, On, In) Enabling OOOI is recommended if ARINC is selected as the preferred DSP. AIRCRAFT The default value for any of the AIRCRAFT options is to leave the field blank. ICAO Aircraft Type, Aircraft Registration and Airline ID are required information. REGISTRATION Valid Aircraft Registration may contain alpha characters upper case A through Z, numeric characters 0 through 9, a dash/hyphen character (which may not be the first or last character) and from 1 to 7 characters. AIRLINE ID

(Max 4 AN characters)

(Max 7 AN characters) __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __

(Max 2 AN characters/3 AN characters) TYPE (ICAO Designator) __ __ / __ __ __

DISABLED

ENABLED

(Max 3 AN characters) __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ FIN NUMBER

(Fleet Identifier Number) ICAO ADDR Obtain the specific ICAO address from your DSP. This information is derived from the registration number of the aircraft. OCEANIC PUSHBACK DEPARTURE EXP TAXI

(Expected Taxi)

DISABLED

DISABLED

DISABLED

DISABLED

ENABLED

ENABLED

ENABLED

ENABLED 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 424 CLEARANCES These settings determine Air Traffic Services (ATS) functional options as elected by the customer. UL-801 Installation Manual SYS CONFIG 2/4 (Continued) ALERTS NEW MSG DISC DURATION

(New Message Discrete Duration) __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________ __________________

RADIO RADIO type may only be configured when IOP bus input is used. When RADIO is configured, INHIB ALT must be 2500 feet or below. __________________ ALERT1 ALERT2 CHIME1 CHIME2 INHIB ON GND

(Inhibit on Ground) INHIB ALT

(Inhibit Altitude) ALT TYPE

(Altitude Type) AFTER OFF Alerts are turned off during this configured time duration. 0MIN disables this timer, which allows the alerts to occur only above the configured INHIB ALT value. Press NEXT. The SYS CONFIG 3/4 page displays.

(Max 4 N characters)

(Max 4 N characters)

(Max 4 N characters) MS

(Milliseconds); 100MS MS

(Milliseconds); 100MS MS

(Milliseconds); 100MS MS

(Milliseconds); 100MS KTS (Max 3 N characters)

(Knots); 50KTS FT

(Feet); 10,000FT

BARO

(Max 5 N characters)

(Max 4 N characters)

(Max 2 N characters) MIN

(Minutes); 5MIN The timer is off if set to 0MIN. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 425 D. SYS CONFIG 3/4 UL-801 Installation Manual FANS requirements consist of the following:

The FMS must use SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later. UniLink must be connected to the UNS bus from the FMS (not A429 HS bus). If FANS is enabled, the FMS must be configured with FANS enabled. If FANS is disabled, the FMS must be configured with FANS disabled. SYS CONFIG 3/4

ENABLED

DISABLED FANS If FANS is enabled, the FMS must be configured for it and must be at SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later. Special operational approval and crew training is required to use FANS. FANS AURAL Works in conjunction with the FANS AURAL output discrete and controls the duration of the FANS AURAL alert. The default value is set to 0MS, which means that the Alerting device will remain active until the message that activated the alert has been viewed. Therefore, it is recommended to set this time duration to some other value than 0MS. A value such as 5000MS

(5 seconds) may be suitable in most cases. It is recommended to set this time duration to a specific value required to support correct operation of the aural alerting device, for example a SONALERT or Aural Warning Generating equipment. A value of zero is not recommended as it can result in the loss of aural alerts from a new message received if an unread CPDLC message already exists. A value such as 5000MS (5 seconds) may be suitable in most cases DELAY MSG TX

(Delay Message Transmission) Provides VHF message transmission delays, in minutes, in order to ensure a reliable Line of Sight

(LOS) connection after takeoff. Messages designated for delay (within the customer database) will be suppressed during VHF/SAT NOCOMM until the timer expires, at which time the message is routed for delivery over Telephony. MS

(Milliseconds); 0MS MIN

(Minutes); 0MIN

(Max 4 N characters)

(Max 2 N characters) ______________ ______________ 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 426 UL-801 Installation Manual SYS CONFIG 3/4 (Continued) GROUND DELAY ______________

(Max 2 N characters) MIN

(Minutes); 0MIN A Delay Advisory displays if a delay time other than zero is entered and the Delay Advisory time has elapsed since the occurrence of the OOOI Out event. FANS LATENCY ATC may instruct the crew to utilize a specific value. Its recommended that the value be configured for 0 (zero). 0 = latency is turned off. SUPP ADDR

(Supplemental Address) Obtain a specific SUPP ADDRESS from your DSP. SEC

(Seconds); 0SEC Range = 0 - 999

(Max 7 AN characters); the default value is to leave the field blank. ______________ ______________

(Max 3 N characters) Press NEXT. The SYS CONFIG 4/4 page displays. This page displays the log of the recent Config Module Updates, which is organized by Date and Time columns. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 427 UL-801 Installation Manual 3. Configuration Procedures The Flight Management System (FMS) must be configured to use the UniLink Communications Unit before you configure the UniLink system. Refer to the WAAS/SBAS FMS Configuration Manual, report number 34-61-01, for FMS configuration procedures. NOTE: The UASC FMS ARINC receiver port that receives data from the UniLink must be configured for UniLink. Only one receiver port on each FMS may be configured for a datalink device. UniLink and AFIS are mutually exclusive. Only one may be configured. The FMS transmitter port that supplies data to the UniLink must be configured for UNS HS429-1. UNS HS429-1 is mandatory for FANS-capable installations. The screens throughout these procedures depict a FANS-enabled UniLink. Some screens will appear differently without FANS. A. Starting the FMS In order to access the UniLink menu, press the ON/OFF/DIM key on the faceplate of the FMS to turn it on. The FMS displays the following:

1. FMS self-test page. UNS - 1

-------------------------

PASS CPU RAM PASS DATABASE BANK # 100%

CONFIG MODULE AUXILIARY WAAS/ARINC NOTE: The DATABASE BANK field displays the number of the bank being tested and the percentage complete. When successfully finished, the numbers change to the word PASS and the FMS proceeds to the CONFIG MODULE test. All tests display as PASS if the self-test completes correctly. 2. FMS copyright page. COPYRIGHT 2010 UNIVERSAL AVIONICS SYSTEMS CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 428 3. INIT 1/1 menu. UL-801 Installation Manual POS INIT 1/1 date initial pos 23-AUG-11 id ------ utc N 40 51.01 14:49:45 W 074 03.65 nav database expires 26-AUG-11 ACCEPT fmc ver 1000.5 a. LSK [1L] field is highlighted. Enter the local airport identifier. b. Press ENTER. 4. Local Airport Identifier window. POS KTUS 1/ 1 tucson intl NAV N 32 06.97 ARPT W 110 56.46 elev 2643 mag var E 12.0 ACCEPT a. Press the ACCEPT LSK [5L]. b. The INIT 1/1 menu displays. c. Press the ACCEPT LSK [5L]. d. Press the DATA key. 5. DATA 1/4 menu. DATA 1/4 NAV DATA PILOT DATA UNILINK DISK MAINT a. Press the UNILINK LSK [3R]. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 429 UL-801 Installation Manual 6. UNILINK menu. FANS-Enabled FANS-Disabled If FANS is enabled, the top menu line displays UNILINK MENU. After the UniLink is configured, a different set of configuration options may be displayed than in the FANS-Disabled menu. If FANS is disabled, the top menu line displays UNILINK MENU 1/2. Press the NEXT key to access UNILINK MENU 2/2. Additional options may appear at LSK

[1L], LSK [3L], LSK [2R], and LSK

[3R] depending which choices were made during configuration. UNILINK MENU UNILINK MENU 1/2 FLIGHT INFO OPS TEXT WX ATC FREE-TEXT COMM STATUS flight no. MAINTENANCE ----

z NOCOMM RETURN COMM STATUS MSG LOGS z RETURN FANS-Enabled FANS-Disabled NOTE: The NOCOMM option may display at LSK [5R] for either a FANS-enabled or FANS-disabled UniLink. This option also displays as SAT NOCOMM, TEL NOCOMM, or VHF NOCOMM, depending on which communications link UniLink has lost. 7. UNILINK 2/2 menu for FANS-Disabled. UNILINK MENU 2/2 DELAY DIVERSION SITUATION ETA UPDATE POS REPORT MAINTENANCE z RETURN FANS-Disabled 8. Press the MAINTENANCE LSK [4L] on either the FANS-enabled or FANS-disabled menu. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 430 UL-801 Installation Manual Use the completed worksheets, found in the Configuration Worksheets section, and enter that information into UniLink. Work through all the UniLink menus and make any necessary modifications for the configuration. The steps should be performed in the order indicated by the large number in the corner of the text box. Some of the items configured are limited to a small number of options that are selectable by pressing a line select key (LSK). The options appear one at a time in a set sequence and are included in the text of the step. Other items that may be configured are limited to more than a few options. These items are selected by typing the number of the option as presented in a numbered list. For those items that have many possible configurations, make an entry in a fill-in field. For example, the ICAO has assigned hundreds of aircraft type designators. These type designators consist of not more than four characters. On the Aircraft Configuration page the aircraft type field allows entry of up to four characters. If an entry field is not highlighted, press the corresponding line select key to move the cursor highlight to the field. FANS Block Data Transmission FMS SCN 1000.5/1100.5 or later is capable of transmitting FANS-specific data to support the UniLink FANS functions. In order to enable the transmission of the FMS FANS-specific data, ensure the FMS is configured to transmit over the UNS HS429-1 Bus. 1. Press the DATA key to display the DATA 1/4 page. 2. Press the PREV key to display the DATA 4/4 page. 3. Press DATE to highlight the date. 4. Enter 456789 and then press the ENTER key. The date will revert to the actual initialized date. 5. Press the NEXT key to display the DATA 1/4 page. 6. Press MAINT to display the MAINT 1/1 page. 7. Press CONFIG to display the CONFIG 1/2 page. The EDIT prompt at LSK [1R] is not normally displayed, but is displayed now because the configuration has been unlocked by entering the code on the DATA 4/4 page. 8. Press EDIT to replace EDIT with STORE and allow FMS configuration settings to be changed. 9. Press FMS CONFIG. Access the FMS CONFIG 2/4 page. 10. Press CMU. Enable FANS block data transmission. 11. Press STORE twice to restart the FMS. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 431 B. C. Storing UniLink Options UL-801 Installation Manual When all new or modified UniLink options have been entered, the installer can review the configuration by pressing the REVIEW LSK [4R] on the UniLink SYS CONFIG 1/4 page. This provides easy access to review and confirm any configuration warning from the UniLink. If all modifications are acceptable, press the STORE LSK [1R]. Wait a few seconds and press the STORE LSK again. This stores the entered information, and verifies that required dependencies and consistency exist between the Configuration Data and the software, and also among the Configuration Data items. UniLink will initialize and the FMS will display the following message:

UNILINK/FMS COMM ERROR RESELECT UNILINK UNILINK UNILINK, LSK [5L], displays in small capitals. Once the UniLink has rebooted and is ready to process additional information, the word UNILINK redisplays in large capital letters. Pressing the UNILINK LSK [5L] returns the FMS to the UNILINK MENU. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 432 D. Configuration Edit Mode UL-801 Installation Manual The Configuration Worksheets, found in the Configuration Worksheet section, should have been completed. These worksheets contain the options needed to configure UniLink. Have these worksheets available when implementing the following procedures.

(1) 1 On the FMS, press [DATA]

Selecting the UniLink Display Page to display the DATA 1/4 page. DATA 1/4 NAV DATA PILOT DATA UNILINK DISK MAINT 3 Press MAINTENANCE [4L]

to display the MAINTENANCE 1/3 page. MAINTENANCE 1/3 DEVICE STATUS CONFIG SENSOR STATUS TESTS VERSIONS POWER LOG ERROR LOG

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN 2 Press UNILINK [3R]

to display the UNILINK MENU page. UNILINK MENU FLIGHT INFO OPS ATC COMM STATUS flight no. MAINTENANCE ----

z NOCOMM RETURN 4 Press CONFIG [1R] to display the SYS CONFIG 1/4 page. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 433 UL-801 Installation Manual

(2) Edit/Store Mode SYS CONFIG 1/4 I/O CONFIG

-----

VHF CONFIG TEL CONFIG SAT CONFIG POS REPORT PRIORITY REVIEW

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN SYS CONFIG 1/4 I/O CONFIG EDIT VHF CONFIG TELEPHONE SAT CONFIG POS REPORT PRIORITY REVIEW

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN 1 Push LSK [1R] to highlight the data entry field. Type in the password 456789 and push ENTER. The password will be replaced with the word EDIT and EDIT mode is enabled. 2 Push EDIT [1R]. The word EDIT is replaced with the word STORE. Do not push STORE [1R] again until the configuration is complete. NOTE: Even though the LSK displays STORE, EDIT mode is active. NOTE: The FMS must be in an On Ground condition while you configure the UniLink. The data entry field at [1R] will not be accessible if the UniLink detects a Weight Off Wheels condition. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 434 UL-801 Installation Manual E. Aircraft Configuration 1 Press the NEXT key on the FMS to display the SYS CONFIG 2/4 page. SYS CONFIG 2/4 media advis enabled STORE met data disabled AIRCRAFT flight no. disabled CLEARANCES oooi data disabled ALERTS

--:--z UNILINK MENU 2 Press LSK [1L] thru [4L]

and select the ENABLED or DISABLED option for each item. 4 Press [1L] to highlight the TYPE data entry field. Enter the Type and press ENTER. 5 Repeat Step 4 on LSKs

[2L], [3L], and [4L]

respectively for REGISTRATION, AIRLINE ID, and FIN NUMBER. Press

[2R] to highlight the ICAO ADDR field. Enter the ICAO ADDR and press ENTER. 3 Press AIRCRAFT [2R]

to display the AIRCRAFT page. AIRCRAFT type

---- STORE registration icao addr

------- --------

airline id

--/---

fin number

---

--:--z 6 Press RETURN [5R] to return to the SYSTEM CONFIG 2/4 page. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 435 UL-801 Installation Manual F. Clearances STORE SYS CONFIG 2/4 media advis enabled met data disabled AIRCRAFT flight no disabled CLEARANCES oooi data disabled ALERTS

--:--z UNILINK MENU 2 Press LSK [2L] and select the ENABLED or DISABLED option for each item. Repeat for LSK [3L]. CLEARANCES STORE oceanic departure disabled disabled pushback exp taxi disabled disabled

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN 1 Press CLEARANCES [3R]

to display the CLEARANCES page. 3 Press LSK [2R] and select the ENABLED or DISABLED option for each item. Repeat for LSK [3R]. 4 Press RETURN [5R] to return to the SYS CONFIG 2/4 page. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 436 UL-801 Installation Manual G. Alerts SYS CONFIG 2/4 media advis enabled STORE met data disabled AIRCRAFT flight no disabled CLEARANCES oooi times disabled ALERTS

--:--z UNILINK MENU 2 Push LSK [2L] to highlight the data entry field. Enter a value for ALERT1. Push ENTER to move the cursor to the ALERT2 field. Continuing to push the ENTER key moves the cursor to the CHIME1, CHIME2, INHIB ON GND, INHIB ALT, and AFTER OFF fields. Values may be entered in these fields or left as the default if no value is entered. 1 Push ALERTS [4R] to display the ALERTS page. 3 A value for ALT TYPE can only be entered by pushing LSK [4R] and then entering a value. ALERTS new msg disc duration: STORE alert alert inhib alt ms ms {ft chime chime alt type ms ms baro inhib on gnd after off

}kts min

--:--z RETURN 4 Push RETURN [5R] to return to the SYS CONFIG 2/4 page. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 437 UL-801 Installation Manual H. System Configuration 3/4 1 Push NEXT on the FMS keypad to display the SYS CONFIG 3/4 page. STORE SYS CONFIG 3/4 fans enabled fans aural fans latency ms sec delay msg tx supp addr min -------

ground delay min

--:--z UNILINK MENU 2 Push LSK [1L] to toggle enabled/disabled in the FANS field. Push ENTER to move the cursor to the FANS AURAL field. Push LSK [2L]

and enter a value. Continuing to push the ENTER key moves the cursor to the DELAY MSG TX, GROUND DELAY, FANS LATENCY, and SUPP ADDR fields. Values may be entered in these fields or left as the default if no value is entered. NOTE: Pushing ENTER cycles through all fields except the FANS field. LSK [1L] must be pushed in order to enter a value in the FANS field. 3 Push NEXT twice to return to the SYS CONFIG 1/4 page. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 438 UL-801 Installation Manual I. I/O Configuration 1 Press I/O CONFIG [1L] to display the I/O CONFIG page. SYS CONFIG 1/4 I/O CONFIG STORE VHF CONFIG TEL CONFIG SAT CONFIG POS REPORT PRIORITY REVIEW

--:--z UNILINK MENU I/O CONFIG DISCRETE IN SERIAL DISCRETE OUT GRAPHICS ARINC RECEIVE ARINC TRANSMIT z UNILINK MENU RETURN 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 439 UL-801 Installation Manual

(1) Discrete In 1 Press DISCRETE IN [1L] to display the DISC IN 1/4 page. 2 Press LSK [2L] to configure DISC IN 1. The DISC IN OPT 1/2 page displays with a list of all available options. DISC IN OPT 1/2 select not used #-

brake set strut comp test door closed door closed door closed z UNILINK MENU RETURN NOTE: Press the NEXT or PREV key to toggle between DISC IN OPT pages 1 and 2. I/O CONFIG DISCRETE IN SERIAL DISCRETE OUT GRAPHICS ARINC RECEIVE ARINC TRANSMIT z UNILINK MENU RETURN DISC IN 1/4 STORE disc in active state not used ground disc in active state not used ground disc in active state not used ground UNILINK MENU RETURN z 3 Enter the number of the desired option and press ENTER. The DISC IN 1/4 page displays. 4 Press LSK [2R] and toggle the active state of the DISC IN 1 between GROUND and OPEN. 5 Press NEXT to display the next DISC IN page and repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 until all 10 discrete inputs are set. Press RETURN [5R]. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 440 UL-801 Installation Manual

(2) Discrete Out 1 Press DISCRETE OUT

[2L] to display the DISC OUT 1/5 page. 2 Press LSK [2L] to configure DISC OUT 1. The DISC OUT OPT 1/2 page displays with a list of all available options. DISC OUT OPT 1/2 select not used #-

vox annun new msg new msg vhf nocomm sat nocomm tel nocomm

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN DISC OUT OPT 2/2 select vdr box sel #-

chime chime fans visual fans aural cpdlc cnect

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN I/O CONFIG DISCRETE IN SERIAL DISCRETE OUT GRAPHICS ARINC RECEIVE ARINC TRANSMIT z UNILINK MENU RETURN DISC OUT 1/5 STORE disc out active state not used ground disc out active state not used ground disc out active state not used ground

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN 3 Enter the number of the desired option and press ENTER. For more options, press NEXT to display the the DISC OUT OPT 2/2 page. 4 Press LSK [2R] and toggle the active state of the DISC OUT 1 between GROUND and OPEN. 5 Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 until all 14 discrete outputs are set and then press RETURN [5R]. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 441 UL-801 Installation Manual

(3) ARINC Receive 1 Press ARINC RECEIVE [3L]

to display the ARINC RX 1/3 page. 2 Press LSK [2L] to configure PORT 1. The ARINC RX OPT page displays with a list of the available options for Port 1. NOTE: Choosing Ports 2 - 16 displays one of ARINC RX OPT 1/4 pages. ARINC RX OPT select fms/cdu #-

fms/cdu fms/cdu mcdu mcdu mcdu ARINC RX OPT 1/4 select not used #-

fms/cdu fms/cdu print sdu vm cmc cmc

--:--z RETURN ARINC RX OPT 2/4 select dhc iop #-

dhc iop mcdu mcdu mcdu fms fms

--:--z RETURN ARINC RX OPT 3/4 select fms #-

a gnss vdr test adc adc generic

--:--z RETURN I/O CONFIG DISCRETE IN SERIAL DISCRETE OUT GRAPHICS ARINC RECEIVE ARINC TRANSMIT UNILINK MENU RETURN

--:--z ARINC RX 1/3 STORE port port fms/cdu not used port port sdu not used port port not used not used

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN 3 Enter the number of the desired option for port 1 and press ENTER. This automatically returns you to the ARINC RX 1/3 page. Select another port to configure. The ARINC RX OPT 1/4 page displays. 4 After configuring all the ports on the chosen ARINC RX OPT page, press NEXT to go to the next ARINC RX OPT page. 5 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all 16 ARINC RX ports are set and then push RETURN [5R]. ARINC RX OPT 4/4 select generic #-

generic generic

--:--z RETURN 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 442 UL-801 Installation Manual

(4) ARINC Transmit 1 Press ARINC TRANSMIT [4L]

to display the ARINC TX 1/3 page. 2 PORT 1 SPEED defaults to LOW. Press PORT 2 SPEED [3L] and select the LOW or HIGH speed option. Repeat for the rest of the ARINC TX ports. Ports 4 - 8 are on ARINC TX pages 2 and 3. I/O CONFIG DISCRETE IN SERIAL DISCRETE OUT GRAPHICS ARINC RECEIVE ARINC TRANSMIT UNILINK MENU RETURN

--:--z ARINC TX 1/3 STORE port speed devices low PORT 1 port speed low PORT 2 port speed low PORT 3 UNILINK MENU RETURN

--:--z 4 Press LSK [1L] and <*>

appears to indicate that the item is selected. Press the LSK again and <*> disappears. Repeat for each device. 3 Press PORT 1 [2R] to display the ARINC TX OPT 1/3 page. A list of devices available for each of the ARINC TX ports displays. ARINC TX OPT 1/3 port FMS/CDU1<*> 741 SDU FMS/CDU2 VOX TUNE FMS/CDU3 VM CMC 740 PRINT 604 CMC

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN NOTE: Multiple port devices can be configured on a single port but no device may be configured so that it resides on more than one port. 5 Press NEXT to display ARINC TX 2/3 and follow the procedure in step 4. Press NEXT again to display ARINC TX 3/3. Once all ARINC TX ports are configured, press RETURN twice to return to the I/O CONFIG page. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 443 UL-801 Installation Manual

(5) Serial Port Configuration I/O CONFIG DISCRETE IN SERIAL DISCRETE OUT GRAPHICS ARINC RECEIVE ARINC TRANSMIT UNILINK MENU RETURN

--:--z 2 Press PORT 1 [1L] to display the SERIAL OPT 1/2 page. SERIAL OPT 1/2 select not used #-

lo-res display aero-m printer vhr gnd sim sat gnd sim iridium

--:--z RETURN SERIAL OPT 2/2 select hi-res display #-

hi-res display tel sim

--:--z RETURN 1 Press SERIAL [1R] to display the SERIAL 1/2 page. SERIAL 1/2 port not used STORE port not used port not used port not used

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN 3 Type the number of the desired option and press ENTER. This returns you to the SERIAL 1/2 page. For more options, press NEXT to display the SERIAL OPT 2/2 page. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each of the six serial ports. Once all serial ports are configured, press RETURN to display the I/O CONFIG page. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 444 UL-801 Installation Manual 1 Press GRAPHICS [2R] to display the GRAPHICS page.

(6) Graphics I/O CONFIG DISCRETE IN SERIAL DISCRETE OUT GRAPHICS ARINC RECEIVE ARINC TRANSMIT UNILINK MENU RETURN

--:--z 2 Press CDU/MFD BAUD RATE [1L]

to toggle between 9600BPS and 19.2KBPS. 3 Press LSK [2L] to display and select the graphics configuration for CDU1. 4 Graphics options are CDU, RCDU, MFD-LR, HR1, and HR2. An <*> appears to indicate that the item is selected. Press the LSK again and <*> disappears. All or none of the options may be chosen. Press RETURN to return to the GRAPHICS page. GRAPHICS STORE cdu/mfd baud rate

.kbps cdu graphics disp on

-

cdu graphics disp on

-

cdu graphics disp on

-

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN CDU# GRAPHICS CDU<*>

HR1 RCDU HR2 MFD-LR UNILINK MENU RETURN

--:--z 5 When all CDU graphics displays are configured, press RETURN twice to return to the SYS CONFIG 1/4 page. 6 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for CDU2 and CDU3. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 445 UL-801 Installation Manual J. VHF Configuration 1 Push VHF CONFIG [2L]

to display the VHF CONFIG 1/2 page. 2 Push RADIO TYPE [1L] to cycle through the RADIO TYPE options. Push all other configuration options to cycle through and choose the options. 3 Push NEXT to display the VHF CONFIG 2/2 page. 4 Push ENABLED MODE(S) [1L] to cycle through the ENABLED MODE(S) options. Push all other configuration options to cycle through and choose the options. 5 Push RETURN to display the SYS CONFIG 1/4 page. SYS CONFIG 1/4 I/O CONFIG STORE VHF CONFIG TEL CONFIG SAT CONFIG POS REPORT PRIORITY UNILINK MENU REVIEW

--:--z VHF CONFIG 1/2 radio type INTERNAL VDR STORE contact timer arinc ENABLED DISABLED tracker timer sita ENABLED DISABLED preferred dsp avicom NONE DISABLED

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN VHF CONFIG 2/2 enabled mode(s) POA/AOA STORE minimum sqp 4 sqp threshold 12 voice freq control DISABLED

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 446 UL-801 Installation Manual K. Satellite (SAT) Configuration 1 Press SAT CONFIG [3L]

to display the SAT CONFIG page. 2 Press TRACKER TIMER

[1L] and select ENABLED or DISABLED. Press AUTO RETURN [2L] and select ENABLED or DISABLED. 3 Press RETURN [5R] to the SYS CONFIG 1/4 page. SYS CONFIG 1/4 I/O CONFIG STORE VHF CONFIG TEL CONFIG SAT CONFIG POS REPORT PRIORITY REVIEW

--:--z UNILINK MENU SAT CONFIG tracker timer ENABLED auto return ENABLED STORE

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 447 UL-801 Installation Manual L. Priority Configuration 1 Press PRIORITY [4L] to display the COMM PRIORITY page. SYS CONFIG 1/4 I/O CONFIG STORE VHF CONFIG TEL CONFIG SAT CONFIG POS REPORT PRIORITY REVIEW

--:--z UNILINK MENU 2 Press 1ST [2L] to cycle through the NORMAL options. Based on which option is chosen, not all options will be seen for each choice. Repeat for 2ND [3L]

and 3RD [4L]. COMM PRIORITY STORE normal alternate st sat none st nd none none nd rd none none rd

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN 3 Press 1ST [2R] to cycle through the ALTERNATE options. Based on which option is chosen, not all options will be seen for each choice. Repeat for 2ND

[3R] and 3RD [4R]. 4 Press RETURN [5R] to show the SYS CONFIG 1/4 page. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 448 UL-801 Installation Manual M. Telephony (TEL) Configuration SYS CONFIG 1/4 I/O CONFIG STORE VHF CONFIG TEL CONFIG SAT CONFIG POS REPORT PRIORITY REVIEW

--:--z UNILINK MENU 2 Press AIR PHONE [1L] to select the option for telephony communications. 3 Press ACCESS NUMBER [2L] and enter up to 19 alphanumeric characters for the primary telephone access number. Press ENTER when completed. NOTE: Contact your DSP to obtain the correct access number. 5 Press NEXT to display the TEL CONFIG 2/2 page. Press REDIAL PAUSE [1L] and enter a pause of 5 to 60 seconds. Press DIAL ATTEMPTS [2L] and enter a number of dial attempts of 1 to 6. Press AUTO-DELAY [3L] and enter a delay of 1 to 9 minutes. 1 Press TEL CONFIG [2R] to display the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page. TEL CONFIG 1/2 air phone IRIDIUM STORE access number

-------------------

wx maps DISABLED BAUD RATE bps susp msg ENABLED

--:--z 4 Press WX MAPS [3L] to toggle the ENABLED or DISABLED option for each. Repeat for SUSP MSG [4L]. NOTE: If IRIDIUM is chosen as the AIR PHONE option, WX MAPS, in the window above, displays a BAUD RATE option that can be selected at LSK [3R]. TEL CONFIG 2/2 redial pause sec STORE dial attempts auto-delay min

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN 6 Press RETURN [5R] to display the SYS CONFIG 1/4 page. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 449 UL-801 Installation Manual N. Position Report Configuration SYS CONFIG 1/4 I/O CONFIG STORE VHF CONFIG TEL CONFIG SAT CONFIG POS REPORT PRIORITY REVIEW

--:--z UNILINK MENU 1 Press POS REPORT [3R]

to display the POS REPORT page. 2 Press AUTOMATIC REPORTING: IN AIR

[2L] and select ENABLED OR DISABLED. 3 Press ON GROUND [3L]

and and select ENABLED OR DISABLED. 4 Press IN AIR DEFAULT [4L]

and select ENABLED OR DISABLED. POS REPORT STORE air intv 15MINS automatic reporting:

in air ENABLED on ground ground intv DISABLED 60MINS in air default DISABLED

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN 5 Press AIR INTV [2R] and enter the number of minutes. 6 Press GROUND INTV [3R]

and enter the number of minutes. 7 Press RETURN [5R] to display the SYS CONFIG 1/4 page and perform the Configuration Review. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 450 UL-801 Installation Manual O. Configuration Review SYS CONFIG 1/4 I/O CONFIG STORE VHF CONFIG TEL CONFIG SAT CONFIG POS REPORT PRIORITY REVIEW

--:--z UNILINK MENU 1 Press REVIEW [4R] to display the REVIEW 1/22 page. NOTE: The REVIEW pages are a visual representation of the contents of the UniLink Configuration Module. After reviewing all pages for errors, press NEXT on the keypad to return to the REVIEW Page 1. If the configuration is correct, press RETURN LSK [5R] to display SYS CONFIG 1/4. Press STORE [1R] twice to save the configuration. If errors were noted during the review, it will be necessary to return to the appropriate configuration page to make the changes. REVIEW 1/22 discrete in:

disc in, active state

:not used , ground

:not used , ground PRINT SEND

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN 3 Press NEXT to display the each sequential review page. REVIEW 2/22

:not used , ground

:not used , ground

:not used , ground

:not used , ground

:not used , ground

:not used , ground

:not used , ground

:not used , ground

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN 2 Press SEND [4R] to transmit a Configuration Report downlink. NOTE: When SEND is pressed, the QUEUED message displays over the SEND LSK. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 451 UL-801 Installation Manual REVIEW 3/22 discrete out:

disc out, active state

:not used , ground

:not used , ground

:not used , ground

:not used , ground

:not used , ground

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN REVIEW 5/22

:not used , ground arinc rx:

rx port :fms/cdu rx port :not used rx port :not used rx port :not used rx port :not used

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN REVIEW 7/22 rx port :not used rx port :not used rx port :not used arinc tx:

tx port :fms/cdu speed:low tx port :--------

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN REVIEW 9/22 speed:low tx port :--------

speed:low tx port :--------

speed:low REVIEW 4/22

:not used , ground

:not used , ground

:not used , ground

:not used , ground

:not used , ground

:not used , ground

:not used , ground

:not used , ground

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN REVIEW 6/22 rx port :not used rx port :not used rx port :not used rx port :not used rx port :not used rx port :not used rx port :not used rx port :not used

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN REVIEW 8/22 speed:low tx port :--------

speed:low tx port :--------

speed:low tx port :--------

speed:low tx port :--------

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN REVIEW 10/22 port : not used port : not used port : not used port : not used port : not used serial:

port : not used

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN graphics:

cdu/mfd baud:.kbps

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN REVIEW 11/22 cdu:-----------

cdu:-----------

cdu:-----------

vhf config:

radio:none contact timer:enabled tracker timer:enabled

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN REVIEW 12/22 preferred dsp:none arinc:disabled sita:disabled avicom:disabled enabled mode:poa/aoa minimum sqp:

sqp threshold:

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 452 UL-801 Installation Manual REVIEW 13/22 voice freq ctrl:

disabled sat config:

tracker timer:disabled auto return:disabled REVIEW 14/22 normal st:vhf normal nd:none normal rd:none alternate st:none alternate nd:none alternate rd:none comm priority:

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN tel config:

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN REVIEW 15/22 air phone:none access number:

--------------------

wx maps:disabled susp msg:enabled baud rate:bps redial pause:sec dial attempts:

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN REVIEW 17/22 sys config :

media advis:enabled met data:disabled flight no.:disabled oooi data:disabled aircraft:

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN REVIEW 19/22 pushback:disabled departure:disabled exp taxi:disabled alerts:

alert:ms alert:ms chime:ms

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN REVIEW 21/22 fans aural:ms delay msg tx:min ground delay:min fans latency:sec supp addr:-------

sys config :

config mod updates:

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN REVIEW 16/22 auto-delay:min pos report:

in air:enabled on ground:disabled in air default:disabled air intv:min ground intv:min

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN REVIEW 18/22 type:----

registration:-------

airline id:-----

fin number:---

icao addr:--------

clearances:

oceanic:disabled

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN REVIEW 20/22 chime:ms inhib on gnd:kts inhib alt:ft alt type:baro after off:min sys config :

fans:enabled

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN REVIEW 22/22 date time

-aug- z

-aug- z

-aug- z

--:--z UNILINK MENU RETURN 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 453 UL-801 Installation Manual Maintenance, Checkout, and Troubleshooting 1. UniLink Ground Checkout Procedures A. Post Installation Test For instructions on testing the UniLink following the initial installation in an aircraft, the installer should refer to the installation Ground and/or Flight Test Plans that are part of the UniLink installation (TC, STC, Field Approval) certification package. The installation approval applicant should contact Universal Avionics Certification Department for Ground and/or Flight Test Plan templates that can be used for developing customized test plans. B. Return to Service The following defines the conditions under which tests, specified below, should be conducted.

(1) Safety Precautions User should follow all appropriate safety precautions. Power Input Unless otherwise specified, tests should be conducted with the equipment powered by the aircrafts electrical power generating system. Associated Equipment or Systems Unless otherwise specified, turn on all aircraft electrically operated equipment and systems before conducting these tests. Environment During tests, the equipment should not be subjected to environmental conditions that exceed those specified by the equipment manufacturer.

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5) Warm-up Period No warm-up period is required. However, some time must be allowed for all associated equipment to boot up properly and stabilize. C. UniLink to FMS/CDU Communications NOTE: This procedure should be completed for each FMS/CDU connected to the UniLink.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Verify that DATA 1/4 page is displayed an active UNILINK prompt. From the DATA 1/4 page, press the UNILINK LSK [3R] and verify the UNILINK MENU 1/2 page is displayed. Press RETURN LSK [5R]. Verify that the DATA 1/4 page is displayed. Repeat test steps 1 through 3 for each FMS/CDU connected and configured for UniLink. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 501 UL-801 Installation Manual D. Version Check

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) From the UNILINK MENU Page 1, press NEXT. Press MAINTENANCE LSK [4L]. Press VERSIONS LSK [3L]. Verify the correct UniLink SCN and Part Number appears on the screen. E. Device Status

(1)

(2)

(3) Ensure all peripheral devices are powered on. Press the DEVICE STATUS LSK [1L] on the MAINTENANCE 1/3 page. Verify that the device status is OK for all applicable configured peripheral devices such as FMSs, MCDUs, CDUs, low and high resolution graphics devices, and CVRs. Press NEXT to cycle thru the DEVICES pages. F. UniLink to Display Processor RS-422 Communications This procedure applies only to display devices wired and configured to support weather graphics.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) From the MAINTENANCE 1/3 page, press the TESTS LSK [2R]. Press the IMAGE LSK [2L]. The IMAGE TEST IN PROGRESS pop-up message will appear. Verify that the test image below is presented on all appropriate display devices. NOTE: This is a Low Resolution test image and will be displayed as such on High Resolution display devices as well. UniLink does not generate a High Resolution test image. It is recommended that you delete the test image following test completion. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 502 G. UL-801 VHF Communications UL-801 Installation Manual

(2)

(3) VHF datalink service coverage on the ground may be limited. Coverage may be affected by ground obstacles and may be restricted due to poor line of sight of the VHF ground station antenna.

(1) The VHF communications status is indicated on the UniLink COMM STATUS page. Press COMM STATUS LSK [4L] on the UNILINK MENU 1/2 page. If VHF COMM STATUS is COMM/IDLE, a request for ATIS information can be performed on the ground. Otherwise, if the VHF COMM STATUS is NOCOMM/SCANNING, the aircraft should be relocated elsewhere until the status of COMM/IDLE is obtained. To request D-ATIS, from the UNILINK MENU Page 1:

Press the FLIGHT INFO LSK. Press the D-ATIS LSK. Press AIRPORT. Type KORD, for example, or your airport identifier. Press LSK [ENTER]. Press SEND to transmit the request. If QUEUED is displayed above the SEND prompt, the VHF probably is not connected to the ACARS system. If Sending, SENT is displayed. The request was received and acknowledged. Your request will be shortly received by UniLink and available for viewing. H. OOOI Sensor Test

(4)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Ensure Door and Park Brake discrete inputs are connected and configured. From UNILINK MENU 2/2 page, press the MAINTENANCE LSK [4L]. Press SENSOR STATUS LSK [2L]. Open and close the door. Verify the DOORS status changes accordingly. Release and set parking brake. Verify the BRAKE status changes accordingly. Verify the AIR/GROUND status is ON GROUND. NOTE:

If the aircraft is on jacks, the status will be IN AIR. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 503 UL-801 Installation Manual I. J. Printer Test

(1)

(2) With the DATA page 1/4 displayed, press UNILINK LSK [3R]. The UNILINK Verify that printer power is on and has passed its self-test. MENU 1/2 will display. Press the NEXT key. Press MAINTENANCE LSK [4L] to display the MAINTENANCE 1/3 page. Press TESTS LSK [2R] to display the TESTS page. Press PRINTER LSK [1L]. The printing message pop-up message will display and a test pattern will be sent to the printer. The TESTS page will again display.

(7) Checking the UL-801 FANS ALERTS Output Discretes This procedure applies only to FANS-enabled aircraft.

(1) From the DATA 1/4 page, press UNILINK LSK [3R]. The UNILINK MENU 1/2 page will display. Press the NEXT key. Press MAINTENANCE LSK [4L] to display the MAINTENANCE 1/3 page. Press TESTS LSK [2R] to display the TESTS page. Press FANS ALERTS LSK [1R]. The FANS DISCRETE TEST IN PROGRESS pop-

up message will appear. Verify that all appropriate FANS Visual and Aural alerts activate momentarily.

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) K. Checking the UL-801 Self-Test (Optional) This test simply reboots the UniLink. After the reboot process, verify that the UniLink prompt becomes active. L. Checking the UL-801 Weather Graphics using a SatCom-based Telephony System NOTE: Ensure that the selected DSP supports Weather Graphics uplinks.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) Press the DATA key to display the DATA 1/4 page. Press UNILINK LSK [3R] to display UNILINK MENU 1/2. Press WX MAPS LSK [2R] to display the WX MAP REQUEST page. Press SIG WX LSK [2R] and the SIGNIFICANT WX page will display. Press SEND LSK [4R]. This prompts UniLink to place a call to the selected DSP. The QUEUED and SENDING messages display. After a few minutes, the FMS UniLink will display NEW WX ADVISORY under the ADVISORY area. Press the LSK to the left of the ADVISORY message to display the message. a) If a UniLink page is not currently displayed on the FMS, the MSG icon light will flash.

(7)

(8) Press the MSG key on the FMS to display the MESSAGES 1/X page. The UNILINK WX MAP RCVD message will appear. Pressing the UniLink prompt will display the UNILINK MENU 1/2 page. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 504 UL-801 Installation Manual

(9) Press LSK [5L] to display the weather map. Verify that the correct map has been received. M. Checking the UL-801 ARINC 741 SatCom (SAT) NOTE: Ensure that the selected DSP provides this service.

(1)

(2)

(3) Verify that the SatCom SDU is powered up, initialized, and logged on. From the UNILINK MENU 1/2 page, press COMM STATUS. If the SatCom status is NOCOMM/UNAVAILABLE, UniLink has not detected label 270 from the SatCom. This indicates the Sat Link is unavailable. If the SatCom status is NOCOMM/CONNECTING, the SatCom Link is available, UniLink will send a Link Test message, and wait for an acknowledgement from the ACARS network to confirm connectivity to the network. If SatCom status is COMM/IDLE, the SatCom Link connectivity to the ACARS network has been confirmed and UniLink is ready to send and receive messages via the SatCom link.

(4)

(5) All tests are now complete. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 505 UL-801 Installation Manual 2. Error Messages A complete list of defined error messages is shown in the following tables:

The Pop-up Error Messages table shows the error conditions that result in a pop-up window error message. These errors are deemed significant enough to warrant immediate, detailed annunciation. The General Error Messages table shows the general error messages that may result in a NEW ERROR MSG advisory alert, as well as the recommended actions for resolution. The Configuration Error Messages shows possible configuration error messages, as well as the recommended actions for resolution. The Hidden Error/Status Messages shows unannunciated error/status messages that are normally hidden from the error log. A. Pop-up Window Error Messages Pop-up Window Error Messages Pop-up Window Text FMS/MCDU CONFIG ERROR. CONFIG NOT SAVED. FMS/VDR SHARE TX PORT. CONFIG NOT SAVED. FMS/MCDU CONFIG ERROR. CONFIG NOT SAVED UNABLE TO WRITE TO CONFIG MODULE. DISPLAY PROCESSOR FAIL Condition User attempt to STORE configuration data that does not configure the same FMS or MCDU on RX Port 1 and TX Port 1. User attempt to STORE configuration data with an ARINC 429 transmit port configured to interface to both a UASC FMS and an ARINC 750 VDR. User attempt to STORE configuration data with both a UASC FMS/CDU and an MCDU configured together. User attempt to STORE configuration data with Configuration Module error. A configured display processor has failed or experienced a communication failure, or too many bad slots have been detected. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 506 UL-801 Installation Manual B. General Error Messages UniLink error messages may be found by using either of the following two processes:

(1) Press the MSG key to see the messages. a) Press the NEXT key to scroll through the messages. Press the MAINTENANCE LSK [4L] on the UNILINK MENU 1/2 page. a) Press the ERROR LOG LSK [4L] on the MAINTENANCE 1/3 page. NOTE:

The Error Log contains all error messages including configuration error messages. The messages found when pressing the MSG key are only applicable to configuration errors. b) Press the NEXT key to scroll through the messages. General Error Messages Text Action/Description

(2) FMS1 INOP FMS2 INOP FMS3 INOP CDU1 DP INOP CDU2 DP INOP CDU3 DP INOP REMOTE CDU1 DP INOP REMOTE CDU2 DP INOP REMOTE CDU3 DP INOP MFD-LR1 INOP Cycle power to UniLink and FMS1. If condition persists contact UASC. Cycle power to UniLink and FMS2. If condition persists contact UASC. Cycle power to UniLink and FMS3. If condition persists contact UASC. Cycle power to UniLink and CDU1. If condition persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a particular device, examine connection between the graphics display device and UniLink. Cycle power to UniLink and CDU2. If condition persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a particular device, examine connection between the graphics display device and UniLink. Cycle power to UniLink and CDU3. If condition persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a particular device, examine connection between the graphics display device and UniLink. Cycle power to UniLink and RCDU1. If condition persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a particular device, examine connection between the graphics display device and UniLink. Cycle power to UniLink and RCDU2. If condition persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a particular device, examine connection between the graphics display device and UniLink. Cycle power to UniLink and RCDU3. If condition persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a particular device, examine connection between the graphics display device and UniLink. Cycle power to UniLink and MFD1. If condition persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a particular device, examine connection between the graphics display device and UniLink. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 507 UL-801 Installation Manual General Error Messages Text Action/Description MFD-LR2 INOP MFD-LR3 INOP HR-1 INOP HR-2 INOP MCDU1 INOP MCDU2 INOP MCDU3 INOP HF RADIO INOP SDU INOP TEL INOP CMC INOP A740 PRINTER INOP SERIAL PRINTER INOP VHF VDLM2 RADIO INOP THE SYSTEM IS RUNNING LOW ON NVRAM AND SHOULD BE RESTARTED. THE SYSTEM IS CRITICALLY SHORT OF NVRAM. SYSTEM RESTART IS IMMINENT. Cycle power to UniLink and MFD2. If condition persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a particular device, examine connection between the graphics display device and UniLink. Cycle power to UniLink and MFD3. If condition persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a particular device, examine connection between the graphics display device and UniLink. Cycle power to UniLink and high-resolution display 1

(MFD-640 or EFI-890R). If condition persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a particular device, examine connection between the graphics display device and UniLink. Cycle power to UniLink and high-resolution display 2

(MFD-640 or EFI-890R). If condition persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a particular device, examine connection between the graphics display device and UniLink. Cycle power to UniLink and MCDU1. If condition persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a particular device, examine connection between the graphics display device and UniLink. Cycle power to UniLink and MCDU2. If condition persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a particular device, examine connection between the graphics display device and UniLink. Cycle power to UniLink and MCDU3. If condition persists contact UASC. If condition is recent or frequent for a particular device, examine connection between the graphics display device and UniLink. Cycle power to UniLink and HF radio. Cycle power to UniLink and SDU. If condition persists contact UASC. Cycle power to UniLink and telephone system. If condition persists contact UASC. Cycle power to UniLink and CMC. If condition persists contact UASC. Cycle power to UniLink and Printer. If condition persists contact UASC. No action required. Temporary condition that will correct with next job UniLink sends to printer. Cycle power to UniLink and radio. If condition persists contact UASC. Cycle power to UniLink. Cycle power to UniLink. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 508 UL-801 Installation Manual General Error Messages Text SERIAL PRINTER FAILURE PRINT JOB TOO LARGE

[Hardware port] FAIL example:

ARINC TX PORT 1 FAIL THE FATAL ERROR LOG HAS BEEN CORRUPTED THE FATAL ERROR LOG CONTAINS A NEW ENTRY PROTOCOL ERROR LOG CORRUPT. OLD PROTOCOL ERRORS DISCARDED. LOGGING OF PROTOCOL ERRORS WILL RESTART. LINK ERROR LSK [device name, count, first/last occurrence]

PROTOCOL ERROR LSK [device name, count, first/last occurrence]

CTS BUSY LSK [device name, count, first/last occurrence]

CTS TIMEOUT LSK [device name, count, first/last occurrence]

MSG RETRY LSK [device name, count, first/last occurrence]

SYN LSK [device name, count, first/last occurrence]

MSG TIMEOUT LSK [device name, count, first/last occurrence]

DSC RETRY LSK [device name, count, first/last occurrence]

DSC TIMEOUT LSK [device name, count, first/last occurrence]

SPW RETRY LSK [device name, count, first/last occurrence]

SPW TIMEOUT LSK [device name, count, first/last occurrence]

TX BUF FULL LSK [device name, count, first/last occurrence]

RX PORT 1: UASC FMS DETECTED. OVERRIDING PORT CONFIGURATION FOR MCDU RX PORT 1: MCDU DETECTED. OVERRIDING PORT CONFIGURATION FOR UASC FMS Action/Description Examine the printer and its serial and power connections. No action required. UniLink has attempted to forward a corrupted uplink to the printer. Re-request uplink data. Cycle power to UniLink. If condition persists contact UASC. No action required. Old messages are discarded and the log is automatically restarted. No action required. If condition is frequent, contact UASC. No action required. Old messages are discarded and protocol error logging is automatically restarted. No action required. Protocol errors are automatically corrected, usually with no impact to the user. If condition is frequent for a particular device, examine connection between device and UniLink. No action required. Protocol errors are automatically corrected, usually with no impact to the user. If condition is frequent for a particular device, examine connection between device and UniLink. Configure UniLink with ARINC receive port 1 as FMS/CDU1 and transmit port 1 as FMS/CDU1. Configure UniLink with ARINC receive port 1 as MCDU1 and transmit port 1 as MCDU1. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 509 UL-801 Installation Manual General Error Messages Text Action/Description STATUS TIMEOUT LSK [count, first/last occurrence]

ENQ TIMEOUT LSK [count, first/last occurrence]

RECORD TIMEOUT LSK [count, first/last occurrence]

RECORD RESEND LSK [count, first/last occurrence]

PRINTER FAIL LSK [count, first/last occurrence]

DOOR OPEN LSK [count, first/last occurrence]

TEST LSK [count, first/last occurrence]

INIT LSK [count, first/last occurrence]

OVERRUN LSK [count, first/last occurrence]

BUSY LSK [count, first/last occurrence]

INVALID CTS LSK [count, first/last occurrence]

ERASE FAULT LSK [device name, count, first/last occurrence]

TOO MANY FAILED SLOTS LSK [device name, count, first/last occurrence]

UNEXPECTED EOF LSK [device name, count, first/last occurrence]

UNKNOWN IMAGE FORMAT LSK [device name, count, first/last occurrence]

GIF ERROR LSK [device name, count, first/last occurrence]

TRANSMIT FAIL LSK [device name, count, first/last occurrence]

INVALID GX HEADER LSK [count, first/last occurrence]

VDL MODE A NOT SUPPORTED VDL MODE 2 NOT SUPPORTED VDR TX WARN FAULT VDR STATUS FAULT CTRL PROTOCOL CMU ERROR CTRL PROTOCOL VDR ERROR ACARSIP CMU ERROR No action required. Protocol errors are automatically corrected, usually with no impact to the user. If condition is frequent, examine connection between the printer and UniLink. If condition is recent or frequent for a particular device, examine connection between the graphics display device and UniLink. If condition is recent or frequent, examine connection between telephone system and UniLink. Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists, replace VDR or contact UASC. Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists, replace VDR or contact UASC. Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists, replace VDR or contact UASC. Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists, replace VDR or contact UASC. Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists, replace VDR or contact UASC. Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists, replace VDR or contact UASC. Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists, replace VDR or contact UASC. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 510 UL-801 Installation Manual General Error Messages Action/Description Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists, replace VDR or contact UASC. Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists, replace VDR or contact UASC. Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists, replace VDR or contact UASC. Cycle power once to the VDR. If condition persists, contact UASC. Text ACARSIP VDR ERROR ASIP CMU ERROR ASIP VDR ERROR VDR SOFTWARE LOAD FAULT 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 511 UL-801 Installation Manual C. Configuration Error Messages Configuration Error Messages Text Action MEMORY ALLOCATION ERROR--UNABLE TO LOAD CONFIGURATION MODULE. ERROR READING CONFIGURATION MODULE FROM NON-VOLATILE MEMORY. CONFIGURATION MODULE CRC CODE FAILURE. CONFIGURATION MODULE VERSION INCOMPATIBLE WITH SOFTWARE--

CONFIGURATION UPDATE REQUIRED. CONFIGURATION MODULE REVISION OLDER THAN SOFTWARE REVISION--

CONFIGURATION UPDATE REQUIRED. AN ADC AND AN IOP BUS MAY NOT BE CONFIGURED TOGETHER CONFIGURATION UPDATED FROM OLDER FORMAT. SOME DEFAULT VALUES USED. CONFIGURATION SHOULD BE VERIFIED AND RESAVED. CONFIGURATION MODULE REVISION NEWER THAN SOFTWARE REVISION--

EXTRA DATA IGNORED. ONE OR MORE ARINC DEVICES HAS A TRANSMIT PORT BUT NO RECEIVE PORT. ONE OR MORE ARINC DEVICES HAS A RECEIVE PORT BUT NO TRANSMIT PORT. THE SAME DEVICE IS ASSIGNED TO MORE THAN ONE ARINC 429 TRANSMIT PORT. AN A702 FMS OR GENERIC DEVICE IS CONFIGURED BUT LACKS A DEFINITION IN THE CUSTOMER DATABASE. MULTIPLE CMC DEVICES CONFIGURED. THE UASC FMS THE ARINC 702 FMS AND THE GNSS RECEIVER MAY NOT BE CONFIGURED TOGETHER. Attempt to store configuration. If condition persists contact UASC. Attempt to store configuration. If condition persists contact UASC. Attempt to store configuration. If condition persists contact UASC. Verify UniLink software update and configuration, and store the configuration. Verify UniLink software update and configuration, and store the configuration. An IOP bus cannot be configured concurrently with a DADC. Configure UniLink accordingly. Once the configuration has been stored this message will not appear. A newer configuration revision should be used. Once the configuration has been stored this message will not appear. Configure UniLink with a receive port for each configured transmit port listed on the ARINC TRANSMIT page. Configure UniLink with a transmit port for each configured receive port listed on the ARINC RECEIVE page. Any given device cannot be configured on more than one transmit port; configure UniLink accordingly. Load UniLink with a customer database that supports an ARINC 702 FMS or generic device, as appropriate. Configure UniLink with either no CMC or a single CMC, as appropriate, because UniLink cannot be configured with multiple CMC devices. Configure UniLink with the same navigation source only (i.e., the UASC FMS(s), the ARINC 702 FMS(s), or the GNSS receiver) because UniLink cannot be configured with dissimilar navigation sources concurrently. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 512 UL-801 Installation Manual Configuration Error Messages Text Action AN ADC AND A GNSS RECEIVER MAY NOT BE CONFIGURED TOGETHER AN ADC AND AN ARINC 702 FMS MAY NOT BE CONFIGURED TOGETHER AN IOP BUS MAY NOT BE CONFIGURED TOGETHER WITH AN ARINC 702 FMS OR THE GNSS RECEIVER. AN MCDU IS CONFIGURED BUT AN ARINC 702 FMS OR GNSS RECEIVER IS NOT CONFIGURED. IN ORDER FOR AN MCDU INSTALLATION TO DISPLAY WEATHER MAPS AT LEAST ONE DISPLAY MUST BE SET TO MFD-LR OR HR-1 OR HR-2 IN ORDER FOR AN MCDU INSTALLATION TO DISPLAY WEATHER MAPS NO DISPLAY MAY BE SET TO CDU OR RCDU. MORE THAN TWO REMOTE CDU GRAPHIC DEVICES CONFIGURED REMOTE CDU-1 CONFIGURED WITHOUT PRIMARY CDU-1 CONFIGURED. REMOTE CDU-2 CONFIGURED WITHOUT PRIMARY CDU-2 CONFIGURED. REMOTE CDU-3 CONFIGURED WITHOUT PRIMARY CDU-3 CONFIGURED. NO MORE THAN FOUR DISPLAY PROCESSORS MAY BE CONFIGURED ON THE LOW-RES DISPLAY PORT ARINC TEST DEVICE CONFIGURED. A VHF RADIO IS CONFIGURED BUT NO VALID AIRCRAFT REGISTRATION IS CONFIGURED. A VHF RADIO IS CONFIGURED BUT NO VALID AIRLINE/AGENCY ID IS PRESENT. Configure UniLink with DADC device(s) or GNSS receiver. DADC and GNSS are dissimilar altitude sources and cannot be configured concurrently, configure UniLink accordingly. A digital air data computer cannot be configured concurrently with an ARINC 702 FMS, configure UniLink accordingly. An IOP bus cannot be configured concurrently with an ARINC 702 FMS or with a GNSS receiver; configure UniLink accordingly. When an MCDU is configured, configure UniLink with an ARINC 702 FMS or a GNSS receiver. If the MCDU(s) is wired and configured as an ARINC 739A MCDU, configure UniLink with a low-resolution MFD-640 and/or a high-resolution MFD-640/EFI-890R.

(See 0 and 2.) If the MCDU(s) is wired and configured as an ARINC 739A MCDU, configure UniLink with a low-resolution MFD-640 and/or a high-resolution MFD-640/EFI-890R. Ensure no MCDU, wired as an ARINC 739A MCDU, is configured as a CDU. (See 0 and 2). Configure UniLink with no more than two RCDU displays. When configuring a remote CDU for graphics, configure both the RCDU and the corresponding primary CDU. When configuring a remote CDU for graphics, configure both the RCDU and the corresponding primary CDU. When configuring a remote CDU for graphics, configure both the RCDU and the corresponding primary CDU. Configure UniLink with four or fewer graphic devices on the low-resolution display serial port. Remove the TEST DEV selection from any ARINC RECEIVE port; it is used for test purposes only. When an A750 VDR is configured, configure UniLink with a valid aircraft registration in the REGISTRATION field on the A/C CONFIG page. Configure UniLink with a valid airline/agency identifier in the left portion of the AIRLINE ID field on the A/C CONFIG page. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 513 UL-801 Installation Manual Configuration Error Messages Text Action SATCOM IS CONFIGURED BUT NO VALID AIRCRAFT REGISTRATION IS CONFIGURED. SATCOM IS CONFIGURED BUT NO VALID AIRLINE/AGENCY ID IS PRESENT. AN AIR PHONE DEVICE IS CONFIGURED BUT NO VALID TELEPHONE NUMBER IS PRESENT. A VALID TELEPHONE NUMBER IS PRESENT BUT NO AIR PHONE DEVICE IS CONFIGURED. VHF APPEARS IN NORMAL MEDIA PRIORITY SELECTIONS BUT NO VHF RADIO IS CONFIGURED. VHF APPEARS IN ALTERNATE MEDIA PRIORITY SELECTIONS BUT NO VHF RADIO IS CONFIGURED. SATCOM APPEARS IN NORMAL MEDIA PRIORITY SELECTIONS BUT NO SDU IS CONFIGURED. SATCOM APPEARS IN ALTERNATE MEDIA PRIORITY SELECTIONS BUT NO SDU IS CONFIGURED. TELEPHONY APPEARS IN NORMAL MEDIA PRIORITY SELECTIONS BUT NO AIR PHONE DEVICE IS CONFIGURED. TELEPHONY APPEARS IN ALTERNATE MEDIA PRIORITY SELECTIONS BUT NO AIR PHONE DEVICE IS CONFIGURED. VHF IS CONFIGURED BUT IS NOT IN EITHER MEDIA PRIORITY LIST. Configure UniLink either with a valid aircraft registration in the REGISTRATION field on the A/C CONFIG page or with no ARINC transmit and receive ports for an SDU. Configure UniLink either with a valid airline/agency identifier in the left portion of the AIRLINE ID field on the A/C CONFIG page or with no ARINC transmit and receive ports for an SDU. Configure UniLink either with a valid telephone number in the TEL ACCESS NUMBER field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page or do not configure UniLink for an air phone (NONE in the AIR PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page). Configure UniLink either with the correct air phone device in the AIR PHONE field or with no telephone number in the TEL ACCESS NUMBER field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page. Configure UniLink either with the correct VHF radio in the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG 2/2 page or without VHF in any of the three NORMAL fields on the COMM PRIORITY page. Configure UniLink either with the correct VHF radio in the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG 2/2 page or without VHF in any of the three ALTERNATE fields on the COMM PRIORITY page. Configure UniLink either with ARINC transmit and receive ports for an SDU or without SAT in any of the three NORMAL fields on the COMM PRIORITY page. Configure UniLink's ARINC transmit and receive ports for an SDU or configure UniLink with no SAT in any of the three ALTERNATE fields on the COMM PRIORITY page. Configure UniLink either with the correct air phone device in the AIR PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page or without TEL in any of the three NORMAL fields on the COMM PRIORITY page. Configure UniLink either with the correct air phone device in the AIR PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page or without TEL in any of the three ALTERNATE fields on the COMM PRIORITY page. Configure UniLink either with VHF in the desired priority NORMAL and/or ALTERNATE fields on the COMM PRIORITY page or with NONE in the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG 2/2 page. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 514 UL-801 Installation Manual Configuration Error Messages Text Action SATCOM IS CONFIGURED BUT IS NOT IN EITHER MEDIA PRIORITY LIST. TELEPHONY IS CONFIGURED BUT IS NOT IN EITHER MEDIA PRIORITY LIST. THE VHF SIMULATOR INTERFACE IS CONFIGURED. THIS INTERFACE IS FOR DEVELOPMENT ONLY. THE SATCOM SIMULATOR INTERFACE IS CONFIGURED. THIS INTERFACE IS FOR DEVELOPMENT ONLY. THE TELEPHONY SIMULATOR INTERFACE IS CONFIGURED. THIS INTERFACE IS FOR DEVELOPMENT ONLY. A SERIAL PORT IS ASSIGNED TO IRIDIUM BUT NO COMPATIBLE TELEPHONY DEVICE IS CONFIGURED. THE CONFIGURED TELEPHONY DEVICE IS

/IRIDIUM BUT NO COMPATIBLE SERIAL PORT IS CONFIGURED. A SERIAL PORT IS ASSIGNED TO AERO M BUT NO COMPATIBLE TELEPHONY DEVICE IS CONFIGURED. THE CONFIGURED TELEPHONY DEVICE IS AERO M BUT NO COMPATIBLE SERIAL PORT IS CONFIGURED. THE NEW-MESSAGE-ANNUNC-INHIBIT FUNCTION IS CONFIGURED TO USE RADIO ALTITUDE BUT NO IOP BUS IS CONFIGURED. THE NEW-MESSAGE-ANNUNC-INHIBIT FUNCTION IS CONFIGURED TO USE RADIO ALTITUDE BUT THE CONFIGURED ALTITUDE THRESHOLD VALUE IS TOO LARGE. THE VHF VOX-ANNUN OUTPUT DISCRETE IS CONFIGURED BUT NO ARINC 750 VDR IS CONFIGURED. THE VDR MODE-SELECT OUTPUT DISCRETE IS CONFIGURED BUT NO ARINC 750 VDR IS CONFIGURED. Configure UniLink either with SAT in the desired priority NORMAL and/or ALTERNATE fields on the COMM PRIORITY page or with no ARINC transmit and receive ports for an SDU. Configure UniLink either with TEL in the desired priority NORMAL and/or ALTERNATE fields on the COMM PRIORITY page or with NONE in the AIR PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page. Remove the VHF GND SIM selection on the SERIAL setup pages; it is used for test purposes only. Remove the SAT GND SIM selection on the SERIAL setup pages; it is used for test purposes only. Remove the TEL SIM selection on the SERIAL setup pages; it is used for test purposes only. Configure UniLink either with IRIDIUM in the AIR PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page or with no serial port as IRIDIUM on the SERIAL setup pages. Configure UniLink either with the correct serial port as IRIDIUM on the SERIAL setup pages or with NONE in the AIR PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page. Configure UniLink either with T-T Aero-M in the AIR PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page or with no serial port as Aero-M on the SERIAL setup pages. Configure UniLink either with the correct serial port as Aero-M on the SERIAL setup pages or with NONE in the AIR PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page. Configure UniLink either with DHC8 IOPn in the correct PORT n field on the ARINC RECEIVE pages or with BARO in the ALT TYPE field on the ALERT CONFIG page. Configure UniLink either with a value equal to or less than 2500 in the INHIB ALT field or with BARO in the ALT TYPE field on the ALERT CONFIG page. Configure UniLink either with the external A750 VDR in the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG 2/2 page or with no DISC OUT n field as VOX ANNUN on the DISC OUT pages. Configure UniLink either with the external A750 VDR in the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG 2/2 page or with no DISC OUT n field as VDR VOX SEL on the DISC OUT pages. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 515 UL-801 Installation Manual Configuration Error Messages Text Action THE VHF-NOCOMM OUTPUT DISCRETE IS CONFIGURED BUT NO VHF RADIO IS CONFIGURED. THE SAT-NOCOMM OUTPUT DISCRETE IS CONFIGURED BUT NO SDU IS CONFIGURED. THE TEL-NOCOMM OUTPUT DISCRETE IS CONFIGURED BUT NO TELEPHONE IS CONFIGURED. ARINC IS CONFIGURED BUT OOOI IS DISABLED. AN ARINC VOICE TUNE BUS TRANSMIT PORT IS CONFIGURED BUT NO A750 VDR IS CONFIGURED. AN ARINC TRANSMIT PORT IS CONFIGURED FOR BOTH VOX TUNE AND SOME OTHER FUNCTION. THE VOX TUNE PORT CANNOT BE SHARED. THE SETTINGS FOR VOICE FREQUENCY TUNING, THE VOICE TUNE BUS, AND THE VHF MODE-SELECT OUTPUT DISCRETE ARE INCONSISTENT WITH ONE ANOTHER. VHF VOICE FREQUENCY TUNING IS ENABLED BUT NO A750 VDR IS CONFIGURED. WEATHER MAPS ARE ENABLED BUT NO AIR PHONE IS CONFIGURED. CDU 1 IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS BUT FMS 1 OR MCDU 1 IS NOT CONFIGURED. Configure UniLink either with the correct radio in the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG 2/2 page or with no DISC OUT n field as VHF NOCOMM on the DISC OUT pages. Configure UniLink either with ARINC transmit and receive ports for an SDU or with no DISC OUT n field as SAT NOCOMM on the DISC OUT pages. Configure UniLink either with the correct air phone in the AIR PHONE field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page or with no DISC OUT n field as TEL NOCOMM on the DISC OUT pages. Configure UniLink either with ENABLED in the OOOI TIMES field on the SYS CONFIG 2/4 page or with OFF in the ARINC field on the DSP SETUP page. Configure UniLink either with the external A750 VDR in the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG page or with no ARINC transmit port with device VOICE TUNE BUS. The VOX TUNE bus cannot be configured concurrently with another device; configure UniLink accordingly. Configure UniLink either with:

The VOICE FREQ CONTROL field on the VHF CONFIG page set to ENABLE 25 or ENABLE 8.33/25, AND an ARINC transmit port with device VOICE TUNE BUS, AND a DISC OUT n field configured as VDR VOX SEL. OR The VOICE FREQ CONTROL field on the VHF CONFIG page set to DISABLE, AND no ARINC transmit port with device VOICE TUNE BUS, AND no DISC OUT n field as VDR VOX SEL. Configure UniLink either with the external A750 VDR in the RADIO TYPE field on the VHF CONFIG page or with DISABLE in the VOICE FREQ CONTROL field on the VHF CONFIG page. Configure UniLink either with the correct air phone in the AIR PHONE field or with DISABLED in the WX MAPS field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page. Configure UniLink either with ARINC transmit and receive ports for FMS 1 or MCDU 1, as appropriate, or with NONE in the CDU 1 GRAPHICS DISP ON field on the GRAPHICS setup page. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 516 UL-801 Installation Manual Configuration Error Messages Text Action CDU 2 IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS BUT FMS 2 OR MCDU 2 IS NOT CONFIGURED. CDU 3 IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS BUT FMS 3 OR MCDU 3 IS NOT CONFIGURED. AT LEAST ONE CDU IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS BUT WEATHER MAPS ARE DISABLED AND NO SERIAL LO- OR HI-RES DISPLAY IS CONFIGURED. A SERIAL LO- or HI-RES DISPLAY IS CONFIGURED BUT WEATHER MAPS ARE DISABLED AND NO CDU IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS. WEATHER MAPS ARE ENABLED BUT NO SERIAL LO- OR HI-RES DISPLAY IS CONFIGURED AND NO CDU IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS. WEATHER MAPS ARE ENABLED AND A SERIAL LO- or HI-RES DISPLAY IS CONFIGURED BUT NO CDU IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS. WEATHER MAPS ARE ENABLED AND AT LEAST ONE CDU IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS BUT NO SERIAL LO- OR HI-RES DISPLAY IS CONFIGURED. AT LEAST ONE CDU IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS AND A SERIAL LO- or HI-RES DISPLAY IS CONFIGURED BUT WEATHER MAPS ARE DISABLED. Configure UniLink either with ARINC transmit and receive ports for FMS 2 or MCDU 2, as appropriate, or with NONE in the CDU 2 GRAPHICS DISP ON field on the GRAPHICS setup page. Configure UniLink either with ARINC transmit and receive ports for FMS 3 or MCDU 3, as appropriate, or with NONE in the CDU 3 GRAPHICS DISP ON field on the GRAPHICS setup page. Configure UniLink either with ENABLED in the WX MAPS field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page and with LO-RES DISPLAY, HI-RES DISPLAY 1, or HI-RES DISPLAY 2 in the correct PORT n field on the SERIAL setup pages or with NONE in all CDU n GRAPHICS DISP ON fields on the GRAPHICS setup page. Configure UniLink either with ENABLED in the WX MAPS field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page and with the correct value in the appropriate CDU n GRAPHICS DISP ON field(s) on the GRAPHICS setup page or with no PORT n field as LO-RES DISPLAY, HI-RES DISPLAY 1, or HI-RES DISPLAY 2 on the SERIAL setup pages. Configure UniLink either with LO-RES DISPLAY, HI-

RES DISPLAY 1, or HI-RES DISPLAY 2 in the correct PORT n field on the SERIAL setup pages and with the correct value in the appropriate CDU n GRAPHICS DISP ON field(s) on the GRAPHICS setup page or with DISABLED in the WX MAPS field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page. Configure UniLink either with the correct value in the appropriate CDU n GRAPHICS DISP ON field(s) on the GRAPHICS setup page or with DISABLED in the WX MAPS field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page and with no PORT n field as LO-RES DISPLAY, HI-RES DISPLAY 1, or HI-RES DISPLAY 2 on the SERIAL setup pages. Configure UniLink either with LO-RES DISPLAY, HI-

RES DISPLAY 1, or HI-RES DISPLAY 2 in the correct PORT n field on the SERIAL setup pages or with DISABLED in the WX MAPS field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page and with NONE in all CDU n GRAPHICS DISP ON fields on the GRAPHICS setup page. Configure UniLink either with ENABLED in the WX MAPS field on the TEL CONFIG 1/2 page or with NONE in all CDU n GRAPHICS DISP ON fields on the GRAPHICS setup page and with no PORT n field as LO-RES DISPLAY, HI-RES DISPLAY 1, or HI-RES DISLAY 2 on the SERIAL setup pages. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 517 UL-801 Installation Manual Configuration Error Messages Text Action HR-1 IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS BUT NO HI-RES DISPLAY 1 SERIAL INTERFACE IS CONFIGURED. HR-2 IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS BUT NO HI-RES DISPLAY 2 SERIAL INTERFACE IS CONFIGURED. HI-RES DISPLAY 1 SERIAL INTERFACE IS CONFIGURED BUT NO HR-1 IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS. HI-RES DISPLAY 2 SERIAL INTERFACE IS CONFIGURED BUT NO HR-2 IS CONFIGURED FOR GRAPHICS. PRE-DEPARTURE CLEARANCE IS ENABLED BUT NO VALID AIRCRAFT TYPE IS PRESENT. A750 VDR CONFIGURED ON LOW-SPEED TRANSMIT PORT. A429 TRANSMIT PORT SET TO A750 VDR AND VM CMC ARINC 429 PORTS CONFIGURED FOR ARINC 750 VDR BUT VHF RADIO TYPE NOT SET TO ARINC 750 VDR VHF RADIO TYPE SET TO ARINC 750 VDR BUT NO ARINC 429 PORTS ARE CONFIGURED FOR AN ARINC 750 VDR. VHF RADIO TYPE SET TO A750 VDR AND VDR MODE-SELECT DISCRETE IS CONFIGURED BUT THE DISCRETE ACTIVE STATE IS NOT SET TO OPEN VHF RADIO CONFIGURED BUT ICAO AIRCRAFT ADDRESS MISSING ILLEGAL ICAO AIRCRAFT ADDRESS FANS DISABLED NO VALID AIRCRAFT REGISTRATION IS CONFIGURED FANS DISABLED VHF RADIO OR SDU NOT CONFIGURED Configure UniLink either with an HI-RES DISPLAY 1 serial port or remove HR1 from the GRAPHICS setup configuration. Configure UniLink either with an HI-RES DISPLAY 2 serial port or remove HR2 from the GRAPHICS setup configuration. Configure UniLink either with a HR1 on the GRPAHICS setup page or remove HI-RES DISPLAY 1 from the SERIAL configuration. Configure UniLink either with a HR2 on the GRPAHICS setup page or remove HI-RES DISPLAY 2 from the SERIAL configuration. Configure UniLink either with a valid four-character ICAO aircraft type designator in the TYPE field on the A/C CONFIG page or with DISABLED in the PREDEPARTURE field on the CLEARANCES page. Configure the ARINC 429 transmit port, which is configured to A750 VDR, to HIGH speed. Configure the ARINC 429 transmit port to either A750 VDR or VM (Vibro-Meter) CMC. Configure RADIO TYPE to A750 VDR. Configure ARINC 429 transmit and receive ports to A750 VDR. If an A750 VDR is installed and VDR voice select discrete is configured, set the discrete active state to OPEN. Configure UniLink with a legal ICAO aircraft address, which ranges from 00000001 octal through 77777776 octal and is normally included on the aircraft registration document. Configure UniLink with a legal ICAO aircraft address, which ranges from 00000001octal through 77777776 octal and is normally included on the aircraft registration document. Configure UniLink either with a valid aircraft registration in the REGISTRATION field on the A/C CONFIG page or with FANS as DISABLED. Configure UniLink with a VHF radio and/or an SDU, or do not configure FANS. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 518 UL-801 Installation Manual Configuration Error Messages Text Action FANS DISABLED ATC DATABASE NOT INSTALLED FANS DISABLED DUAL UASC FMS NOT CONFIGURED SQP MIN IS SET BELOW THREE SQP THRESHOLD IS BELOW ONE OR ABOVE EIGHT CVR CONFIGURED ON LOW-SPEED TRANSMIT PORT. Configure UniLink with FANS functionality ENABLED and load a valid ATC database or configure UniLink with FANS disabled. Configure UniLink for two UASC FMSs or configure UniLink with FANS disabled. Configure SQP MIN with a value greater than three. Configure the SQP threshold with a value greater than one but less than eight. Configure the ARINC 429 transmit port, which is configured to CVR, to HIGH speed or assign the CVR to a high speed port. NOTE 1:

If an MCDU is wired and configured as an ARINC 739A MCDU, which does not display graphics, a low-resolution MFD-640 or a high-resolution MFD-640/EFI-890R must also be configured in order to display graphics. If an MCDU is wired and configured as a UASC FMS CDU, the MCDU is able to receive graphics and, therefore, no other device is necessary to display graphics. NOTE 2: A low-resolution MFD-640 and high-resolution MFD-640/EFI-890R are configured on the GRAPHICS setup page in the appropriate CDU n GRAPHICS DISP ON field(s). NOTE 3: The SQP threshold is the difference between the SQP of the currently tracked ground station and the value of the SQP of another ground station necessary to initiate a handoff. D. Hidden Error/Status Messages Hidden Error/Status Messages Text UNKNOWN ERROR THE PORTION OF FLASH MEMORY CONTAINING THE MTBF COUNTER HAS BEEN CORRUPTED AND THE MTBF COUNT IS NO LONGER VALID Action/Description Cycle power to UniLink. If condition persists contact UASC. Cycle power to UniLink. If condition persists contact UASC. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page 519 UL-801 Installation Manual Appendix 1 This appendix contains industry-standard acronyms, abbreviations, and terms used in the UniLink Installation manual. 1. Acronyms, Abbreviations, and Terms Acronym/Abbreviation/Term Description ACARS ACK ADC ADS-C AFN ALT ALTRV AOA AOC ARINC ATC ATIS ATM ATN ATS AVLC BCS CDA CDB CDU Circuit Mode Data CLX CM CMU CNS COMM CPDLC Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting System Acknowledgment Air Data Computer Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Contract ATS Facilities Notification Altitude Altitude Reservation ACARS Over Aviation VHF Link Control (AVLC) Aeronautical (Airline) Operational Control Aeronautical Radio, Incorporated (Data Interface Format Standard Air Traffic Control Automatic Terminal Information System (see D-ATIS) Air Traffic Management Aeronautical Telecommunications Network Air Traffic Services Aviation VHF Link Control Block Check Sequence Current Data Authority Customer Database Control Display Unit A full duplex bi-directional communication link in which data is transmitted and received simultaneously. A hand shake must be established prior to data being exchanged. Supported by a UniLink RS-232 port configured for TEL. Clearance Configuration Module Communication Management Unit Communication Navigation Surveillance Communication (also referred to as COM) Controller-Pilot Datalink Communications 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page A1-1 UL-801 Installation Manual Acronym/Abbreviation/Term Description CRC CSDB CTS CVFDR CVR D-ATIS DEPT CLX DLSP DM DP DPSK DTU DTU-100 DSP EFB EFI EFI-890R EMI ETA ETD EXP EUROCAE FAA FANS FL FLT NO FMC FMS FPL FREQ FSK GND SPD GNSS GPS Cyclic Redundancy Check Commercial Standard Data Bus (Data Interface Format Standard) Clear to Send Cockpit Voice and Flight Data Recorder (UASC) Cockpit Voice Recorder Digital Automatic Terminal Information System (also referred to as ATIS) Departure Clearance Datalink Service Provider (also referred to as DSP) Downlink Message Display Processor Differential Phase Shift Keying Data Transfer Unit (UASC) Data Transfer Unit-100 (UASC) Datalink Service Provider (also referred to as DLSP) Electronic Flight Bag Electronic Flight Instrument Electronic Flight Instrument-890R (UASC) Electromagnetic Interference Estimated Time of Arrival Estimated Time of Departure Expected European Organisation For Civil Aviation Equipment Federal Aviation Administration Future Air Navigation Systems Flight Level Flight Number Flight Management Computer (UASC) Flight Management System (UASC) Flight Plan Frequency Frequency Shift Keying Ground Speed Global Navigation Satellite System Global Positioning System 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page A1-2 UL-801 Installation Manual Acronym/Abbreviation/Term Description HS ICAO ID IFR IOP I/O LAN LOS LRU LS LSK MARSA MCDU MCDU MCU MDM MFD MIC MSG MSK MVFR ND NDA NOCOMM NO CVG NVM ONBD OOOI High Speed International Civil Aviation Organization Identification, Identifier Instrument Flight Rules Input/Output Processor Input/Output Local Area Network Line of Sight Line-Replaceable Unit Low Speed Line Select Key Military Assumes Responsibility for Separation of Aircraft Multifunctional Control Display Unit (UASC) Multi-Purpose Control Display Unit (ARINC) Modular Concept Unit Modem Multifunction Display Microphone Message Minimum Shift Keying Marginal Visual Flight Rules Navigation Display Next Data Authority No Communication No Coverage Non-volatile Memory Onboard Out, Off, On, In (used to detect and report changes to the major flight phases of the aircraft) 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page A1-3 UL-801 Installation Manual Acronym/Abbreviation/Term Description Packet Mode Data A half duplex bi-directional communication link in which data is accumulated in packets of various lengths and sent out in a burst or bursts so therefore does not support voice communications. Packet switching is the process of routing and transferring data by means of addressed packets so that a channel is occupied during the transmission of the packet only. Upon completion of the data transfer, the channel is made available for the transfer of other traffic. Supported by a UniLink ARINC port configured to provide VHF and SAT capability. Pre-departure Clearance Primary Flight Display Pilot Weather Report Plain Old ACARS Position Push-to-Talk Remote Control Display Unit Received Radio Frequency Reports Request to Send Required Route Receive Abbreviation for Satellite Communications Link. The SAT link provides communication via Iridium Short Burst Data

(SBD) and packet mode data Inmarsat equipment that utilizes a specific satellite constellation. Satellite Communications Software Control Number Satellite Data Unit Selective Calling Significant Meteorological Information Society of International Aeronautical Telecommunications

(Societe Internationale de Telecommunications Aeronautiques) Signal Quality Parameter Solid State Data Transfer Unit (UASC) 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page A1-4 PDC PFD PIREP POA POS PTT RCDU RCVD RF RPTS RTS RQD RTE RX SAT SatCom SCN SDU SELCAL SIGMET SITA SQP SSDTU UL-801 Installation Manual Acronym/Abbreviation/Term Description TEL Abbreviation for telephony. The telephony communication link provides a circuit mode data connection via a dial-up modem. A hand shake must be established prior to data being exchanged. Only an RS-232 capable SatCom can be used. Terminal Weather Information for Pilots Transmit Universal Avionics Systems Corporation UniLink (UASC) Uplink Message An Unverified message is one that does not contain safeguards to prevent data corruption during transmission. Such messages are labeled AOC on the page in which they are displayed. See Verified Message. Universal Serial Bus Universal Time Coordinated VHF Digital Link VHF Data Radio A Verified message is one that has been safeguarded against potential data corruption during transmission and is determined to be error-free using CRC code comparisons and validity indicators. See Unverified Message. Very High Frequency terrestrial-based packet mode. This is a data communications link used for obtaining textual weather, D-ATIS, and the transmission of position reporting, OOOI, and safety services communications

(UniLink Flight Information Services). Does not support weather graphics. Voice Voltage Standing Wave Ratio Weight On Wheels Waypoint Weather Transmit Transmission Off Transmission On 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page A1-5 TWIP TX UASC UL UM Unverified Message USB UTC VDL VDR Verified Message VHF VOX VSWR WOW WPT WX XMT XOFF XON UL-801 Installation Manual Appendix 2 This appendix contains UniLink Menus and subordinate menus. Pages illustrated with dashed boxes are optional and are only available when the functionality reflected on the pages is enabled via UniLink-configured options. 1. UniLink Menus and Submenus without FANS A. UniLink Menu 1/2 NOTES:

1. Only available if OOOI is enabled in configuration. 2. Only available if VHF is enabled in configuration. 3. Only available if DATA is enabled in configuration. 4. Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page A2-1 UniLink Menu 1/2 Continued UL-801 Installation Manual NOTES:

1. Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page A2-2 B. UniLink Menu 2/2 UL-801 Installation Manual NOTES:

1. Check with DSP for availability of this feature. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page A2-3 C. Maintenance Menu UL-801 Installation Manual 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page A2-4 UL-801 Installation Manual D. Configuration Menu MAINTENCE 1/3

(continued from previous page) SYS CONFIG 1/4 I/O CONFIG DISC IN VHF CONFIG SAT CONFIG PRIORITY TEL CONFIG POS REPORT REVIEW AiRCRAFT CLEARANCES ALERTS DISC OUT ARINC RX ARINC TX SERIAL GRAPHICS SYS CONFIG 2/4 SYS CONFIG 3/4 SYS CONFIG 4/4 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page A2-5 UL-801 Installation Manual 2. UniLink Menus and Submenus with FANS A. UniLink Menu 1/2 UNILINK MENU FLIGHT INFO D-ATIS TWIP DEPARTURE CLX OCEANIC CLX VERIFY MSGS PUSHBACK CLX EXP TAXI CLX OCEANIC CLX ATC ATC ATC EMERGENCY ATC REVIEW

(MAYDAY) ATC REVIEW

(PAN) ATC REVIEW

(Cancel Emergency) ATC LOG ON ATC LOG ON 1/2 TO ATC LOG ON 2/2

(LOG ON TO Region pages including:

- N PACIFIC

- S PACIFIC

- ASIA

- INDIAN OCEAN

- N ATLANTIC

- S ATLANTIC

- EUROPE) 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page A2-6 UniLink Menu 1/2 Continued UL-801 Installation Manual 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page A2-7 UniLink Menu 1/2 Continued UL-801 Installation Manual 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page A2-8 UniLink Menu 1/2 Continued UL-801 Installation Manual NOTES:

1. Only available if VHF is enabled in configuration (UL-800 only). 2. Only available if SAT is enabled in configuration. 3. Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page A2-9 UL-801 Installation Manual B. Maintenance Menu UNILINK MENU Continued MAINTENANCE 1/3 DEVICES SENSORS 1/2 DISCRETES BCST DATA SOURCE FMS SENSORS 2/2 VDR STATUS VERSIONS ERROR LOG SYS CONFIG 1/4 I/O CONFIG DISC IN VHF CONFIG DISC OUT SAT CONFIG ARINC RX PRIORITY ARINC TX TEL CONFIG SERIAL POS REPORT GRAPHICS REVIEW 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page A2-10 UL-801 Installation Manual B. Maintenance Menu Continued Includes Configuration Menu choices 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page A2-11 C. OPS Menu UL-801 Installation Manual NOTES:

1. Only available if OOOI is enabled in configuration. 2. Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page A2-12 OPS Menu Continued UL-801 Installation Manual NOTES:

1. Only available if TEL is enabled in configuration. 2. The SELCAL option only displays when associated messages are available. Check with DSP for availability of this feature. 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page A2-13 UL-801 Installation Manual Appendix 3 This appendix contains a list of Datalink Service Providers (DSP) that may be used with the UniLink. 1. Datalink Service Providers Providers ARINC Direct Honeywell OneLink Aero-I and Aero-M Communication Services Contact Information https://direct.ARINC.net 941-360-0680 (24 hr.) 602-822-7502 (Fax) Aviation.Services@Honeywell.com Sat Com Direct SATCOM1 Sita Universal Weather and Aviation 888-448-9003 321-777-3000 321-777-3702 (Fax)

+ 45 4615 4546 http://satcom1.com/

http://www.sita.aero/

801-231-5600 713-944-1622 713-943-4610 (Fax) 23-20-06 15 December 2011 Page A3-1

 

 

 

 

 

 

EXHIBIT C : Internal Photographs 15"

8"

Photo 1 : UL-801 with Side Panel Removed Photo 2 : UL-801 with VDR Module Disconnected from Power Supply Page 1 of 9 Photo 3 : VDR Module. Connections (left to right) are Antenna, 28VDC Power, and Serial Communication/Digital Power.

(Approx. size is 5.5"x5.5"x0.75") Photo 4 : VDR Module with Bottom Lid Removed Showing Mod-Demod Board (top) and Transmitter Board (bottom). Page 2 of 9 Photo 5 : VDR Module with Top Lid Removed Showing DSP Board Page 3 of 9 3"

Photo 6 : DSP Board Top Left Photo 7 : DSP Board Top Right Page 4 of 9 Photo 8 : DSP Board Bottom Left Photo 9 : DSP Board Bottom Right Page 5 of 9 2.25"

Photo 10 : MDM Board Top Left Photo 11 : MDM Board Top Right Page 6 of 9

 

 

Photo 12 : MDM Board Bottom Left Photo 13 : MDM Board Bottom Right Page 7 of 9 2.5"

Photo 14 : TX Board Top Left Photo 15 : TX Board Top Right Page 8 of 9 Photo 16 : TX Board Bottom Left Photo 17 : TX Board Bottom Right Page 9 of 9

 

 

EXHIBIT B : External Photographs Photo 1 : UL-801 External View of Top and Side Photo 2 : UL-801 External View of Rear and Side Photo 3 : UL-801 Rear Connector

 

 

EXHIBIT D : Identification Label and Location Figure 1 : UL-801 ID Label Location Figure 2 : UL-801 ID Label

 

 

FE UNIVERSAL AVIONICS

*" SYSTEMS a 11/29/2011 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Request for Permanent Confidentiality Dear Sir/Madam, In accordance with 47CFR Section 0.457 and Section 0.459 pertaining to confidential material, we hereby request to hold permanently confidential all information contained within the below identified exhibits/document categories submitted pursuant to radio equipment certification requirements for FCC ID: NWS10801 1. Block Diagrams EXHIBIT A 2. Operational Description EXHIBIT A 3. Schematics EXHIBIT A 4. Parts List / Tune-Up Procedure EXHIBIT E The above material contains trade secrets and proprietary information as specified by 47CFR 0.457(d) and technical data, which would customarily be guarded from competitors. The public disclosure of this information might be harmful to our company and provide unjustified benefits to our competitors.

| Ce NAME/ SIGNATURE : Scott Hornbrook VA LiL MT COMPANY / POSITION : _ Universal Avionics Systems Corporation Electrical Engineer

 

 

Universal Avionics Systems Corporation 3260 E. Universal Way Tucson, AZ 85756 CAL-2011-1052 08-Nov-2011 Page 1 of 1 Federal Aviation Administration Mr. Michael Biggs, Acting Division Manager ATC Spectrum Engineering Services 800 Independence Avenue, SW Room 715 Washington, DC 20591 Attention:

Electronic Copies: FAA: Mr. Jerry Ramos, Ms. Stacey Jackson FAA: Mr. Michael Biggs UASC: Robert C. Uhde, Paul Damschen, Kenneth Lenger, Laura Niles, Joe LoCascio, Lynn Root, Bill Kelly, Rene Spani, Scott Hornbrook CKC Labs: Randy Clark FAA Notification of Application for Certification under FCC Part 87 for UL-801 Communications Management Unit ST14460LA-A Progress tracking number 1158998 Subject:

FAA Project:

Delivery:

Reference:

(a) DOCUMENT 47 CFR Part 87.147 01-Oct-2009 Enclosures:

DOCUMENT TITLE Authorization of equipment DOCUMENT

(1) FCC Form 731 19-Oct-2011 DOCUMENT TITLE Application for Equipment Authorization Mr. Biggs, In accordance with the requirements of the Federal Communications Commission Rules and Regulations, 47 CFR Part 87.147(d), Universal Avionics Systems Corporation hereby notifies the Federal Aviation Administration of its simultaneous filing with CKC Certification Services (an FCC TCB) of an Application for Equipment Authorization on FCC Form 731 of equipment intended for transmission in frequency ranges set forth in FCC rules Part 87.147(d)(3) which require FAA notification. The Application for Equipment Authorization covers Universal Avionics UL-801 Communications Management Unit, part number 10801-XX. A copy of Form 731 is enclosed. Please direct any questions regarding this filing to Universal Avionics Certification organization at the contact information in the footer of this letter. FAA Action Requested:

Please acknowledge receipt and acceptance of this application in accordance with standard procedures for your office. Best regards:

Kenneth Lenger Senior Certification Engineer 3260E.UniversalWayTucson,AZ85756U.S.A.(520)5737627(800)5955906Fax5202952384 buhde@uasc.compdamscchen@uasc.comklenger@uasc.comlniles@uasc.com CertificationContacts:

 

 

U.S. Department of Transportation Federal A\

Administration JAN 14 2012 Mr. Andy Leimer Federal Communication Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Dear Mr. Leimer:

The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA), Office of Spectrum Engineering Services has received the Universal Avionics Systems Corporation letter dated Jan 4, 2012 as notification of an application for a Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Certification of the Communications Management Unit, Model # UL-801 Avionics, FCC ID: NWS10801. The FAA has no objection to FCC Certification of this equipment capable of operating in very high frequency (VHF) data link Mode 2 and Mode A, on 25 kHz channel spacing to provide aviation data services. Applicants for FCC certification of avionics, should be aware that aircraft might operate Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) receivers along with VHF transceivers, and it is likely that, without proper filtering of the VHF equipment harmonic emissions (per TSO-C169), there is a potential for interference caused by the VHF transceiver, to the on board GNSS receiver. If you require any additional information, please contact Ms. Annette Allender, Spectrum Planning and International Group, at (202) 267-3893 or by e-mail annette.allender@faa.gov. Sincerely, Robert A. Frazier Manager, Spectrum Planning and International Group ce:

Kenneth Lenger, klenger@uasc.com Laura Niles, Iniles@uasc.com Fax: 520-295-2384